Cmdlets
Add-PvsDeviceToDomain
Add a Device, all Devices in a Collection or View to a Domain.
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DeviceId | Guid[] | GUID of the Device to Add to the Domain. |
| Name or DeviceName | string[] | Name of the Device to Add to the Domain. |
| DeviceMac | PvsPhysicalAddress[] | MAC of the Device to Add to the Domain. |
| CollectionId | Guid[] | GUID of the Collection to Add all Devices to the Domain. |
| SiteViewId | Guid[] | GUID of the Site View to Add all Devices to the Domain. |
| FarmViewId | Guid[] | GUID of the Farm View to Add all Devices to the Domain. |
| FarmViewName | string[] | Name of the Farm View to Add all Devices to the Domain. |
or one of these is required & resolutions
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| CollectionName | string[] | |
| SiteViewName | string[] |
Optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Domain | string[] | |
| OrganizationUnit | string[] |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid[] | |
| SiteName | string[] |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
DeviceId, CollectionId, SiteViewId or FarmViewId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Add-PvsDeviceToDomain for Name with Domain and OrganizationUnit
Add-PvsDeviceToDomain -Name theDevice -Domain theDomain -OrganizationUnit theOrganizationUnit
EXAMPLE 2: Add-PvsDeviceToDomain for PvsDevice Using Pipe
The Get-PvsDevice output is piped to the Add-PvsDeviceToDomain.
Get-PvsDevice -Name theDevice -Fields Guid | Add-PvsDeviceToDomain -Domain theDomain -OrganizationUnit theOrganizationUnit
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
EXAMPLE 3: Add-PvsDeviceToDomain for FarmViewName with Domain and OrganizationUnit
Add-PvsDeviceToDomain -FarmViewName theFarmView -Domain theDomain -OrganizationUnit theOrganizationUnit
EXAMPLE 4: Add-PvsDeviceToDomain for PvsFarmView Using Pipe
The Get-PvsFarmView output is piped to the Add-PvsDeviceToDomain.
Get-PvsFarmView -Name theFarmView -Fields Guid | Add-PvsDeviceToDomain -Domain theDomain -OrganizationUnit theOrganizationUnit
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
EXAMPLE 5: Add-PvsDeviceToDomain for CollectionName with Domain and OrganizationUnit
Add-PvsDeviceToDomain -CollectionName theCollection -SiteName theSite -Domain theDomain -OrganizationUnit theOrganizationUnit
CollectionId can be used instead of CollectionName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 6: Add-PvsDeviceToDomain for PvsCollection Using Pipe
The Get-PvsCollection output is piped to the Add-PvsDeviceToDomain.
Get-PvsCollection -Name theCollection -SiteName theSite -Fields Guid | Add-PvsDeviceToDomain -Domain theDomain -OrganizationUnit theOrganizationUnit
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 7: Add-PvsDeviceToDomain for SiteViewName with Domain and OrganizationUnit
Add-PvsDeviceToDomain -SiteViewName theSiteView -SiteName theSite -Domain theDomain -OrganizationUnit theOrganizationUnit
SiteViewId can be used instead of SiteViewName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 8: Add-PvsDeviceToDomain for PvsSiteView Using Pipe
The Get-PvsSiteView output is piped to the Add-PvsDeviceToDomain.
Get-PvsSiteView -Name theSiteView -SiteName theSite -Fields Guid | Add-PvsDeviceToDomain -Domain theDomain -OrganizationUnit theOrganizationUnit
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
Add-PvsDeviceToView
Move a Device to a Collection. Personal vDisk Devices cannot be moved to a Collection in another Site.
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DeviceId | Guid[] | GUID of the Device to Move. |
| Name or DeviceName | string[] | Name of the Device to Move. |
| DeviceMac | PvsPhysicalAddress[] | MAC of the Device to Move. |
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteViewId | Guid[] | |
| FarmViewId | Guid[] | |
| FarmViewName | string[] |
or this is required & resolution
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteViewName | string[] |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid[] | |
| SiteName | string[] |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
DeviceId, SiteViewId or FarmViewId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Add-PvsDeviceToView for PvsDevice to PvsFarmView
Add-PvsDeviceToView -Name theDevice -PvsFarmViewName thePvsFarmView
EXAMPLE 2: Add-PvsDeviceToView for PvsDevice Using Pipe
The Get-PvsDevice output is piped to the Add-PvsDeviceToView.
Get-PvsDevice -Name theDevice -Fields Guid | Add-PvsDeviceToView -PvsFarmViewName thePvsFarmView
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
EXAMPLE 3: Add-PvsDeviceToView for PvsFarmView Using Pipe
The Get-PvsFarmView output is piped to the Add-PvsDeviceToView.
Get-PvsFarmView -Name theFarmView -Fields Guid | Add-PvsDeviceToView -Name theDevice
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
EXAMPLE 4: Add-PvsDeviceToView for PvsDevice to PvsSiteView
Add-PvsDeviceToView -Name theDevice -SiteViewName theSiteView -SiteName theSite
SiteViewId can be used instead of SiteViewName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 5: Add-PvsDeviceToView for PvsDevice Using Pipe
The Get-PvsDevice output is piped to the Add-PvsDeviceToView.
Get-PvsDevice -Name theDevice -Fields Guid | Add-PvsDeviceToView -SiteViewName theSiteView -SiteName theSite
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. SiteViewId can be used instead of SiteViewName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 6: Add-PvsDeviceToView for PvsSiteView Using Pipe
The Get-PvsSiteView output is piped to the Add-PvsDeviceToView.
Get-PvsSiteView -Name theSiteView -SiteName theSite -Fields Guid | Add-PvsDeviceToView -Name theDevice
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
Add-PvsDiskLocatorToDevice
Assign a Disk Locator to a Device, a Collection or View.
This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DiskLocatorId | Guid[] | GUID of the Disk Locator to Assign. |
or this is required & resolution
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or DiskLocatorName | string[] |
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| DeviceId | Guid[] | |
| DeviceName | string[] | |
| DeviceMac | PvsPhysicalAddress[] | |
| CollectionId | Guid[] | |
| SiteViewId | Guid[] | |
| FarmViewId | Guid[] | |
| FarmViewName | string[] |
or one of these is required & resolutions
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| CollectionName | string[] | |
| SiteViewName | string[] |
Optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| RemoveExisting | SwitchParameter |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid[] | |
| SiteName | string[] |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| StoreId | Guid[] | |
| StoreName | string[] |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
DiskLocatorId, DeviceId, CollectionId, SiteViewId or FarmViewId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Add-PvsDiskLocatorToDevice for PvsDiskLocator to PvsDevice
Add-PvsDiskLocatorToDevice -Name theDiskLocator -DeviceName theDevice -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore
Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
EXAMPLE 2: Add-PvsDiskLocatorToDevice for PvsDiskLocator Using Pipe
The Get-PvsDiskLocator output is piped to the Add-PvsDiskLocatorToDevice.
Get-PvsDiskLocator -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore -Fields Guid | Add-PvsDiskLocatorToDevice -DeviceName theDevice
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
EXAMPLE 3: Add-PvsDiskLocatorToDevice for PvsDevice Using Pipe
The Get-PvsDevice output is piped to the Add-PvsDiskLocatorToDevice.
Get-PvsDevice -Name theDevice -Fields Guid | Add-PvsDiskLocatorToDevice -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStoreName
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
EXAMPLE 4: Add-PvsDiskLocatorToDevice for PvsDiskLocator to PvsCollection
Add-PvsDiskLocatorToDevice -Name theDiskLocator -CollectionName theCollection -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore
EXAMPLE 5: Add-PvsDiskLocatorToDevice for PvsDiskLocator Using Pipe
The Get-PvsDiskLocator output is piped to the Add-PvsDiskLocatorToDevice.
Get-PvsDiskLocator -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore -Fields Guid | Add-PvsDiskLocatorToDevice -CollectionName theCollection -SiteName theSite
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
EXAMPLE 6: Add-PvsDiskLocatorToDevice for PvsCollection Using Pipe
The Get-PvsCollection output is piped to the Add-PvsDiskLocatorToDevice.
Get-PvsCollection -Name theCollection -SiteName theSite -Fields Guid | Add-PvsDiskLocatorToDevice -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStoreName
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
EXAMPLE 7: Add-PvsDiskLocatorToDevice for PvsDiskLocator to PvsFarmView
Add-PvsDiskLocatorToDevice -Name theDiskLocator -FarmViewName theFarmView -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore
Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
EXAMPLE 8: Add-PvsDiskLocatorToDevice for PvsDiskLocator Using Pipe
The Get-PvsDiskLocator output is piped to the Add-PvsDiskLocatorToDevice.
Get-PvsDiskLocator -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore -Fields Guid | Add-PvsDiskLocatorToDevice -FarmViewName theFarmView
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
EXAMPLE 9: Add-PvsDiskLocatorToDevice for PvsFarmView Using Pipe
The Get-PvsFarmView output is piped to the Add-PvsDiskLocatorToDevice.
Get-PvsFarmView -Name theFarmView -Fields Guid | Add-PvsDiskLocatorToDevice -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStoreName
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
EXAMPLE 10: Add-PvsDiskLocatorToDevice for PvsDiskLocator to PvsSiteView
Add-PvsDiskLocatorToDevice -Name theDiskLocator -SiteViewName theSiteView -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore
EXAMPLE 11: Add-PvsDiskLocatorToDevice for PvsDiskLocator Using Pipe
The Get-PvsDiskLocator output is piped to the Add-PvsDiskLocatorToDevice.
Get-PvsDiskLocator -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore -Fields Guid | Add-PvsDiskLocatorToDevice -SiteViewName theSiteView -SiteName theSite
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
EXAMPLE 12: Add-PvsDiskLocatorToDevice for PvsSiteView Using Pipe
The Get-PvsSiteView output is piped to the Add-PvsDiskLocatorToDevice.
Get-PvsSiteView -Name theSiteView -SiteName theSite -Fields Guid | Add-PvsDiskLocatorToDevice -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStoreName
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
Add-PvsDiskToUpdateTask
Add a Disk to an Update Task.
This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DiskLocatorId | Guid[] | GUID of the Disk Locator to Assign. |
or this is required & resolution
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or DiskLocatorName | string[] |
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| UpdateTaskId | Guid[] | |
| UpdateTaskName | string[] |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid[] | |
| SiteName | string[] |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| StoreId | Guid[] | |
| StoreName | string[] |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
DiskLocatorId or UpdateTaskId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Add-PvsDiskToUpdateTask for PvsDiskLocator to PvsUpdateTask
Add-PvsDiskToUpdateTask -Name theDiskLocator -UpdateTaskName theUpdateTask -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore
UpdateTaskId can be used instead of UpdateTaskName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 2: Add-PvsDiskToUpdateTask for PvsDiskLocator Using Pipe
The Get-PvsDiskLocator output is piped to the Add-PvsDiskToUpdateTask.
Get-PvsDiskLocator -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore -Fields Guid | Add-PvsDiskToUpdateTask -UpdateTaskName theUpdateTask -SiteName theSite
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
EXAMPLE 3: Add-PvsDiskToUpdateTask for PvsUpdateTask Using Pipe
The Get-PvsUpdateTask output is piped to the Add-PvsDiskToUpdateTask.
Get-PvsUpdateTask -Name theUpdateTask -SiteName theSite -Fields Guid | Add-PvsDiskToUpdateTask -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
Add-PvsDiskVersion
Add one or more new Versions to a Disk. A manifest file for the new Disk Version(s) must exist in the Store.
This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DiskLocatorId | Guid[] | GUID of the Disk Locator File to Add the new Disk Version(s) to. |
or this is required & resolution
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or DiskLocatorName | string[] |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid[] | |
| SiteName | string[] |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| StoreId | Guid[] | |
| StoreName | string[] |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
DiskLocatorId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Add-PvsDiskVersion for Name
Add-PvsDiskVersion -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore
Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
EXAMPLE 2: Add-PvsDiskVersion for PvsDiskLocator Using Pipe
The Get-PvsDiskLocator output is piped to the Add-PvsDiskVersion.
Get-PvsDiskLocator -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore -Fields Guid | Add-PvsDiskVersion
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
Clear-PvsConnection
Closes the existing SoapServer connection, and if -Persist is specified the connection settings in the registry are removed.
Optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Persist | SwitchParameter | If -Persist is specified, clear the connection settings in the registry. |
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Clear-PvsConnection
Clear-PvsConnection
EXAMPLE 2: Clear-PvsConnection with Persist
Clear-PvsConnection -Persist
Clear-PvsTask
Clear a single or all completed or cancelled Tasks in a Site or the whole Farm.
These are optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| TaskId | uint | Id of the Task to Clear. |
| SiteId | Guid[] | Site Id of the Tasks to Clear. |
| SiteName | string[] | Site Name of the Tasks to Clear. |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
TaskId or SiteId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “medium”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “medium” or “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Clear-PvsTask for TaskId
Clear-PvsTask -TaskId 101
EXAMPLE 2: Clear-PvsTask for PvsTask Using Pipe
The Get-PvsTask output is piped to the Clear-PvsTask.
Get-PvsTask -TaskId 101 -Fields -TaskId | Clear-PvsTask
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
EXAMPLE 3: Clear-PvsTask for SiteName
Clear-PvsTask -SiteName theSite
EXAMPLE 4: Clear-PvsTask for PvsTask Using Pipe
The Get-PvsTask output is piped to the Clear-PvsTask.
Get-PvsTask -SiteName theSite -Fields -SiteId | Clear-PvsTask
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
Copy-PvsDeviceProperties
Copy properties of one Device to a Device, all the Devices in a Collection, Site View or Farm View.
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| DeviceIdFrom | Guid | GUID of the Device to Copy from. |
| DeviceNameFrom | string | Name of the Device to Copy from. |
| DeviceMacFrom | PvsPhysicalAddress | Mac of the Device to Copy from. |
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DeviceId | Guid | |
| Name or DeviceName | string | |
| DeviceMac | PvsPhysicalAddress | |
| CollectionId | Guid | |
| SiteViewId | Guid | |
| FarmViewId | Guid | |
| FarmViewName | string |
or one of these is required & resolutions
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| CollectionName | string | |
| SiteViewName | string |
Optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Properties | uint[] |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid | |
| SiteName | string |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
DeviceId, CollectionId, SiteViewId or FarmViewId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Copy-PvsDeviceProperties for Name
Copy-PvsDeviceProperties -DeviceNameFrom theDeviceFrom -Name theDeviceTo
EXAMPLE 2: Copy-PvsDeviceProperties for Name with Properties
Copy-PvsDeviceProperties -DeviceNameFrom theDeviceFrom -Name theDeviceTo -Properties 2, 3
EXAMPLE 3: Copy-PvsDeviceProperties for PvsDevice Using Pipe
The Get-PvsDevice output is piped to the Copy-PvsDeviceProperties.
Get-PvsDevice -Name theDeviceTo -Fields Guid | Copy-PvsDeviceProperties -DeviceNameFrom theDeviceFrom -Properties 2, 3
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
EXAMPLE 4: Copy-PvsDeviceProperties for Name
Copy-PvsDeviceProperties -DeviceMacFrom "00-11-22-33-44-55" -Name theDeviceTo
EXAMPLE 5: Copy-PvsDeviceProperties for Name with Properties
Copy-PvsDeviceProperties -DeviceMacFrom "00-11-22-33-44-55" -Name theDeviceTo -Properties 2, 3
EXAMPLE 6: Copy-PvsDeviceProperties for PvsDevice Using Pipe
The Get-PvsDevice output is piped to the Copy-PvsDeviceProperties.
Get-PvsDevice -Name theDeviceTo -Fields Guid | Copy-PvsDeviceProperties -DeviceMacFrom \"00-11-22-33-44-55\" -Properties 2, 3
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
EXAMPLE 7: Copy-PvsDeviceProperties for FarmViewName
Copy-PvsDeviceProperties -DeviceNameFrom theDeviceFrom -FarmViewName theFarmViewNameTo
EXAMPLE 8: Copy-PvsDeviceProperties for FarmViewName with Properties
Copy-PvsDeviceProperties -DeviceNameFrom theDeviceFrom -FarmViewName theFarmViewNameTo -Properties 2, 3
EXAMPLE 9: Copy-PvsDeviceProperties for PvsFarmView Using Pipe
The Get-PvsFarmView output is piped to the Copy-PvsDeviceProperties.
Get-PvsFarmView -Name theFarmViewTo -Fields Guid | Copy-PvsDeviceProperties -DeviceNameFrom theDeviceFrom -Properties 2, 3
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
EXAMPLE 10: Copy-PvsDeviceProperties for CollectionName
Copy-PvsDeviceProperties -DeviceNameFrom theDeviceFrom -CollectionName theCollectionNameTo -SiteName theSite
CollectionId can be used instead of CollectionName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 11: Copy-PvsDeviceProperties for CollectionName with Properties
Copy-PvsDeviceProperties -DeviceNameFrom theDeviceFrom -CollectionName theCollectionNameTo -SiteName theSite -Properties 2, 3
CollectionId can be used instead of CollectionName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 12: Copy-PvsDeviceProperties for PvsCollection Using Pipe
The Get-PvsCollection output is piped to the Copy-PvsDeviceProperties.
Get-PvsCollection -Name theCollection -SiteName theSite -Fields Guid | Copy-PvsDeviceProperties -DeviceNameFrom theDeviceFrom -Properties 2, 3
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 13: Copy-PvsDeviceProperties for SiteViewName
Copy-PvsDeviceProperties -DeviceNameFrom theDeviceFrom -SiteViewName theSiteViewNameTo -SiteName theSite
SiteViewId can be used instead of SiteViewName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 14: Copy-PvsDeviceProperties for SiteViewName with Properties
Copy-PvsDeviceProperties -DeviceNameFrom theDeviceFrom -SiteViewName theSiteViewNameTo -SiteName theSite -Properties 2, 3
SiteViewId can be used instead of SiteViewName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 15: Copy-PvsDeviceProperties for PvsSiteView Using Pipe
The Get-PvsSiteView output is piped to the Copy-PvsDeviceProperties.
Get-PvsSiteView -Name theSiteView -SiteName theSite -Fields Guid | Copy-PvsDeviceProperties -DeviceNameFrom theDeviceFrom -Properties 2, 3
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
Copy-PvsDiskProperties
Copy properties of one Disk to a Disk.
This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| DiskLocatorIdFrom | Guid | GUID of the Disk Locator to Copy from. |
This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DiskLocatorId | Guid |
Optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Properties | uint[] |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
DiskLocatorId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Copy-PvsDiskProperties for Guid
Copy-PvsDiskProperties -DiskLocatorIdFrom "66302103-2991-4e42-ba58-a1614cec070c" -Guid "f5eb3de9-bcf4-416f-a289-6a9472c13f8b"
EXAMPLE 2: Copy-PvsDiskProperties for Guid with Properties
Copy-PvsDiskProperties -DiskLocatorIdFrom "66302103-2991-4e42-ba58-a1614cec070c" -Guid "f5eb3de9-bcf4-416f-a289-6a9472c13f8b" -Properties 2, 3
EXAMPLE 3: Copy-PvsDiskProperties for PvsDiskLocator Using Pipe
The Get-PvsDiskLocator output is piped to the Copy-PvsDiskProperties.
Get-PvsDiskLocator -Guid \"f5eb3de9-bcf4-416f-a289-6a9472c13f8b\" -Fields Guid | Copy-PvsDiskProperties -DiskLocatorIdFrom \"66302103-2991-4e42-ba58-a1614cec070c\" -Properties 2, 3
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
Copy-PvsServerProperties
Copy properties of one Server to a Server.
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| ServerIdFrom | Guid | GUID of the Server to Copy from. |
| ServerNameFrom | string | Name of the Server to Copy from. |
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or ServerId | Guid | |
| Name or ServerName | string |
Optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Properties | uint[] |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
ServerId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Copy-PvsDiskProperties for Name
Copy-PvsDiskProperties -ServerNameFrom theServerFrom -Name theServerTo
EXAMPLE 2: Copy-PvsDiskProperties for Name with Properties
Copy-PvsDiskProperties -ServerNameFrom theServerFrom -Name theServerTo -Properties 2, 3
EXAMPLE 3: Copy-PvsDiskProperties for PvsServer Using Pipe
The Get-PvsServer output is piped to the Copy-PvsDiskProperties.
Get-PvsServer -Name theServerTo -Fields Guid | Copy-PvsDiskProperties -ServerNameFrom theServerFrom -Properties 2, 3
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
Disable-PvsDeviceDiskLocator
Disable a Device’s DiskLocator.
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DeviceId | Guid[] | GUID of the Device to Disable the DiskLocator for. |
| Name or DeviceName | string[] | Name of the Device to Disable the DiskLocator for. |
| DeviceMac | PvsPhysicalAddress[] | MAC of the Device to Disable the DiskLocator for. |
This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| DiskLocatorId | Guid[] |
or this is required & resolution
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| DiskLocatorName | string[] |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| StoreId | Guid[] | |
| StoreName | string[] |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
DeviceId or DiskLocatorId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “medium”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “medium” or “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Disable a PvsDevice PvsDiskLocator
This example disables the PvsDiskLocator named theDiskLocator for the PvsDevice named theDevice.
Disable-PvsDeviceDiskLocator -Name theDevice -DiskLocatorName theDiskLocator -StoreName theStore
DiskLocatorId can be used instead of DiskLocatorName so that the StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
Dismount-PvsDisk
No longer Map the Disk.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Dismount-PvsDisk
Dismount-PvsDisk
Enable-PvsDeviceDiskLocator
Enable a Device’s DiskLocator. If the DiskLocator is Disabled, that overrides the Device DiskLocator setting.
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DeviceId | Guid[] | GUID of the Device to Enable the DiskLocator for. |
| Name or DeviceName | string[] | Name of the Device to Enable the DiskLocator for. |
| DeviceMac | PvsPhysicalAddress[] | MAC of the Device to Enable the DiskLocator for. |
This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| DiskLocatorId | Guid[] |
or this is required & resolution
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| DiskLocatorName | string[] |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| StoreId | Guid[] | |
| StoreName | string[] |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
DeviceId or DiskLocatorId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Enable a PvsDevice PvsDiskLocator
This example enables the PvsDiskLocator named theDiskLocator for the PvsDevice named theDevice.
Enable-PvsDeviceDiskLocator -Name theDevice -DiskLocatorName theDiskLocator -StoreName theStore
DiskLocatorId can be used instead of DiskLocatorName so that the StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
Export-PvsAuditTrail
Archive the information in the Audit Trail up to a certain date to a file. When finished, the information archived will be removed from the Audit Trail.
This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| FileName | string[] | Name of the file to archive the Audit Trail to. This must be a full file path name. |
Optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| EndDate | DateTime | |
| PurgeData | SwitchParameter |
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Export-AuditTrail for PvsFarm
Export-AuditTrail -Name "C:\export\theFileName"
EXAMPLE 2: Export-AuditTrail for PvsFarm with EndDate
Export-AuditTrail -EndDate "01/01/2015" -Name "C:\export\theFileName"
EXAMPLE 3: Export-AuditTrail for PvsFarm with EndDate and NoPurgeData
Export-AuditTrail -EndDate "01/01/2015" -NoPurgeData -Name "C:\export\theFileName"
Export-PvsDisk
Export the disk stack to a manifest file.
This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DiskLocatorId | Guid[] | GUID of the Disk Locator that identifies the disk to export. |
or this is required & resolution
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or DiskLocatorName | string[] |
Optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Version | uint |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid[] | |
| SiteName | string[] |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| StoreId | Guid[] | |
| StoreName | string[] |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
DiskLocatorId
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Export-PvsDisk for Name
Export-PvsDisk -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore
Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
EXAMPLE 2: Export-PvsDisk for PvsDiskLocator Using Pipe
The Get-PvsDiskLocator output is piped to the Export-PvsDisk.
Get-PvsDiskLocator -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore -Fields Guid | Export-PvsDisk
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
EXAMPLE 3: Export-PvsDisk for Name with Version
Export-PvsDisk -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore -Version 4
Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
EXAMPLE 4: Export-PvsDisk for PvsDiskLocator Using Pipe
The Get-PvsDiskLocator output is piped to the Export-PvsDisk.
Get-PvsDiskLocator -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore -Fields Guid | Export-PvsDisk -Version 4
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
Export-PvsOemLicenses
Oem Only: Export the Oem Licenses for the Devices to the fileName specified.
This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| FileName | string | Name of the file to export the Oem Licenses to. This must be a full file path name. |
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DeviceId | Guid | |
| Name or DeviceName | string | |
| DeviceMac | PvsPhysicalAddress | |
| CollectionId | Guid | |
| SiteViewId | Guid | |
| FarmViewId | Guid | |
| FarmViewName | string |
or one of these is required & resolutions
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| CollectionName | string | |
| SiteViewName | string |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid | |
| SiteName | string |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
DeviceId, CollectionId, SiteViewId or FarmViewId
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Export-PvsOemLicenses for Name
Export-PvsOemLicenses -Name theDevice -FileName "C:\export\theFileName"
EXAMPLE 2: Export-PvsOemLicenses for PvsDevice Using Pipe
The Get-PvsDevice output is piped to the Export-PvsOemLicenses.
Get-PvsDevice -Name theDevice -Fields Guid | Export-PvsOemLicenses -FileName \"C:\export\theFileName\"
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
EXAMPLE 3: Export-PvsOemLicenses for DeviceMac
Export-PvsOemLicenses -DeviceMac "00-11-22-33-44-55" -FileName "C:\export\theFileName"
EXAMPLE 4: Export-PvsOemLicenses for PvsDevice Using Pipe
The Get-PvsDevice output is piped to the Export-PvsOemLicenses.
Get-PvsDevice -DeviceMac \"00-11-22-33-44-55\" -Fields Guid | Export-PvsOemLicenses -FileName \"C:\export\theFileName\"
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
EXAMPLE 5: Export-PvsOemLicenses for FarmViewName
Export-PvsOemLicenses -FarmViewName theFarmView -FileName "C:\export\theFileName"
EXAMPLE 6: Export-PvsOemLicenses for PvsFarmView Using Pipe
The Get-PvsFarmView output is piped to the Export-PvsOemLicenses.
Get-PvsFarmView -Name theFarmView -Fields Guid | Export-PvsOemLicenses -FileName \"C:\export\theFileName\"
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
EXAMPLE 7: Export-PvsOemLicenses for CollectionName
Export-PvsOemLicenses -CollectionName theCollection -SiteName theSite -FileName "C:\export\theFileName"
CollectionId can be used instead of CollectionName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 8: Export-PvsOemLicenses for PvsCollection Using Pipe
The Get-PvsCollection output is piped to the Export-PvsOemLicenses.
Get-PvsCollection -Name theCollection -SiteName theSite -Fields Guid | Export-PvsOemLicenses -FileName \"C:\export\theFileName\"
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 9: Export-PvsOemLicenses for SiteViewName
Export-PvsOemLicenses -SiteViewName theSiteView -SiteName theSite -FileName "C:\export\theFileName"
SiteViewId can be used instead of SiteViewName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 10: Export-PvsOemLicenses for PvsSiteView Using Pipe
The Get-PvsSiteView output is piped to the Export-PvsOemLicenses.
Get-PvsSiteView -Name theSiteView -SiteName theSite -Fields Guid | Export-PvsOemLicenses -FileName \"C:\export\theFileName\"
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
Get-PvsADAccount
Return a PvsAdAccount object if the named Device Account in the domain is found.
This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Domain | string | Domain the account is a member of. |
This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name | string |
PvsADAccount: If successful, the PvsADAccount object is returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Get PvsADAccount
Get the PvsADAccount in the Domain named theDomain for the Device named theDevice.
Get-PvsADAccount -Domain theDomain -Name theDevice
Get-PvsAuditActionParameter
Get the Parameters of an Audit Action.
This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| AuditActionId | Guid[] | GUID of the Audit Action to Get Parameters for. |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
AuditActionId
If only selected fields are needed, pass them in the Fields parameter as a string array.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or AuditParameterName | Name of the parameter. Max Length=50 | |
| Value | Value of the parameter. Max Length=1000 |
PvsAuditActionParameter[]: If successful, the PvsAuditActionParameter object(s) are returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Get PvsAuditActionParameter
Get all PvsAuditActionParameter for the AuditActionId e8baa554-7c2d-49e5-9f6b-e0bc46179fc7.
Get-PvsAuditActionParameter -AuditActionId "e8baa554-7c2d-49e5-9f6b-e0bc46179fc7"
EXAMPLE 2: Get PvsAuditActionParameter for Multiple AuditActionId
Get all PvsAuditActionParameter for the AuditActionId e8baa554-7c2d-49e5-9f6b-e0bc46179fc7 and 54ee6180-7fbc-42a2-9499-2e4936f039dc.
Get-PvsAuditActionParameter -AuditActionId "e8baa554-7c2d-49e5-9f6b-e0bc46179fc7", "54ee6180-7fbc-42a2-9499-2e4936f039dc"
EXAMPLE 3: Get PvsAuditActionParameter for Get-PvsAuditTrail Results with Parameters
Get-PvsAuditTrail is called and only the PvsAuditTrail.Attachment with bit 4 (Parameters) set are used to call Get-PvsAuditActionParameter.
Get-PvsAuditTrail | Where-Object {\(\$\_.Attachments -band 4) -eq 4} | Get-PvsAuditActionParameter
Get-PvsAuditActionProperty
Get the Properties of an Audit Action.
This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| AuditActionId | Guid[] | GUID of the Audit Action to Get Properties for. |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
AuditActionId
If only selected fields are needed, pass them in the Fields parameter as a string array.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or AuditPropertyName | Name of the property. Max Length=50 | |
| OldValue | Previous value of the Property. Default=”” Max Length=1000 | |
| NewValue | New value of the Property. Default=”” Max Length=1000 |
PvsAuditActionProperty[]: If successful, the PvsAuditActionProperty object(s) are returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Get PvsAuditActionProperty
Get all PvsAuditActionProperty for the AuditActionId e8baa554-7c2d-49e5-9f6b-e0bc46179fc7.
Get-PvsAuditActionProperty -AuditActionId "e8baa554-7c2d-49e5-9f6b-e0bc46179fc7"
EXAMPLE 2: Get PvsAuditActionProperty for Multiple AuditActionId
Get all PvsAuditActionProperty for the AuditActionId e8baa554-7c2d-49e5-9f6b-e0bc46179fc7 and 54ee6180-7fbc-42a2-9499-2e4936f039dc.
Get-PvsAuditActionProperty -AuditActionId "e8baa554-7c2d-49e5-9f6b-e0bc46179fc7", "54ee6180-7fbc-42a2-9499-2e4936f039dc"
EXAMPLE 3: Get PvsAuditActionProperty for Get-PvsAuditTrail Results with Properties
Get-PvsAuditTrail is called and only the PvsAuditTrail.Attachment with bit 8 (Properties) set are used to call Get-PvsAuditActionProperty.
Get-PvsAuditTrail | Where-Object {\(\$\_.Attachments -band 8) -eq 8} | Get-PvsAuditActionProperty
Get-PvsAuditActionSibling
Get the Sibling of an Audit Action. It is the 2nd object involved with the action.
This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or AuditActionId | Guid[] | GUID of the Audit Action to Get Sibling for. |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
AuditActionId
If only selected fields are needed, pass them in the Fields parameter as a string array.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or AuditActionId | GUID of the action. | |
| Type | Type of object that action was performed on. Values are: 1 (AuthGroup), 2 (Collection), 3 (Device), 4 (Disk), 5 (DiskLocator), 6 (Farm), 7 (FarmView), 8 (Server), 9 (Site), 10 (SiteView), 11 (Store), 12 (System), and 13 (UserGroup) | |
| ObjectId | GUID of the object of the action. | |
| ObjectName | Name of the object of the action. Max Length=1000 | |
| Path | Path of the object of the action. An example is Site\Collection for a Device. Default=”” Max Length=101 | |
| SiteId | GUID of the Site for the object of the action. 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 when not valid. Default=00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 | |
| SubId | GUID of the Collection or Store of the action. 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 when not valid. Default=00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 |
PvsAuditAction[]: If successful, the PvsAuditAction object(s) are returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Get PvsAuditActionSibling
Get all PvsAuditActionSibling for the AuditActionId e8baa554-7c2d-49e5-9f6b-e0bc46179fc7.
Get-PvsAuditActionSibling -Guid "e8baa554-7c2d-49e5-9f6b-e0bc46179fc7"
EXAMPLE 2: Get PvsAuditActionSibling for Multiple AuditActionId
Get all PvsAuditActionSibling for the AuditActionId e8baa554-7c2d-49e5-9f6b-e0bc46179fc7 and 54ee6180-7fbc-42a2-9499-2e4936f039dc.
Get-PvsAuditActionSibling -Guid "e8baa554-7c2d-49e5-9f6b-e0bc46179fc7", "54ee6180-7fbc-42a2-9499-2e4936f039dc"
EXAMPLE 3: Get PvsAuditActionSibling for Get-PvsAuditTrail Results with Siblings
Get-PvsAuditTrail is called and only the PvsAuditTrail.Attachment with bit 2 (Siblings) set are used to call Get-PvsAuditActionSibling.
Get-PvsAuditTrail | Where-Object {\(\$\_.Attachments -band 2) -eq 2} | Get-PvsAuditActionSibling
Get-PvsAuditTrail
Get the Audit Trail actions for a Farm, Site, Server, DiskLocator, Collection, Device, User Group, Site View, Farm View or Store. All Audit Trail actions are returned if no parameters are passed. The result can be filtered by parent, user\domain and date range.
These are optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or AuditActionId | Guid[] | GUID of the Audit Action to Get. |
| ParentId | Guid[] | Parent AuditActionId of the records to retrieve. If no parameters are included, only records with no parent are returned. |
| RootId | Guid[] | Root AuditActionId of the records to retrieve. All of the actions caused by the root action are returned. If no parameters are included, only records with no root are returned. |
| SiteId | Guid[] | GUID of the Site to get the Audit Trail for. |
| SiteName | string[] | Name of the Site to get the Audit Trail for. |
| CollectionId | Guid[] | GUID of the Collection to get the Audit Trail for. |
| SiteViewId | Guid[] | GUID of the Site View to get the Audit Trail for. |
| FarmViewId | Guid[] | GUID of the Farm View to get the Audit Trail for. |
| FarmViewName | string[] | Name of the Farm View to get the Audit Trail for. |
| ServerId | Guid[] | GUID of the Server to get the Audit Trail for. |
| ServerName | string[] | Name of the Server to get the Audit Trail for. |
| DeviceId | Guid[] | GUID of the Device to get the Audit Trail for. |
| DeviceName | string[] | Name of the Device to get the Audit Trail for. |
| DeviceMac | PvsPhysicalAddress[] | MAC of the Device to get the Audit Trail for. |
| StoreId | Guid[] | GUID of the Store to get the Audit Trail for. |
| StoreName | string[] | Name of the Store to get the Audit Trail for. |
| DiskLocatorId | Guid[] | GUID of the DiskLocator to get the Audit Trail for. |
These are optional & resolutions
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| CollectionName | string[] | |
| SiteViewName | string[] | |
| DiskLocatorName | string[] |
Optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| UserName | string[] | |
| Domain | string[] | |
| BeginDate | DateTime | |
| EndDate | DateTime | |
| Type | uint[] | |
| Action | uint[] |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid[] | GUID of the Site to get the Audit Trail for. |
| SiteName | string[] | Name of the Site to get the Audit Trail for. |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| StoreId | Guid[] | GUID of the Store to get the Audit Trail for. |
| StoreName | string[] | Name of the Store to get the Audit Trail for. |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
AuditActionId, ParentId, RootId, SiteId, CollectionId, SiteViewId, FarmViewId, ServerId, DeviceId, StoreId or DiskLocatorId
If only selected fields are needed, pass them in the Fields parameter as a string array.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or AuditActionId | GUID of the action. | |
| Time | Date/Time the action occurred down to the millisecond. Has the date and time including milliseconds. Default=Empty | |
| UserName | User that performed the action. Max Length=255 | |
| Domain | Domain of the user that performed the action. Max Length=255 | |
| Type | Type of object that action was performed on. Values are: 0 (Many), 1 (AuthGroup), 2 (Collection), 3 (Device), 4 (Disk), 5 (DiskLocator), 6 (Farm), 7 (FarmView), 8 (Server), 9 (Site), 10 (SiteView), 11 (Store), 12 (System), and 13 (UserGroup) | |
| Action | Name of the action taken. This is a number that is converted to a string for display. Values are: 1 (AddAuthGroup), 2 (AddCollection), 3 (AddDevice), 4 (AddDiskLocator), 5 (AddFarmView), 6 (AddServer), 7 (AddSite), 8 (AddSiteView), 9 (AddStore), 10 (AddUserGroup), 11 (AddVirtualHostingPool), 12 (AddUpdateTask), 13 (AddDiskUpdateDevice), 1001 (DeleteAuthGroup), 1002 (DeleteCollection), 1003 (DeleteDevice), 1004 (DeleteDeviceDiskCacheFile), 1005 (DeleteDiskLocator), 1006 (DeleteFarmView), 1007 (DeleteServer), 1008 (DeleteServerStore), 1009 (DeleteSite), 1010 (DeleteSiteView), 1011 (DeleteStore), 1012 (DeleteUserGroup), 1013 (DeleteVirtualHostingPool), 1014 (DeleteUpdateTask), 1015 (DeleteDiskUpdateDevice), 1016 (DeleteDiskVersion), 2001 (RunAddDeviceToDomain), 2002 (RunApplyAutoUpdate), 2003 (RunApplyIncrementalUpdate), 2004 (RunArchiveAuditTrail), 2005 (RunAssignAuthGroup), 2006 (RunAssignDevice), 2007 (RunAssignDiskLocator), 2008 (RunAssignServer), 2009 (RunWithReturnBoot), 2010 (RunCopyPasteDevice), 2011 (RunCopyPasteDisk), 2012 (RunCopyPasteServer), 2013 (RunCreateDirectory), 2014 (RunCreateDiskCancel), 2015 (RunDisableCollection), 2016 (RunDisableDevice), 2017 (RunDisableDeviceDiskLocator), 2018 (RunDisableDiskLocator), 2019 (RunDisableUserGroup), 2020 (RunDisableUserGroupDiskLocator), 2021 (RunWithReturnDisplayMessage), 2022 (RunEnableCollection), 2023 (RunEnableDevice), 2024 (RunEnableDeviceDiskLocator), 2025 (RunEnableDiskLocator), 2026 (RunEnableUserGroup), 2027 (RunEnableUserGroupDiskLocator), 2028 (RunExportOemLicenses), 2029 (RunImportDatabase), 2030 (RunImportDevices), 2031 (RunImportOemLicenses), 2032 (RunMarkDown), 2033 (RunWithReturnReboot), 2034 (RunRemoveAuthGroup), 2035 (RunRemoveDevice), 2036 (RunRemoveDeviceFromDomain), 2037 (RunRemoveDirectory), 2038 (RunRemoveDiskLocator), 2039 (RunResetDeviceForDomain), 2040 (RunResetDatabaseConnection), 2041 (RunRestartStreamingService), 2042 (RunWithReturnShutdown), 2043 (RunStartStreamingService), 2044 (RunStopStreamingService), 2045 (RunUnlockAllDisk), 2046 (RunUnlockDisk), 2047 (RunServerStoreVolumeAccess), 2048 (RunServerStoreVolumeMode), 2049 (RunMergeDisk), 2050 (RunRevertDiskVersion), 2051 (RunPromoteDiskVersion), 2052 (RunCancelDiskMaintenance), 2053 (RunActivateDevice), 2054 (RunAddDiskVersion), 2055 (RunExportDisk), 2056 (RunAssignDisk), 2057 (RunRemoveDisk), 2058 (RunDiskUpdateStart), 2059 (RunDiskUpdateCancel), 2060 (RunSetOverrideVersion), 2061 (RunCancelTask), 2062 (RunClearTask), 2063 (RunForceInventory), 2064 RunUpdateBDM, 2065 (RunStartDeviceDiskTempVersionMode), 2066 (RunStopDeviceDiskTempVersionMode), 3001 (RunWithReturnCreateDisk), 3002 (RunWithReturnCreateDiskStatus), 3003 (RunWithReturnMapDisk), 3004 (RunWithReturnRebalanceDevices), 3005 (RunWithReturnCreateMaintenanceVersion), 3006 (RunWithReturnImportDisk), 4001 (RunByteArrayInputImportDevices), 4002 (RunByteArrayInputImportOemLicenses), 5001 (RunByteArrayOutputArchiveAuditTrail), 5002 (RunByteArrayOutputExportOemLicenses), 6001 (SetAuthGroup), 6002 (SetCollection), 6003 (SetDevice), 6004 (SetDisk), 6005 (SetDiskLocator), 6006 (SetFarm), 6007 (SetFarmView), 6008 (SetServer), 6009 (SetServerBiosBootstrap), 6010 (SetServerBootstrap), 6011 (SetServerStore), 6012 (SetSite), 6013 (SetSiteView), 6014 (SetStore), 6015 (SetUserGroup), 6016 SetVirtualHostingPool, 6017 SetUpdateTask, 6018 SetDiskUpdateDevice, 7001 (SetListDeviceBootstraps), 7002 (SetListDeviceBootstrapsDelete), 7003 (SetListDeviceBootstrapsAdd), 7004 (SetListDeviceCustomProperty), 7005 (SetListDeviceCustomPropertyDelete), 7006 (SetListDeviceCustomPropertyAdd), 7007 (SetListDeviceDiskPrinters), 7008 (SetListDeviceDiskPrintersDelete), 7009 (SetListDeviceDiskPrintersAdd), 7010 (SetListDevicePersonality), 7011 (SetListDevicePersonalityDelete), 7012 (SetListDevicePersonalityAdd), 7013 (SetListDiskLocatorCustomProperty), 7014 (SetListDiskLocatorCustomPropertyDelete), 7015 (SetListDiskLocatorCustomPropertyAdd), 7016 (SetListServerCustomProperty), 7017 (SetListServerCustomPropertyDelete), 7018 (SetListServerCustomPropertyAdd), 7019 (SetListUserGroupCustomProperty), 7020 (SetListUserGroupCustomPropertyDelete), and 7021 (SetListUserGroupCustomPropertyAdd) | |
| ObjectId | GUID of the object of the action. Default=00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 | |
| ObjectName | Name of the object of the action. Default=”” Max Length=1000 | |
| Path | Path of the object of the action. An example is Site\Collection for a Device. Default=”” Max Length=101 | |
| SiteId | GUID of the Site for the object of the action. 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 when not valid. Default=00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 | |
| SubId | GUID of the Collection or Store of the action. 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 when not valid. Default=00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 | |
| ParentId | GUID of the parent action (one that triggered this action) if one exists. 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 when not valid. Default=00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 | |
| RootId | GUID of the root action (one that triggered this group of actions) if one exists. 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 when not valid. Default=00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 | |
| Attachments | An or’ed value that indicates if there are any details for this action. A value of 15 indicates that there are Children, Sibling, Parameters and Properties for the action. Values are: 0 (None), 1 (Children), 2 (Sibling), 4 (Parameters), and 8 (Properties) Default=0 |
PvsAuditTrail[]: If successful, the PvsAuditTrail object(s) are returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Get PvsAuditTrail for Farm
Get all PvsAuditTrail for the Farm.
Get-PvsAuditTrail
EXAMPLE 2: Get PvsAuditTrail for FarmView
Get all PvsAuditTrail for the FarmView named theFarmView.
Get-PvsAuditTrail -FarmViewName theFarmView
EXAMPLE 3: Get PvsAuditTrail for Site
Get all PvsAuditTrail for the Site named theSite.
Get-PvsAuditTrail -SiteName theSite
EXAMPLE 4: Get PvsAuditTrail for SiteView
Get all PvsAuditTrail for the SiteView named theSiteView in the Site named theSite.
Get-PvsAuditTrail -SiteViewName theSiteView -SiteName theSite
SiteViewId can be used instead of SiteViewName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 5: Get PvsAuditTrail for Collection
Get all PvsAuditTrail for the Collection named theCollection in the Site named theSite.
Get-PvsAuditTrail -CollectionName theCollection -SiteName theSite
CollectionId can be used instead of CollectionName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 6: Get PvsAuditTrail for Device
Get all PvsAuditTrail for the Device named theDevice.
Get-PvsAuditTrail -DeviceName theDevice
EXAMPLE 7: Get PvsAuditTrail for Device MAC
Get all PvsAuditTrail for the Device with MAC 02-50-F2-00-00-01.
Get-PvsAuditTrail -DeviceMac "02-50-F2-00-00-01"
EXAMPLE 8: Get PvsAuditTrail for Server
Get all PvsAuditTrail for the Server named theServer.
Get-PvsAuditTrail -ServerName theServer
EXAMPLE 9: Get PvsAuditTrail for Store
Get all PvsAuditTrail for the Store named theStore.
Get-PvsAuditTrail -StoreName theStore
EXAMPLE 10: Get PvsAuditTrail for DiskLocator
Get all PvsAuditTrail for the DiskLocator named theDiskLocator in the Site named theSite and Store named theStore.
Get-PvsAuditTrail -DiskLocatorName theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore
DiskLocatorId can be used instead of DiskLocatorName so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
EXAMPLE 11: Get PvsAuditTrail for User
Get all PvsAuditTrail for the User named theUser in Domain theDomain.
Get-PvsAuditTrail -UserName theUser -DomainName theDomain
EXAMPLE 12: Get PvsAuditTrail for January
Get all PvsAuditTrail for January.
Get-PvsAuditTrail -BeginDate "01/01/2015 00:00" -EndDate "01/31/2015 23:59"
EXAMPLE 13: Get PvsAuditTrail for DiskLocator and Server Type Actions
Get all PvsAuditTrail for 5 (DiskLocator) and 8 (Server) type actions.
Get-PvsAuditTrail -Type 5 8
EXAMPLE 14: Get PvsAuditTrail for DiskLocator and Server Type Actions
Get all PvsAuditTrail for the 1003 (DeleteDevice) and 1007 (DeleteServer) actions.
Get-PvsAuditTrail -Action 1003 1007
EXAMPLE 15: Get PvsAuditTrail with Children
Get the 4fd16fc1-8dcc-4097-be5a-d0485bd7433b PvsAuditTrail and if it has children, the child PvsAuditTrail are retrieved.
$x = Get-PvsAuditTrail -AuditActionId "4fd16fc1-8dcc-4097-be5a-d0485bd7433b"
if (($x.Attachments -band 1) -eq 1) { Get-PvsAuditTrail -ParentId $x.AuditActionId }
Get-PvsAuthGroup
Get the fields for an AuthGroup, all AuthGroups in the system, AuthGroups with Farm, Site or Collection Authorization. All AuthGroups in the system are returned if no parameters are passed.
These are optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or AuthGroupId | Guid[] | GUID of the AuthGroup to Get. |
| Name or AuthGroupName | string[] | Name of the AuthGroup to Get. |
| SiteId | Guid[] | GUID of the Site to Get all AuthGroups with Authorization for. |
| SiteName | string[] | Name of the Site to Get all AuthGroups with Authorization for. |
| CollectionId | Guid[] | GUID of the Collection to Get all AuthGroups with Authorization for. |
or this is optional & resolution
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| CollectionName | string[] |
Optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Farm | SwitchParameter |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid[] | GUID of the Site to Get all AuthGroups with Authorization for. |
| SiteName | string[] | Name of the Site to Get all AuthGroups with Authorization for. |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
AuthGroupId, SiteId or CollectionId
If only selected fields are needed, pass them in the Fields parameter as a string array.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or AuthGroupId | Read-only GUID that uniquely identifies this AuthGroup. | |
| Name or AuthGroupName | Name of the Active Directory or Windows Group. Max Length=450 | |
| Description | User description. Default=”” Max Length=250 | |
| Role | Role of the AuthGroup for a Collection. role can only be used with CollectionId or CollectionName. 300 is Collection Administrator, and 400 is Collection Operator. Default=999 | |
| IsReadOnly | Indicates whether the administrative role is read-only(true) or read-write(false). Default=false |
PvsAuthGroup[]: If successful, the PvsAuthGroup object(s) are returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Get PvsAuthGroup for System
Get all PvsAuthGroup for the System.
Get-PvsAuthGroup
EXAMPLE 2: Get PvsAuthGroup for Farm
Get all PvsAuthGroup for the Farm.
Get-PvsAuthGroup
EXAMPLE 3: Get PvsAuthGroup for Site
Get all PvsAuthGroup for the Site named theSite.
Get-PvsAuthGroup -SiteName theSite
EXAMPLE 4: Get PvsAuthGroup for Collection
Get all PvsAuthGroup for the Collection named theCollection in the Site named theSite.
Get-PvsAuthGroup -CollectionName theCollection -SiteName theSite
CollectionId can be used instead of CollectionName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
Get-PvsAuthGroupUsage
Get the items that are authorized for an AuthGroup.
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| AuthGroupId | Guid[] | GUID of the AuthGroup to Get all items that are authorized for it. |
| Name or AuthGroupName | string[] | Name of the AuthGroup to Get all items that are authorized for it. |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
AuthGroupId
If only selected fields are needed, pass them in the Fields parameter as a string array.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or Id | GUID of the item. The item can be a Farm, Site or Collection. It will be 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 for Farm. | |
| Name | Name of the item. The item can be a Farm, Site or Collection. | |
| Role | Role of the AuthGroup for the item. 100 is Farm Administrator, 200 is Site Administrator, 300 is Collection Administrator, and 400 is Collection Operator. Default=999 |
PvsAuthGroupUsage[]: If successful, the PvsAuthGroupUsage object(s) are returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Get PvsAuthGroupUsage
Get all PvsAuthGroupUsage for the AuthGroup named theAuthGroup.
Get-PvsAuthGroupUsage -Name theAuthGroup
Get-PvsCeipData
Get the CEIP configuration
Optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Uuid | string[] | CEIP UUID of this Farm. This is optional since there is only one. |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
Uuid
If only selected fields are needed, pass them in the Fields parameter as a string array.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Enabled | 1 if CEIP is enabled, otherwise 0. Min=0, Max=1 | |
| Uuid | CEIP UUID. | |
| NextUpload | Date and time next CEIP upload is due if enabled is 1. Default=Empty | |
| InProgress | 1 if an upload is currently in progress, otherwise 0. Default=0 | |
| ServerId | ID of server that is currently uploading, null if InProgress is 0. Default=00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 | |
| OneTimeUpload | 1 to perform a one time upload. Default=0 |
PvsCeipData[]: If successful, the PvsCeipData object(s) are returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Get PvsCeipData for CeipData
Get all PvsCeipData for CeipData.
Get-PvsCeipData
Get-PvsCisData
Get the CIS configuration
If only selected fields are needed, pass them in the Fields parameter as a string array.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or CisDataId | CIS UUID | |
| UserName | Username used to obtain the token Default=”” Max Length=255 | |
| UploadToken | Token for uploading bundles to CIS Default=”” Max Length=65535 | |
| Path | Path where the last problem report bundle was saved Default=”” Max Length=255 | |
| Password | Password of the user required to obtain the token. This is required only by Set and Add |
PvsCisData[]: If successful, the PvsCisData object(s) are returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Get PvsCisData for CisData
Get all PvsCisData for CispData.
Get-PvsCisData
Get-PvsCollection
Get the fields for a Collection or all Collections in a Site or Farm. All Collections are returned if no parameters are passed.
These are optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or CollectionId | Guid[] | GUID of the Collection to Get. |
| SiteId | Guid[] | GUID of the Site to Get all Collections for. |
| SiteName | string[] | Name of the Site to Get all Collections for. |
or this is optional & resolution
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or CollectionName | string[] |
This is optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| ProvisioningType | string[] |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid[] | GUID of the Site to Get all Collections for. |
| SiteName | string[] | Name of the Site to Get all Collections for. |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
CollectionId or SiteId
If only selected fields are needed, pass them in the Fields parameter as a string array.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or CollectionId | Read-only GUID that uniquely identifies this Collection. | |
| Name or CollectionName | Name of the Collection. It is unique within the Site. Max Length=50 | |
| SiteId | GUID of the Site that this Collection is a member of. It is not used with SiteName. | |
| SiteName | Name of the Site that this Collection is a member of. It is not used with SiteId. | |
| Description | User description. Default=”” Max Length=250 | |
| TemplateDeviceId | GUID of a Device in the Collection whose settings are used for initial values of new Devices. Not used with templateDeviceName. Default=00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 | |
| TemplateDeviceName | Name of a Device in the Collection whose settings are used for initial values of new Devices. Not used with TemplateDeviceId. Default=”” | |
| LastAutoAddDeviceNumber | The Device Number of the last Auto Added Device. Default=0 | |
| Enabled | True when Devices in the Collection can be booted, false otherwise. Default=true | |
| DeviceCount | Read-only count of Devices in this Collection. Default=0 | |
| DeviceWithPVDCount | Read-only count of Devices with Personal vDisk in this Collection. Default=0 | |
| ActiveDeviceCount | Read-only count of active Devices in this Collection. Default=0 | |
| MakActivateNeededCount | Read-only count of active Devices that need MAK activation in this Collection. Default=0 | |
| AutoAddPrefix | The string put before the Device Number for Auto Add. Default=”” ASCII computer name characters no end digit Max Length=12 | |
| AutoAddSuffix | The string put after the Device Number for Auto Add. Default=”” ASCII computer name characters no begin digit Max Length=12 | |
| AutoAddZeroFill | True when zeros be placed before the Device Number up to the AutoAddNumberLength for Auto Add, false otherwise. Default=true | |
| AutoAddNumberLength | The maximum length of the Device Number for Auto Add. This length plus the AutoAddPrefix length plus the AutoAddSuffix length must be less than 16. Required that ((lenautoAddPrefix+lenautoAddSuffix)+AutoAddNumberLength)<=15. Min=3, Max=9, Default=4 | |
| Role | Read-only Role of the user for this item. 100 is Farm Administrator, 200 is Site Administrator, 300 is Collection Administrator, and 400 is Collection Operator. Default=999 | |
| ProvisioningType | The provisioning facility which created the Devices in this Collection. 0 is PVS, 1 is Studio. Only writable when adding a colection. Min=0, Max=1, Default=0 |
PvsCollection[]: If successful, the PvsCollection object(s) are returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Get PvsCollection for Farm
Get all PvsCollection for the Farm.
Get-PvsCollection
EXAMPLE 2: Get PvsCollection for Site
Get all PvsCollection for the Site named theSite.
Get-PvsCollection -SiteName theSite
EXAMPLE 3: Get PvsCollection
Get the PvsCollection for the Collection named theCollection in the Site named theSite.
Get-PvsCollection -Name theCollection -SiteName theSite
Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 4: Get PvsCollection and Enable
Get all PvsCollection that are not Enabled and then Enables them.
Get-PvsCollection -Fields Enabled | Where-Object {\$\_.Enabled -eq \$false} | foreach { \$o = \$\_; \$o.Enabled = \$true; \$o } | Set-PvsCollection
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. The “foreach { $o = $_; $o.X = Y; $o }” sets the field X to value Y and returns the object again so it can be piped to the Set command for update.
Get-PvsConnection
Return the PvsConnection object with the information about the SoapServer connection.
PvsConnection: If successful, the PvsConnection object is returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Get PvsConnection
Get the PvsConnection for the SoapServer.
Get-PvsConnection
Get-PvsCreateDiskStatus
Get the Percent Finished for an active CreateDisk. When finished, the PvsDiskLocator created is returned.
This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name | string | Name of the Disk file that is being created. |
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| StoreId | Guid | |
| StoreName | string |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
StoreId
UInt32 or PvsDiskLocator: If not finished, the percent complete is returned in an UInt32. If finished and successful, the PvsDiskLocator is returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Start-PvsCreateDiskStatus
This example shows how to use Get-PvsCreateDiskStatus during Start-PvsCreateDisk processing.
$thePvsDiskLocator = Start-PvsCreateDiskStatus -Name theDiskName -Size 20480 -StoreName theStore -SiteName theSite -VHDX -Dynamic
while ($thePvsDiskLocator -eq $null) # while the create is processing
{
%percentFinished = Get-PvsCreateDiskStatus -Name theDiskName -StoreName theStore # get percent finished or DiskLocator when done
if (%percentFinished.GetType().Name == "PvsDiskLocator")
{
$thePvsDiskLocator = %percentFinished
}
else
{
%percentFinished.ToString() + "% finished" # display percent finished
Start-Sleep -seconds 10 # wait 10 seconds more
}
}
"Successful"
Get-PvsDevice
Get the fields for a Device, all Devices in a Collection, Site, Farm View, or Farm. All Devices are returned if no parameters are passed.
These are optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DeviceId | Guid[] | GUID of the Device to Get. |
| Name or DeviceName | string[] | Name of Device to Get. |
| DeviceMac | PvsPhysicalAddress[] | MAC of the Device to Get. |
| EkPub | string[] | TPM EK public key of the Device to Get |
| CollectionId | Guid[] | GUID of the Collection to Get all Devices for. |
| ServerId | Guid[] | GUID of the Server to Get all Devices for. |
| ServerName | string[] | Name of the Server to Get all Devices for. |
| DiskLocatorId | Guid[] | GUID of the DiskLocator to Get all Devices for. |
| SiteViewId | Guid[] | GUID of the Site View to Get all Devices for. |
| SiteId | Guid[] | GUID of the Site. |
| SiteName | string[] | Name of the Site. |
| FarmViewId | Guid[] | GUID of the Farm View to Get all Devices for. |
| FarmViewName | string[] | Name of the Farm View to Get all Devices for. |
| BdmBoot | string[] | Include only the BDM Devices when set to 1. PXE devices if set to 0. If not included, all Devices are returned. |
These are optional & resolutions
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| CollectionName | string[] | |
| DiskLocatorName | string[] | |
| SiteViewName | string[] |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid[] | GUID of the Site. |
| SiteName | string[] | Name of the Site. |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| StoreId | Guid[] | |
| StoreName | string[] |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
DeviceName, CollectionId, ServerId, DiskLocatorId, SiteViewId, SiteId or FarmViewId
If only selected fields are needed, pass them in the Fields parameter as a string array.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DeviceId | Read-only GUID that uniquely identifies this Device. | |
| Name or DeviceName | Computer name with no spaces. ASCII computer name characters Max Length=15 | |
| CollectionId | GUID of the Collection this Device is to be a member of. It is not used with CollectionName. | |
| CollectionName | Name of the Collection this Device is to be a member of. SiteName or SiteId must also be used. | |
| SiteId | GUID of the Site the CollectionName is to be a member of. This or SiteName is used with CollectionName. | |
| SiteName | Name of the Site the CollectionName is to be a member of. This or SiteId is used with CollectionName. | |
| Description | User description. Default=”” Max Length=250 | |
| DeviceMac | Ethernet address can have the form XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX. Uniquely identifies the Device. Default=”” | |
| BootFrom | Device to boot from. Choices are 1 for vDisk, 2 for Hard Disk, and 3 for Floppy. This cannot be Set for a Device with Personal vDisk. Min=1, Max=3, Default=1 | |
| ClassName | Used by Automatic Update feature to match new versions of Disks to a Device. This cannot be Set for a Device with Personal vDisk. Default=”” Max Length=41 | |
| Port | UDP port to use with Stream Service. Min=1025, Max=65534, Default=6901 | |
| Enabled | True when it can be booted, false otherwise. This cannot be Set for a Device with Personal vDisk. Default=true | |
| LocalDiskEnabled | If there is a local disk menu choice for the Device, this is true. This cannot be Set for a Device with Personal vDisk. Default=false | |
| Role | Read-only Role of the user for this item. 100 is Farm Administrator, 200 is Site Administrator, 300 is Collection Administrator, and 400 is Collection Operator. Default=999 | |
| Authentication | Device log in authentication. Choices are 0 for none, 1 for User Name/Password, and 2 for Extern. This cannot be Set for a Device with Personal vDisk. Min=0, Max=2, Default=0 | |
| User | Name of user to authenticate before the boot process continues. This cannot be Set for a Device with Personal vDisk. Default=”” ASCII Max Length=20 | |
| Password | Password of user to authenticate before the boot process continues. This cannot be Set for a Device with Personal vDisk. Default=”” ASCII Max Length=65535 | |
| Active | True if the Device is currently active, false otherwise. Default=false | |
| Template | True if the Device is the template in its Collection, false otherwise. Default=false | |
| AdTimestamp | The time the Active Directory machine account password was generated. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=0 | |
| AdSignature | The signature of the Active Directory machine account password. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=0 | |
| AdPassword | The Active Directory machine account password. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=”” ASCII Max Length=65535 | |
| LogLevel | Level to perform logging at. Values are: 0 (None), 1 (Fatal), 2 (Error), 3 (Warning), 4 (Info), and 5 (Debug). Min=0, Max=6, Default=4 | |
| DomainName | Fully qualified name of the domain that the Device belongs to. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=”” Max Length=255 | |
| DomainObjectSID | The value of the objectSID AD attribute of the same name for the Device’s computer account. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=”” Max Length=186 | |
| DomainControllerName | The name of the DC used to create the host’s computer account. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=”” Max Length=4000 | |
| DomainTimeCreated | The time that the computer account was created. Has the date and time including milliseconds. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=Empty | |
| Type | 1 when it performs test of Disks, 2 when it performs maintenance on Disks, 3 when it has a Personal vDisk, 4 when it has a Personal vDisk and performs tests, 0 otherwise. Min=0, Max=4, Default=0 | |
| PvdDriveLetter | Read-only Personal vDisk Drive letter. Range is E to U and W to Z. Default=”” Max Length=1 | |
| LocalWriteCacheDiskSize | The size in GB to format the Device cache file disk. If the value is 0, then the disk is not formatted. Min=0, Max=2048, Default=0 | |
| VirtualHostingPoolId | GUID that uniquely identifies the Virtual Hosting Pool for a VM. This is needed when Adding a VM device. Default=00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 | |
| HypVmId | Hypervisor VM ID for HCL Default=”” Max Length=65535 | |
| TemporaryVersionSet | Read-only true when temporary version is set. Default=false | |
| BdmBoot | Use PXE boot when set to false, BDM boot when set to true. Default is PXE Default=false | |
| BdmType | Use PXE boot when set to 0, BDM (Bios) boot when set to 1 and BDM (Uefi) boot when set to 2. Default=0 | |
| BdmFormat | 1 use VHD for BDMboot, 2 use ISO, 3 use USB. Default=0 | |
| BdmUpdated | Timestamp of the last BDM boot disk update. Default=Empty | |
| BdmCreated | Timestamp when BDM device was created Default=Empty | |
| XsPvsProxyUuid | UUID of XenServer PVS_proxy Default=00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 | |
| WriteCacheDisk | Write cache disk number Default=”” Max Length=3 | |
| WriteCachePartition | Write cache disk partition number Default=”” Max Length=3 | |
| UpdatePageFileSettings | Update pagefile settings Default=false | |
| EncryptionEpoch | Timestamp of the encryption Key used to encrypt fields Default=0 | |
| ProvisioningType | The provisioning facility which created the device. 0 is PVS, 1 is Studio. Only writable when adding a device. Min=0, Max=1, Default=0 | |
| EkPub | Client TPM EK public key Default=”” | |
| SecurityPolicy | Client security policy Expected values are 0, 2 or 10, Default=null. |
PvsDevice[]: If successful, the PvsDevice object(s) are returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Get PvsDevice for Farm
Get all PvsDevice for the Farm.
Get-PvsDevice
EXAMPLE 2: Get PvsDevice for FarmView
Get all PvsDevice for the FarmView named theFarmView.
Get-PvsDevice -FarmViewName theFarmView
EXAMPLE 3: Get PvsDevice for Site
Get all PvsDevice for the Site named theSite.
Get-PvsDevice -SiteName theSite
EXAMPLE 4: Get PvsDevice for SiteView
Get all PvsDevice for the SiteView named theSiteView in the Site named theSite.
Get-PvsDevice -SiteViewName theSiteView -SiteName theSite
SiteViewId can be used instead of SiteViewName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 5: Get PvsDevice for Collection
Get all PvsDevice for the Collection named theCollection in the Site named theSite.
Get-PvsDevice -CollectionName theCollection -SiteName theSite
CollectionId can be used instead of CollectionName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 6: Get PvsDevice for DiskLocator
Get all PvsDevice for the DiskLocator named theDiskLocator in the Site named theSite and Store named theStore.
Get-PvsDevice -DiskLocatorName theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore
DiskLocatorId can be used instead of DiskLocatorName so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
EXAMPLE 7: Get PvsDevice for Device
Get the PvsDevice for the Device named theDevice.
Get-PvsDevice -Name theDevice
EXAMPLE 8: Get PvsDevice and Enable
Get all PvsDevice that are not Enabled and then Enables them.
Get-PvsDevice -Fields Enabled | Where-Object {\$\_.Enabled -eq \$false} | foreach { \$o = \$\_; \$o.Enabled = \$true; \$o } | Set-PvsDevice
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. The “foreach { $o = $_; $o.X = Y; $o }” sets the field X to value Y and returns the object again so it can be piped to the Set command for update.
Get-PvsDeviceBootstrap
Get all Bootstrap files for a Device, and the MenuText for each.
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DeviceId | Guid[] | GUID of the Device. |
| Name or DeviceName | string[] | Name of the Device. |
| DeviceMac | PvsPhysicalAddress[] | MAC of the Device. |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
DeviceId
If only selected fields are needed, pass them in the Fields parameter as a string array. These fields exist in the DeviceBootstrap array within each PvsDeviceBootstrap returned. Each array item is a PvsDeviceBootstrapList object.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or Bootstrap | Name of the bootstrap file. Max Length=259 | |
| MenuText | Text that is displayed in the Boot Menu. If this field has no value, the bootstrap value is used. Default=”” ASCII Max Length=64 |
PvsDeviceBootstrap[]: If successful, the PvsDeviceBootstrap object(s) are returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Get PvsDeviceBootstrap for Device
Get all PvsDeviceBootstrap for the Device named theDevice.
Get-PvsDeviceBootstrap -Name theDevice
EXAMPLE 2: Get PvsDeviceBootstrap for Device MAC
Get all PvsDeviceBootstrap for the Device with MAC 02-50-F2-00-00-01.
Get-PvsDeviceBootstrap -DeviceMac "02-50-F2-00-00-01"
Get-PvsDeviceCount
Get count of Devices in a Collection or View.
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| CollectionId | Guid | GUID of the Collection to get the Device Count of. |
| SiteViewId | Guid | GUID of the Site View to get the Device Count of. |
| FarmViewId | Guid | GUID of the Farm View to get the Device Count of. |
| FarmViewName | string | Name of the Farm View to get the Device Count of. |
or one of these is required & resolutions
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| CollectionName | string | |
| SiteViewName | string |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid | |
| SiteName | string |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
CollectionId, SiteViewId or FarmViewId
UInt32: If successful, the numeric value is returned
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Get-PvsDeviceCount Returns the Number (or Count) of PvsDevice in PvsCollection
Get-PvsDeviceCount -CollectionName theCollection -SiteName theSite
CollectionId can be used instead of CollectionName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 2: Get-PvsDeviceCount Returns the Number (or Count) of PvsDevice in PvsFarmView
Get-PvsDeviceCount -FarmViewName theFarmView
EXAMPLE 3: Get-PvsDeviceCount Returns the Number (or Count) of PvsDevice in PvsSiteView
Get-PvsDeviceCount -SiteViewName theSiteView -SiteName theSite
SiteViewId can be used instead of SiteViewName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
Get-PvsDeviceDiskLocatorEnabled
Return true if a Device/DiskLocator is enabled.
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DeviceId | Guid | Device GUID, to see if the DiskLocator for it is enabled. |
| Name or DeviceName | string | Device name, to see if the DiskLocator for it is enabled. |
| DeviceMac | PvsPhysicalAddress[] | MAC of the Device, to see if the DiskLocator for it is enabled. |
This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| DiskLocatorId | Guid |
or this is required & resolution
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| DiskLocatorName | string |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| StoreId | Guid | |
| StoreName | string |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
DeviceId or DiskLocatorId
String: If successful, the String value is returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Get-PvsDeviceDiskLocatorEnabled Determine if PvsDevice/PvsDiskLocator is Enabled
Get-PvsDeviceDiskLocatorEnabled -Name theDevice -DiskLocatorName theDiskLocator -StoreName theStore
DiskLocatorId can be used instead of DiskLocatorName so that the StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
Get-PvsDeviceDiskTempVersion
Get Temporary Disk Version information for a Device, DiskLocator, Disk Version, Site or Farm.
These are optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DeviceId | Guid[] | GUID of the Device to get the temporary disk version information for. |
| Name or DeviceName | string[] | Name of the Device to get the temporary disk version information for. |
| DeviceMac | PvsPhysicalAddress[] | MAC of the Device to get the temporary disk version information for. |
| SiteId | Guid[] | GUID of the Site to get temporary disk version information for, and also resolution for DiskLocatorName. |
| SiteName | string[] | Name of the Site to get temporary disk version information for, and also resolution for DiskLocatorName. |
| DiskLocatorId | Guid[] | GUID of the Disk Locator to get temporary disk version information for. |
or this is optional & resolution
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| DiskLocatorName | string[] |
This is optional & resolution
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Version | string[] |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid[] | GUID of the Site to get temporary disk version information for, and also resolution for DiskLocatorName. |
| SiteName | string[] | Name of the Site to get temporary disk version information for, and also resolution for DiskLocatorName. |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| StoreId | Guid[] | |
| StoreName | string[] |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
DeviceId, SiteId or DiskLocatorId
If only selected fields are needed, pass them in the Fields parameter as a string array.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DeviceId | Read-only GUID that uniquely identifies the Device with temporary version. | |
| Name or DeviceName | Read-only Computer name that uniquely identifies the Device with temporary version. ASCII computer name characters | |
| DiskLocatorId | Read-only GUID that uniquely identifies then Disk Locator with temporary version. | |
| DiskLocatorName | Read-only Name of the Disk Locator File with temporary version. It is unique within the Store. ASCII | |
| SiteId | Read-only GUID of the Site the Device and DiskLocator are a member of. | |
| SiteName | Read-only Name of the Site the Device and DiskLocator are a member of. | |
| StoreId | Read-only GUID of the Store that the Disk Locator is a member of. | |
| StoreName | Read-only Name of the Store that the Disk Locator is a member of. | |
| Version | Read-only Disk version the temporary is for. |
PvsDeviceDiskTempVersion[]: If successful, the PvsDeviceDiskTempVersion object(s) are returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Get PvsDeviceDiskTempVersion for Device
Get the PvsDeviceDiskTempVersion for the Device named theDevice.
Get-PvsDeviceDiskTempVersion -Name theDevice
EXAMPLE 2: Get PvsDeviceDiskTempVersion for DiskLocator
Get all PvsDeviceDiskTempVersion for the DiskLocator named theDiskLocator in the Site named theSite and Store named theStore.
Get-PvsDeviceDiskTempVersion -DiskLocatorName theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore
DiskLocatorId can be used instead of DiskLocatorName so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
EXAMPLE 3: Get PvsDeviceDiskTempVersion for DiskLocator with Version
Get-PvsDeviceDiskTempVersion -DiskLocatorName theDiskLocator -Version 4 -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore
DiskLocatorId can be used instead of DiskLocatorName so that the StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
EXAMPLE 4: Get PvsDeviceDiskTempVersion for Site
Get all PvsDeviceDiskTempVersion for the Site named theSite.
Get-PvsDeviceDiskTempVersion -SiteName theSite
EXAMPLE 5: Get PvsDeviceDiskTempVersion for Farm
Get all PvsDeviceDiskTempVersion for the Farm.
Get-PvsDeviceDiskTempVersion
Get-PvsDeviceInfo
Get the fields and status for a Device, all Devices in a Collection, Site, Farm View, or Farm. All Devices are returned if no parameters are passed.
These are optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DeviceId | Guid[] | GUID of the Device to Get. |
| Name or DeviceName | string[] | Name of Device to Get. |
| DeviceMac | PvsPhysicalAddress[] | MAC of the Device to Get. |
| EkPub | string[] | TPM EK public key of the Device to Get |
| CollectionId | Guid[] | GUID of the Collection to Get all Devices for. |
| ServerId | Guid[] | GUID of the Server to Get all Devices for. |
| ServerName | string[] | Name of the Server to Get all Devices for. |
| DiskLocatorId | Guid[] | GUID of the DiskLocator to Get all Devices for. |
| SiteViewId | Guid[] | GUID of the Site View to Get all Devices for. |
| SiteId | Guid[] | GUID of the Site. |
| SiteName | string[] | Name of the Site. |
| FarmViewId | Guid[] | GUID of the Farm View to Get all Devices for. |
| FarmViewName | string[] | Name of the Farm View to Get all Devices for. |
| BdmBoot | string[] | Include only the BDM Devices when set to 1. PXE devices if set to 0. If not included, all Devices are returned. |
These are optional & resolutions
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| CollectionName | string[] | |
| DiskLocatorName | string[] | |
| SiteViewName | string[] |
Optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| OnlyActive | SwitchParameter | |
| MakLicenseActivated | uint | |
| Version | uint |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid[] | GUID of the Site. |
| SiteName | string[] | Name of the Site. |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| StoreId | Guid[] | |
| StoreName | string[] |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
DeviceName, CollectionId, ServerId, DiskLocatorId, SiteViewId, SiteId or FarmViewId
If only selected fields are needed, pass them in the Fields parameter as a string array.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DeviceId | Read-only GUID that uniquely identifies this Device. | |
| Name or DeviceName | Computer name with no spaces. ASCII computer name characters Max Length=15 | |
| CollectionId | GUID of the Collection this Device is to be a member of. It is not used with CollectionName. | |
| CollectionName | Name of the Collection this Device is to be a member of. SiteName or SiteId must also be used. | |
| SiteId | GUID of the Site the CollectionName is to be a member of. This or SiteName is used with CollectionName. | |
| SiteName | Name of the Site the CollectionName is to be a member of. This or SiteId is used with CollectionName. | |
| Description | User description. Default=”” Max Length=250 | |
| DeviceMac | Ethernet address can have the form XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX. Uniquely identifies the Device. Default=”” | |
| BootFrom | Device to boot from. Choices are 1 for vDisk, 2 for Hard Disk, and 3 for Floppy. This cannot be Set for a Device with Personal vDisk. Min=1, Max=3, Default=1 | |
| ClassName | Used by Automatic Update feature to match new versions of Disks to a Device. This cannot be Set for a Device with Personal vDisk. Default=”” Max Length=41 | |
| Port | UDP port to use with Stream Service. Min=1025, Max=65534, Default=6901 | |
| Enabled | True when it can be booted, false otherwise. This cannot be Set for a Device with Personal vDisk. Default=true | |
| LocalDiskEnabled | If there is a local disk menu choice for the Device, this is true. This cannot be Set for a Device with Personal vDisk. Default=false | |
| Role | Read-only Role of the user for this item. 100 is Farm Administrator, 200 is Site Administrator, 300 is Collection Administrator, and 400 is Collection Operator. Default=999 | |
| Authentication | Device log in authentication. Choices are 0 for none, 1 for User Name/Password, and 2 for Extern. This cannot be Set for a Device with Personal vDisk. Min=0, Max=2, Default=0 | |
| User | Name of user to authenticate before the boot process continues. This cannot be Set for a Device with Personal vDisk. Default=”” ASCII Max Length=20 | |
| Password | Password of user to authenticate before the boot process continues. This cannot be Set for a Device with Personal vDisk. Default=”” ASCII Max Length=65535 | |
| Active | True if the Device is currently active, false otherwise. Default=false | |
| Template | True if the Device is the template in its Collection, false otherwise. Default=false | |
| AdTimestamp | The time the Active Directory machine account password was generated. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=0 | |
| AdSignature | The signature of the Active Directory machine account password. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=0 | |
| AdPassword | The Active Directory machine account password. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=”” ASCII Max Length=65535 | |
| LogLevel | Level to perform logging at. Values are: 0 (None), 1 (Fatal), 2 (Error), 3 (Warning), 4 (Info), and 5 (Debug). Min=0, Max=6, Default=4 | |
| DomainName | Fully qualified name of the domain that the Device belongs to. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=”” Max Length=255 | |
| DomainObjectSID | The value of the objectSID AD attribute of the same name for the Device’s computer account. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=”” Max Length=186 | |
| DomainControllerName | The name of the DC used to create the host’s computer account. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=”” Max Length=4000 | |
| DomainTimeCreated | The time that the computer account was created. Has the date and time including milliseconds. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=Empty | |
| Type | 1 when it performs test of Disks, 2 when it performs maintenance on Disks, 3 when it has a Personal vDisk, 4 when it has a Personal vDisk and performs tests, 0 otherwise. Min=0, Max=4, Default=0 | |
| PvdDriveLetter | Read-only Personal vDisk Drive letter. Range is E to U and W to Z. Default=”” Max Length=1 | |
| LocalWriteCacheDiskSize | The size in GB to format the Device cache file disk. If the value is 0, then the disk is not formatted. Min=0, Max=2048, Default=0 | |
| VirtualHostingPoolId | GUID that uniquely identifies the Virtual Hosting Pool for a VM. This is needed when Adding a VM device. Default=00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 | |
| HypVmId | Hypervisor VM ID for HCL Default=”” Max Length=65535 | |
| TemporaryVersionSet | Read-only true when temporary version is set. Default=false | |
| BdmBoot | Use PXE boot when set to false, BDM boot when set to true. Default is PXE Default=false | |
| BdmType | Use PXE boot when set to 0, BDM (Bios) boot when set to 1 and BDM (Uefi) boot when set to 2. Default=0 | |
| BdmFormat | 1 use VHD for BDMboot, 2 use ISO, 3 use USB. Default=0 | |
| BdmUpdated | Timestamp of the last BDM boot disk update. Default=Empty | |
| BdmCreated | Timestamp when BDM device was created Default=Empty | |
| XsPvsProxyUuid | UUID of XenServer PVS_proxy Default=00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 | |
| WriteCacheDisk | Write cache disk number Default=”” Max Length=3 | |
| WriteCachePartition | Write cache disk partition number Default=”” Max Length=3 | |
| UpdatePageFileSettings | Update pagefile settings Default=false | |
| EncryptionEpoch | Timestamp of the encryption Key used to encrypt fields Default=0 | |
| ProvisioningType | The provisioning facility which created the device. 0 is PVS, 1 is Studio. Only writable when adding a device. Min=0, Max=1, Default=0 | |
| EkPub | Client TPM EK public key Default=”” | |
| SecurityPolicy | Client security policy Expected values are 0, 2 or 10, Default=null. | |
| Ip | Read-only IPv4 Address of the Device. It is equal to 0.0.0.0 if the Device is not active or not using IPv4 | |
| Ipv6 | Read-only IPv6 Address of the device. It is equal to “::” if the device is not active or not using IPv6 Default=0 | |
| ServerPortConnection | Read-only Port of the Server that the Device is using. It is equal to 0 if the Device is not active. Default=0 | |
| ServerIpConnection | Read-only IPv4 Address of the Server that the Device is using. It is equal to 0.0.0.0 if the Device is not active or not using IPv4. | |
| ServerIpv6Connection | Read-only IPv6 Address of the Server that the Device is using. It is equal to “::” if the Device is not active or not using IPv6. Default=0 | |
| ServerId | Read-only GUID of the Server that the Device is using. It is equal to 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 if the Device is not active. | |
| ServerName | Read-only Name of the Server that the Device is using. It is equal to “” if the Device is not active. | |
| DiskLocatorId | Read-only GUID of the Disk Locator that the Device is using. It is equal to 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 if the Device is not active. | |
| DiskLocatorName | Read-only name of the Disk Locator File that the Device is using. It is equal to the list of Disk Locator names for the Device if the Device is not active. | |
| DiskVersion | Read-only version of the Disk Locator File that the Device is using. It is equal to 0 if the Device is not active. Default=0 | |
| DiskVersionAccess | State of the Disk Version. Values are: 0 (Production), 1 (Maintenance), 2 (MaintenanceHighestVersion), 3 (Override), 4 (Merge), 5 (MergeMaintenance), 6 (MergeTest), and 7 (Test). It is equal to 0 if the Device is not active. Default=0 | |
| DiskFileName | Name of the Disk File including the extension. It is equal to “” if the Device is not active. | |
| Status | 1 or 2 numbers in the format n,n. They are the number of retries and if ram cache is being used, ram cache percent used. It is equal to “” if the Device is not active. | |
| LicenseType | 0 when None, 1 for Desktop, 2 for Server, 5 for OEM SmartClient, 6 for XenApp, 7 for XenDesktop. It is equal to 0 if the Device is not active. Default=0 | |
| MakLicenseActivated | Read-only indicator if MAK licensing is being used and is activated. Values are: 0 (MAK not used), 1 (Not Activated), 2 (Activated). It is equal to 0 if the Device is not active. Default=0 | |
| Model | Oem Only: Read-only model of the computer. Values are OptiPlex 745, 755, 320, 760, FX160, or Default. It is equal to “” if the Device is not active. | |
| License | Oem Only: Read-only type of the license. Values are 0 when None, 1 or 2 when Desktop. It is equal to 0 if the Device is not active. Default=0 |
PvsDeviceInfo[]: If successful, the PvsDeviceInfo object(s) are returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Get PvsDeviceInfo for Farm
Get all PvsDeviceInfo for the Farm.
Get-PvsDeviceInfo
EXAMPLE 2: Get PvsDeviceInfo for FarmView
Get all PvsDeviceInfo for the FarmView named theFarmView.
Get-PvsDeviceInfo -FarmViewName theFarmView
EXAMPLE 3: Get PvsDeviceInfo for Site
Get all PvsDeviceInfo for the Site named theSite.
Get-PvsDeviceInfo -SiteName theSite
EXAMPLE 4: Get PvsDeviceInfo for SiteView
Get all PvsDeviceInfo for the SiteView named theSiteView in the Site named theSite.
Get-PvsDeviceInfo -SiteViewName theSiteView -SiteName theSite
SiteViewId can be used instead of SiteViewName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 5: Get PvsDeviceInfo for Collection
Get all PvsDeviceInfo for the Collection named theCollection in the Site named theSite.
Get-PvsDeviceInfo -CollectionName theCollection -SiteName theSite
CollectionId can be used instead of CollectionName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 6: Get PvsDeviceInfo for DiskLocator
Get all PvsDeviceInfo for the DiskLocator named theDiskLocator in the Site named theSite and Store named theStore.
Get-PvsDeviceInfo -DiskLocatorName theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore
DiskLocatorId can be used instead of DiskLocatorName so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
EXAMPLE 7: Get PvsDeviceInfo for Device
Get the PvsDeviceInfo for the Device named theDevice.
Get-PvsDeviceInfo -Name theDevice
EXAMPLE 8: Get PvsDeviceInfo and Enable
Get all PvsDeviceInfo that are not Enabled and then Enables them.
Get-PvsDeviceInfo -Fields Enabled | Where-Object {\$\_.Enabled -eq \$false} | foreach { \$o = \$\_; \$o.Enabled = \$true; \$o } | Set-PvsDevice
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. The “foreach { $o = $_; $o.X = Y; $o }” sets the field X to value Y and returns the object again so it can be piped to the Set command for update.
Get-PvsDevicePersonality
Get the Device Personality names and values.
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DeviceId | Guid[] | GUID of the Device. |
| Name or DeviceName | string[] | Name of the Device. |
| DeviceMac | PvsPhysicalAddress[] | MAC of the Device. |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
DeviceId
If only selected fields are needed, pass them in the Fields parameter as a string array. These fields exist in the DevicePersonality array within each PvsDevicePersonality returned. Each array item is a PvsDevicePersonalityList object.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name | Name of the Device personality item. Max Length=250 | |
| Value | Value for the Device personality item. Max Length=1000 |
PvsDevicePersonality[]: If successful, the PvsDevicePersonality object(s) are returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Get PvsDevicePersonality for Device
Get all PvsDevicePersonality for the Device named theDevice.
Get-PvsDevicePersonality -Name theDevice
EXAMPLE 2: Get PvsDevicePersonality for Device MAC
Get all PvsDevicePersonality for the Device with MAC 02-50-F2-00-00-01.
Get-PvsDevicePersonality -DeviceMac "02-50-F2-00-00-01"
Get-PvsDeviceStatus
Get the DeviceStatus fields for a Device or all Devices for a Server, Disk Locator, or Farm. All Devices are returned if no parameters are passed.
These are optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DeviceId | Guid[] | GUID of the Device to Get status for. |
| Name or DeviceName | string[] | Name of Device to Get status for. |
| DeviceMac | PvsPhysicalAddress[] | MAC of the Device to Get status for. |
| EkPub | string[] | TPM EK public key of the Device to Get |
| ServerId | Guid[] | GUID of the Server to Get all Device Status for. |
| ServerName | string[] | Name of the Server to Get all Device Status for. |
| DiskLocatorId | Guid[] | GUID of the Disk Locator to Get all DeviceStatus for. |
| CollectionId | Guid[] | GUID of the Collection to Get all DeviceStatus for. |
These are optional & resolutions
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| DiskLocatorName | string[] | |
| CollectionName | string[] |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid[] | |
| SiteName | string[] |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| StoreId | Guid[] | |
| StoreName | string[] |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
DeviceId, ServerId, DiskLocatorId or CollectionId
If only selected fields are needed, pass them in the Fields parameter as a string array.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DeviceId | Read-only GUID of the Device. Can be used with Get Device. | |
| Name or DeviceName | Read-only Name of the Device. Can be used with Get Device. | |
| Ip | Read-only IPv4 Address of the Device. | |
| Ipv6 | Read-only IPv6 Address of the device Default=0 | |
| ServerPortConnection | Read-only Port of the Server that the Device is using. Default=0 | |
| ServerIpConnection | Read-only IPv4 Address of the Server that the Device is using. | |
| ServerIpv6Connection | Read-only IPv6 Address of the Server that the Device is using. Default=0 | |
| ServerId | Read-only GUID of the Server that the Device is using. | |
| ServerName | Read-only Name of the Server that the Device is using. | |
| DiskLocatorId | Read-only GUID of the Disk Locator that the Device is using. | |
| DiskLocatorName | Read-only name of the Disk Locator File that the Device is using. | |
| DiskVersion | Read-only version of the Disk Locator File that the Device is using. Default=0 | |
| DiskVersionAccess | State of the Disk Version. Values are: 0 (Production), 1 (Maintenance), 2 (MaintenanceHighestVersion), 3 (Override), 4 (Merge), 5 (MergeMaintenance), 6 (MergeTest), and 7 (Test) Default=0 | |
| DiskFileName | Name of the Disk File including the extension. | |
| Status | 1 or 2 numbers in the format n,n. They are the number of retries and if ram cache is being used, ram cache percent used. | |
| LicenseType | 0 when None, 1 for Desktop, 2 for Server, 5 for OEM SmartClient, 6 for XenApp, 7 for XenDesktop. Default=0 | |
| MakLicenseActivated | Read-only indicator if MAK licensing is being used and is activated. Values are: 0 (MAK not used), 1 (Not Activated), 2 (Activated). Default=0 | |
| QuicCipherSuite | Read-only The QUIC cipher suite that the Device is using for streaming. It is none if legacy protocol is used. Default=”” | |
| StreamProtocol | Read-only The stream protocol that the Device is using: 0(Legacy protocol), 1(QUIC protocol). Min=0, Max=1, Default=0 |
PvsDeviceStatus[]: If successful, the PvsDeviceStatus object(s) are returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Get PvsDeviceStatus for Farm
Get all PvsDeviceStatus for the Farm.
Get-PvsDeviceStatus
EXAMPLE 2: Get PvsDeviceStatus for FarmView
Get all PvsDeviceStatus for the FarmView named theFarmView.
Get-PvsDeviceStatus -FarmViewName theFarmView
EXAMPLE 3: Get PvsDeviceStatus for Site
Get all PvsDeviceStatus for the Site named theSite.
Get-PvsDeviceStatus -SiteName theSite
EXAMPLE 4: Get PvsDeviceStatus for SiteView
Get all PvsDeviceStatus for the SiteView named theSiteView in the Site named theSite.
Get-PvsDeviceStatus -SiteViewName theSiteView -SiteName theSite
SiteViewId can be used instead of SiteViewName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 5: Get PvsDeviceStatus for Collection
Get all PvsDeviceStatus for the Collection named theCollection in the Site named theSite.
Get-PvsDeviceStatus -CollectionName theCollection -SiteName theSite
CollectionId can be used instead of CollectionName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 6: Get PvsDeviceStatus for DiskLocator
Get all PvsDeviceStatus for the DiskLocator named theDiskLocator in the Site named theSite and Store named theStore.
Get-PvsDeviceStatus -DiskLocatorName theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore
DiskLocatorId can be used instead of DiskLocatorName so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
EXAMPLE 7: Get PvsDeviceStatus for Device
Get the PvsDeviceStatus for the Device named theDevice.
Get-PvsDeviceStatus -Name theDevice
Get-PvsDirectory
Look for Directories or Drives on the Server specified. Return a String array of the Directories or Drives found.
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or ServerId | Guid | GUID of the Server to get a list of Directories or Drives. |
| Name or ServerName | string | Name of the Server to get a list of Directories or Drives. |
Optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Path | string |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
ServerId
string[]: If successful, the array of directory names is returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Get-PvsDirectory for Name
Get-PvsDirectory -Name theServer -Path "C:\directory"
EXAMPLE 2: Get-PvsDirectory for PvsServer Using Pipe
The Get-PvsServer output is piped to the Get-PvsDirectory.
Get-PvsServer -Name theServer -Fields Guid | Get-PvsDirectory -Path \"C:\directory\"
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
Get-PvsDisk
Get the fields for a single disk.
This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DiskLocatorId | Guid[] | GUID of the Disk Locator. |
or this is required & resolution
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or DiskLocatorName | string[] |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid[] | |
| SiteName | string[] |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| StoreId | Guid[] | |
| StoreName | string[] |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
DiskLocatorId
If only selected fields are needed, pass them in the Fields parameter as a string array.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Class | Class of the Disk. Max Length=40 | |
| ImageType | Type of this image (software type). Max Length=40 | |
| DiskSize | Read-only size of the image. The value is 0 when it is not available. Default=0 | |
| VhdBlockSize | Block size in KB. For VHD it is only used with Dynamic type. Tested sizes for VHD are 512, 2048, and 16384. VHD Min=512, Max=16384, Default=2048. For VHDX it is used for all types. Tested size for VHDX is 32768. VHDX Min=1024, Max= 262144, Default=32768. Default=0 | |
| LogicalSectorSize | Logical Sector Size. Values are: 512, 4096, Default=512 | |
| WriteCacheSize | RAM cache size (MB). Not 0 when used with Cache in Device RAM, and Cache in Device RAM with Overflow on Hard Disk. A value of 0 will disable the RAM use for Cache in Device RAM with Overflow on Hard Disk. Min=0, Max=131072, Default=0 | |
| AutoUpdateEnabled | Automatically update this image for matching Devices when set to true. Default false | |
| ActivationDateEnabled | Use activation date to activate image when set to true. Default false | |
| AdPasswordEnabled | Enable AD password management when set to true. | |
| HaEnabled | Enable HA when set to true. | |
| PrinterManagementEnabled | Invalid printers will be deleted from the Device when set to true. | |
| WriteCacheType | 0 (Private), 1 (Cache on Server), 3 (Cache in Device RAM), 4 (Cache on Device Hard Disk), 7 (Cache on Server, Persistent), 9 (Cache in Device RAM with Overflow on Hard Disk), 10 (Private async), 11(Server persistent async), 12 (Cache in Device RAM with Overflow on Hard Disk async) Min=0, Max=12, Default=0 | |
| LicenseMode | 0 (None), 1 (Multiple Activation Key), or 2 (Key Management Service). Min=0, Max=2, Default=0 | |
| AccelerateOfficeActivation | Run script to activate office automatically. | |
| ActiveDate | Date to activate the disk if AutoUpdateEnabled and activationDateEnabled are true. Has the date. Empty when the AutoUpdateEnabled or activationDateEnabled are false. | |
| LongDescription | Description of the Disk. Max Length=399 | |
| OperatingSystem | Operating System of Disk. Max Length=250 | |
| OsType | Operating System Type of Disk. Max Length=40 | |
| SerialNumber | User defined serial number. Max Length=36 | |
| Date | User defined date. Max Length=40 | |
| Author | User defined author. Max Length=40 | |
| Title | User defined title. Max Length=40 | |
| Company | User defined company. Max Length=40 | |
| InternalName | User defined name. Max Length=63 | |
| OriginalFile | User defined original file. Max Length=127 | |
| HardwareTarget | User defined hardware target. Max Length=127 | |
| MajorRelease | User defined major release number. Min=0, Max=4294967295, Default=0 | |
| MinorRelease | User defined minor release number. Min=0, Max=4294967295, Default=0 | |
| Build | User defined build number. Min=0, Max=4294967295, Default=0 | |
| ClearCacheDisabled | Clear cached secrets disabled. | |
| VHDX | If VHDX is true, the format of the image is VHDX. Otherwise it is VHD. Default=false | |
| EnableSetLocalTime | Enable setting the local time bias on the disk version. |
PvsDisk[]: If successful, the PvsDisk object(s) are returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Get PvsDisk for DiskLocator
Get the PvsDisk for the DiskLocator named theDiskLocator in the Site named theSite and Store named theStore.
Get-PvsDisk -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore
Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
Get-PvsDiskInfo
Get the fields for a Disk and Disk Locator or all Disks and Disk Locators for a Device, Server, Store, Site, or Farm. All Disks and DiskLocators are returned if no parameters are passed.
These are optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DiskLocatorId | Guid[] | GUID of the Disk Locator to Get. |
| DeviceId | Guid[] | GUID of the Device to Get all DiskLocators for. |
| DeviceName | string[] | Name of the Device to Get all DiskLocators for. |
| DeviceMac | PvsPhysicalAddress[] | MAC of the Device to Get all DiskLocators for. |
| ServerId | Guid[] | GUID of the Server to Get all DiskLocators for. |
| ServerName | string[] | Name of the Server to Get all DiskLocators for. |
| UpdateTaskId | Guid[] | GUID of the Update Task to Get all DiskLocators for. |
| SiteId | Guid[] | GUID of the Site to Get all DiskLocators for. |
| SiteName | string[] | Name of the Site to Get all DiskLocators for. |
These are optional & resolutions
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or DiskLocatorName | string[] | |
| StoreId | Guid[] | |
| StoreName | string[] | |
| UpdateTaskName | string[] |
These are optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Single | SwitchParameter | |
| All | SwitchParameter |
Optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| OnlyActive | SwitchParameter | |
| UpdateDevice | SwitchParameter |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid[] | GUID of the Site to Get all DiskLocators for. |
| SiteName | string[] | Name of the Site to Get all DiskLocators for. |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| StoreId | Guid[] | |
| StoreName | string[] |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
DiskLocatorId, DeviceId, ServerId, UpdateTaskId or SiteId
If only selected fields are needed, pass them in the Fields parameter as a string array.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DiskLocatorId | Read-only GUID that uniquely identifies this Disk Locator. | |
| Name or DiskLocatorName | Name of the Disk Locator File. It is unique within the Store. ASCII Max Length=52 | |
| SiteId | GUID of the Site this DiskLocator is to be a member of. It is not used with SiteName. | |
| SiteName | Name of the Site this DiskLocator is to be a member of. It is not used with SiteId. | |
| StoreId | GUID of the Store that this Disk Locator is a member of. SiteName or SiteId must also be used. It is not used with StoreName. | |
| StoreName | Name of the Store that this Disk Locator is a member of. SiteName or SiteId must also be used. It is not used with StoreId. | |
| Description | User description. Default=”” Max Length=250 | |
| MenuText | Text that is displayed in the Boot Menu. If this field has no value, the name value is used. Default=”” ASCII Max Length=64 | |
| ServerId | GUID of the single Server that this Disk Locator is assigned to. It is not used with ServerName. Default=00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 | |
| ServerName | Name of the single Server that this Disk Locator is assigned to. It is not used with ServerId. Default=”” | |
| Enabled | True when this disk can be booted, false otherwise. Default=true | |
| Role | Read-only Role of the user for this item. 100 is Farm Administrator, 200 is Site Administrator, 300 is Collection Administrator, and 999 is read-only. Default=999 | |
| Mapped | True if the Disk is currently mapped, false otherwise. Default=false | |
| EnabledForDevice | True when this disk is enabled for the Device specified, false otherwise. This is only returned when a Device is specified. Default=true | |
| Active | True if the DiskLocator is currently active, false otherwise. Default=false | |
| RebalanceEnabled | True when this Server can automatically rebalance Devices, false otherwise. Default=false | |
| RebalanceTriggerPercent | Percent over fair load that triggers a dynamic Device rebalance. Min=5, Max=5000, Default=25 | |
| SubnetAffinity | Qualifier for subnet affinity when assigning a Server. 0=None, 1=Best Effort, 2=Fixed. Min=0, Max=2, Default=0 | |
| DiskUpdateDeviceId | GUID of the DiskUpdateDevice that is used when updates are performed. Default=00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 | |
| DiskUpdateDeviceName | Name of the DiskUpdateDevice that is used when updates are performed. Default=”” | |
| TemporaryVersionSet | Read-only true when temporary version(s) are set. Default=false | |
| Class | Class of the Disk. Max Length=40 | |
| ImageType | Type of this image (software type). Max Length=40 | |
| DiskSize | Read-only size of the image. The value is 0 when it is not available. Default=0 | |
| VhdBlockSize | Block size in KB. For VHD it is only used with Dynamic type. Tested sizes for VHD are 512, 2048, and 16384. VHD Min=512, Max=16384, Default=2048. For VHDX it is used for all types. Tested size for VHDX is 32768. VHDX Min=1024, Max= 262144, Default=32768. Default=0 | |
| LogicalSectorSize | Logical Sector Size. Values are: 512, 4096, Default=512 | |
| WriteCacheSize | RAM cache size (MB). Not 0 when used with Cache in Device RAM, and Cache in Device RAM with Overflow on Hard Disk. A value of 0 will disable the RAM use for Cache in Device RAM with Overflow on Hard Disk. Min=0, Max=131072, Default=0 | |
| AutoUpdateEnabled | Automatically update this image for matching Devices when set to true. Default false | |
| ActivationDateEnabled | Use activation date to activate image when set to true. Default false | |
| AdPasswordEnabled | Enable AD password management when set to true. | |
| HaEnabled | Enable HA when set to true. | |
| PrinterManagementEnabled | Invalid printers will be deleted from the Device when set to true. | |
| WriteCacheType | 0 (Private), 1 (Cache on Server), 3 (Cache in Device RAM), 4 (Cache on Device Hard Disk), 7 (Cache on Server, Persistent), 9 (Cache in Device RAM with Overflow on Hard Disk), 10 (Private async), 11(Server persistent async), 12 (Cache in Device RAM with Overflow on Hard Disk async) Min=0, Max=12, Default=0 | |
| LicenseMode | 0 (None), 1 (Multiple Activation Key), or 2 (Key Management Service). Min=0, Max=2, Default=0 | |
| AccelerateOfficeActivation | Run script to activate office automatically. | |
| ActiveDate | Date to activate the disk if AutoUpdateEnabled and activationDateEnabled are true. Has the date. Empty when the AutoUpdateEnabled or activationDateEnabled are false. | |
| LongDescription | Description of the Disk. Max Length=399 | |
| OperatingSystem | Operating System of Disk. Max Length=250 | |
| OsType | Operating System Type of Disk. Max Length=40 | |
| SerialNumber | User defined serial number. Max Length=36 | |
| Date | User defined date. Max Length=40 | |
| Author | User defined author. Max Length=40 | |
| Title | User defined title. Max Length=40 | |
| Company | User defined company. Max Length=40 | |
| InternalName | User defined name. Max Length=63 | |
| OriginalFile | User defined original file. Max Length=127 | |
| HardwareTarget | User defined hardware target. Max Length=127 | |
| MajorRelease | User defined major release number. Min=0, Max=4294967295, Default=0 | |
| MinorRelease | User defined minor release number. Min=0, Max=4294967295, Default=0 | |
| Build | User defined build number. Min=0, Max=4294967295, Default=0 | |
| ClearCacheDisabled | Clear cached secrets disabled. | |
| VHDX | If VHDX is true, the format of the image is VHDX. Otherwise it is VHD. Default=false | |
| EnableSetLocalTime | Enable setting the local time bias on the disk version. | |
| DeviceCount | Read-only count of Devices. Default=0 | |
| Locked | True if the Disk is currently locked, false otherwise. Default=false |
PvsDiskInfo[]: If successful, the PvsDiskInfo object(s) are returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Get PvsDiskInfo for Farm
Get all PvsDiskInfo for the Farm.
Get-PvsDiskInfo
EXAMPLE 2: Get PvsDiskInfo for Site
Get all PvsDiskInfo for the Site named theSite.
Get-PvsDiskInfo -SiteName theSite
EXAMPLE 3: Get PvsDiskInfo for Site and Store
Get all PvsDiskInfo for the Site named theSite and Store named theStore.
Get-PvsDiskInfo -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore
EXAMPLE 4: Get PvsDiskInfo for DiskLocator
Get the PvsDiskInfo for the DiskLocator named theDiskLocator in the Site named theSite and Store named theStore.
Get-PvsDiskInfo -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore
Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
EXAMPLE 5: Get PvsDiskInfo and Enable
Get all PvsDiskInfo that are not Enabled and then Enables them.
Get-PvsDiskInfo -Fields Enabled | Where-Object {\$\_.Enabled -eq \$false} | foreach { \$o = \$\_; \$o.Enabled = \$true; \$o } | Set-PvsDiskLocator
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. The “foreach { $o = $_; $o.X = Y; $o }” sets the field X to value Y and returns the object again so it can be piped to the Set command for update.
Get-PvsDiskInventory
Get the fields for Inventory Status of a Disk Version or all Disk Versions for a Disk Locator.
This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DiskLocatorId | Guid[] | GUID of the Disk Locator to Get Disk Version Inventory of. |
or this is required & resolution
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or DiskLocatorName | string[] |
Optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Version | uint |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid[] | |
| SiteName | string[] |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| StoreId | Guid[] | |
| StoreName | string[] |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
(DiskLocatorId and Version) or DiskLocatorId
If only selected fields are needed, pass them in the Fields parameter as a string array.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Version | Version number. The base disk is version 0, the other version numbers are in part of the file name. | |
| ServerId | GUID of the Server that the Disk Version Inventory is being reported about. | |
| ServerName | Name of the Server that the Disk Version Inventory is being reported about. | |
| FilePath | Path used to access the disk version from the Server. Empty if the information is not available. | |
| FileTime | Date/Time of the date version file. Has the date and time without milliseconds. Empty if the information is not available. | |
| PropertiesTime | Date/Time of the disk properties. Has the date and time without milliseconds. Empty if the information is not available. | |
| State | The number code of the inventory state. Values are: 0 (Up to date), 1 (version file is missing), 2 (version file is out of date), 3 (properties are missing), 4 (properties are out of date), 5 (server is not reachable). | |
| Active | 1 if the Server is currently active, 2 if unknown, and 0 otherwise. |
PvsDiskInventory[]: If successful, the PvsDiskInventory object(s) are returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Get PvsDiskInventory for DiskLocator
Get all PvsDiskInventory for the DiskLocator named theDiskLocator in the Site named theSite and Store named theStore.
Get-PvsDiskInventory -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore
Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
Get-PvsDiskLocator
Get the fields for a Disk Locator or all Disk Locators for a Device, Server, Store, Site, or Farm. All DiskLocators are returned if no parameters are passed.
These are optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DiskLocatorId | Guid[] | GUID of the Disk Locator to Get. |
| DeviceId | Guid[] | GUID of the Device to Get all DiskLocators for. |
| DeviceName | string[] | Name of the Device to Get all DiskLocators for. |
| DeviceMac | PvsPhysicalAddress[] | MAC of the Device to Get all DiskLocators for. |
| ServerId | Guid[] | GUID of the Server to Get all DiskLocators for. |
| ServerName | string[] | Name of the Server to Get all DiskLocators for. |
| UpdateTaskId | Guid[] | GUID of the Update Task to Get all DiskLocators for. |
| SiteId | Guid[] | GUID of the Site to Get all DiskLocators for. |
| SiteName | string[] | Name of the Site to Get all DiskLocators for. |
These are optional & resolutions
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or DiskLocatorName | string[] | |
| StoreId | Guid[] | |
| StoreName | string[] | |
| UpdateTaskName | string[] |
These are optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Single | SwitchParameter | |
| All | SwitchParameter |
Optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| OnlyActive | SwitchParameter | |
| UpdateDevice | SwitchParameter |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid[] | GUID of the Site to Get all DiskLocators for. |
| SiteName | string[] | Name of the Site to Get all DiskLocators for. |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| StoreId | Guid[] | |
| StoreName | string[] |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
DiskLocatorId, DeviceId, ServerId, UpdateTaskId, SiteId or StoreId
If only selected fields are needed, pass them in the Fields parameter as a string array.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DiskLocatorId | Read-only GUID that uniquely identifies this Disk Locator. | |
| Name or DiskLocatorName | Name of the Disk Locator File. It is unique within the Store. ASCII Max Length=52 | |
| SiteId | GUID of the Site this DiskLocator is to be a member of. It is not used with SiteName. | |
| SiteName | Name of the Site this DiskLocator is to be a member of. It is not used with SiteId. | |
| StoreId | GUID of the Store that this Disk Locator is a member of. SiteName or SiteId must also be used. It is not used with StoreName. | |
| StoreName | Name of the Store that this Disk Locator is a member of. SiteName or SiteId must also be used. It is not used with StoreId. | |
| Description | User description. Default=”” Max Length=250 | |
| MenuText | Text that is displayed in the Boot Menu. If this field has no value, the name value is used. Default=”” ASCII Max Length=64 | |
| ServerId | GUID of the single Server that this Disk Locator is assigned to. It is not used with ServerName. Default=00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 | |
| ServerName | Name of the single Server that this Disk Locator is assigned to. It is not used with ServerId. Default=”” | |
| Enabled | True when this disk can be booted, false otherwise. Default=true | |
| Role | Read-only Role of the user for this item. 100 is Farm Administrator, 200 is Site Administrator, 300 is Collection Administrator, and 999 is read-only. Default=999 | |
| Mapped | True if the Disk is currently mapped, false otherwise. Default=false | |
| EnabledForDevice | True when this disk is enabled for the Device specified, false otherwise. This is only returned when a Device is specified. Default=true | |
| Active | True if the DiskLocator is currently active, false otherwise. Default=false | |
| RebalanceEnabled | True when this Server can automatically rebalance Devices, false otherwise. Default=false | |
| RebalanceTriggerPercent | Percent over fair load that triggers a dynamic Device rebalance. Min=5, Max=5000, Default=25 | |
| SubnetAffinity | Qualifier for subnet affinity when assigning a Server. 0=None, 1=Best Effort, 2=Fixed. Min=0, Max=2, Default=0 | |
| DiskUpdateDeviceId | GUID of the DiskUpdateDevice that is used when updates are performed. Default=00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 | |
| DiskUpdateDeviceName | Name of the DiskUpdateDevice that is used when updates are performed. Default=”” | |
| TemporaryVersionSet | Read-only true when temporary version(s) are set. Default=false |
PvsDiskLocator[]: If successful, the PvsDiskLocator object(s) are returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Get PvsDiskLocator for Farm
Get all PvsDiskLocator for the Farm.
Get-PvsDiskLocator
EXAMPLE 2: Get PvsDiskLocator for Site
Get all PvsDiskLocator for the Site named theSite.
Get-PvsDiskLocator -SiteName theSite
EXAMPLE 3: Get PvsDiskLocator for Site and Store
Get all PvsDiskLocator for the Site named theSite and Store named theStore.
Get-PvsDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore
EXAMPLE 4: Get PvsDiskLocator for DiskLocator
Get the PvsDiskLocator for the DiskLocator named theDiskLocator in the Site named theSite and Store named theStore.
Get-PvsDiskLocator -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore
Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
EXAMPLE 5: Get PvsDiskLocator and Enable
Get all PvsDiskLocator that are not Enabled and then Enables them.
Get-PvsDiskLocator -Fields Enabled | Where-Object {\$\_.Enabled -eq \$false} | foreach { \$o = \$\_; \$o.Enabled = \$true; \$o } | Set-PvsDiskLocator
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. The “foreach { $o = $_; $o.X = Y; $o }” sets the field X to value Y and returns the object again so it can be piped to the Set command for update.
Get-PvsDiskLocatorCount
Get count of Disk Locators for a Site and Type.
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid | GUID of the Site to get the Disk Locator Count of. |
| SiteName | string | Name of the Site to get the Disk Locator Count of. |
These are optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Single | SwitchParameter | |
| All | SwitchParameter |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
SiteId
UInt32: If successful, the numeric value is returned
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Get-PvsDiskLocatorCount Returns the Number (or Count) of PvsDiskLocator in PvsSite
Get-PvsDiskLocatorCount -SiteName theSite
Get-PvsDiskLocatorLock
Get the fields for all the locks of a Disk Locator.
This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DiskLocatorId | Guid[] | GUID of the Disk Locator to Get the Locks. |
or this is required & resolution
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or DiskLocatorName | string[] |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid[] | |
| SiteName | string[] |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| StoreId | Guid[] | |
| StoreName | string[] |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
DiskLocatorId
If only selected fields are needed, pass them in the Fields parameter as a string array.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Exclusive | True when the lock is exclusive, false when it is shared. Default=false | |
| DeviceId | GUID of the Device that has the lock, will be 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 if a Server has the lock. | |
| DeviceName | Name of the Device that has the lock, will not be included if a Server has the lock. | |
| ServerId | GUID of the Server that has the lock, will be 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 if a Device has the lock. | |
| ServerName | Name of the Server that has the lock, will not be included if a Device has the lock. | |
| ReadOnly | True when lock is because file system is read only, false when file system is read write Default=false |
PvsDiskLocatorLock[]: If successful, the PvsDiskLocatorLock object(s) are returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Get PvsDiskLocatorLock for DiskLocator
Get all PvsDiskLocatorLock for the DiskLocator named theDiskLocator in the Site named theSite and Store named theStore.
Get-PvsDiskLocatorLock -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore
Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
Get-PvsDiskUpdateDevice
Get the fields and status for a Disk Update Device, or all Disk Update Devices for a Site, Server, DiskLocator or Farm. All Disk Update Devices are returned if no parameters are passed.
These are optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DeviceId | Guid[] | GUID of the Disk Update Device to Get. |
| Name or DeviceName | string[] | Name of Disk Update Device to Get. |
| DeviceMac | PvsPhysicalAddress[] | MAC of the Disk Update Device to Get. |
| ServerId | Guid[] | GUID of the Server to Get all Disk Update Devices for. |
| ServerName | string[] | Name of the Server to Get all Disk Update Devices for. |
| DiskLocatorId | Guid[] | GUID of the DiskLocator to Get the Disk Update Device for. |
| UpdateTaskId | Guid[] | GUID of the Update Task to Get all Disk Update Devices for. |
| SiteId | Guid[] | GUID of the Site. |
| SiteName | string[] | Name of the Site. |
These are optional & resolutions
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| DiskLocatorName | string[] | |
| UpdateTaskName | string[] |
Optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| OnlyActive | SwitchParameter | |
| MakLicenseActivated | uint |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid[] | GUID of the Site. |
| SiteName | string[] | Name of the Site. |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| StoreId | Guid[] | |
| StoreName | string[] |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
DeviceId, ServerId, DiskLocatorId, UpdateTaskId or SiteId
If only selected fields are needed, pass them in the Fields parameter as a string array.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DeviceId | Read-only GUID that uniquely identifies this Device. | |
| Name or DeviceName | Computer name with no spaces. ASCII computer name characters Max Length=15 | |
| VirtualHostingPoolId | GUID of the Virtual Hosting Pool. It is not used with VirtualHostingPoolName. Default=00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 | |
| VirtualHostingPoolName | Name of the Virtual Hosting Pool. | |
| DiskLocatorId | GUID of the Disk Locator to update with this Device. | |
| DiskLocatorName | Name of the Disk Locator File to update with this Device. | |
| SiteId | GUID of the Site this Disk Update Device is to be a member of. | |
| SiteName | Name of the Site this Disk Update Device is to be a member of. | |
| StoreId | GUID of the Store that the Disk Locator is a member of. | |
| StoreName | Name of the Store that the Disk Locator is a member of. | |
| Description | User description. Default=”” Max Length=250 | |
| DeviceMac | Ethernet address can have the form XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX. Uniquely identifies the Device. Default=”” | |
| Port | UDP port to use with Stream Service. Min=1025, Max=65534, Default=6901 | |
| Active | True if the Device is currently active, false otherwise. Default=false | |
| AdTimestamp | The time the Active Directory machine account password was generated. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=0 | |
| AdSignature | The signature of the Active Directory machine account password. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=0 | |
| LogLevel | Level to perform logging at. Values are: 0 (None), 1 (Fatal), 2 (Error), 3 (Warning), 4 (Info), and 5 (Debug). Min=0, Max=6, Default=4 | |
| DomainName | Fully qualified name of the domain that the Device belongs to. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=”” Max Length=255 | |
| DomainObjectSID | The value of the objectSID AD attribute of the same name for the Device’s computer account. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=”” Max Length=186 | |
| DomainControllerName | The name of the DC used to create the host’s computer account. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=”” Max Length=4000 | |
| DomainTimeCreated | The time that the computer account was created. Has the date and time including milliseconds. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=Empty | |
| AdPassword | The Active Directory machine account password. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=”” Max Length=65535 | |
| Ip | Read-only IPv4 Address of the Device. It is equal to 0.0.0.0 if the Device is not active or not using IPv4 | |
| Ipv6 | Read-only IPv6 Address of the device. It is equal to “::” if the device is not active or not using IPv6 Default=0 | |
| ServerPortConnection | Read-only Port of the Server that the Device is using. It is equal to 0 if the Device is not active. Default=0 | |
| ServerIpConnection | Read-only IPv4 Address of the Server that the Device is using. It is equal to 0.0.0.0 if the Device is not active or not using IPv4. | |
| ServerIpv6Connection | Read-only IPv6 Address of the Server that the Device is using. It is equal to “::” if the Device is not active or not using IPv6. Default=0 | |
| ServerId | Read-only GUID of the Server that the Device is using. It is equal to 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 if the Device is not active. | |
| ServerName | Read-only Name of the Server that the Device is using. It is equal to “” if the Device is not active. | |
| DiskVersion | Read-only version of the Disk Locator File that the Device is using. It is equal to 0 if the Device is not active. Default=0 | |
| Status | 1 or 2 numbers in the format n,n. They are the number of retries and if ram cache is being used, ram cache percent used. It is equal to “” if the Device is not active. | |
| LicenseType | 0 when None, 1 for Desktop, 2 for Server, 5 for OEM SmartClient, 6 for XenApp, 7 for XenDesktop. It is equal to 0 if the Device is not active. Default=0 | |
| MakLicenseActivated | Read-only indicator if MAK licensing is being used and is activated. Values are: 0 (MAK not used), 1 (Not Activated), 2 (Activated). It is equal to 0 if the Device is not active. Default=0 | |
| Model | Oem Only: Read-only model of the computer. Values are OptiPlex 745, 755, 320, 760, FX160, or Default. It is equal to “” if the Device is not active. | |
| License | Oem Only: Read-only type of the license. Values are 0 when None, 1 or 2 when Desktop. It is equal to 0 if the Device is not active. Default=0 |
PvsDiskUpdateDevice[]: If successful, the PvsDiskUpdateDevice object(s) are returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Get PvsDiskUpdateDevice for Farm
Get all PvsDiskUpdateDevice for the Farm.
Get-PvsDiskUpdateDevice
EXAMPLE 2: Get PvsDiskUpdateDevice for Site
Get all PvsDiskUpdateDevice for the Site named theSite.
Get-PvsDiskUpdateDevice -SiteName theSite
EXAMPLE 3: Get PvsDiskUpdateDevice for Server
Get all PvsDiskUpdateDevice for the Server named theServer.
Get-PvsDiskUpdateDevice -ServerName theServer
EXAMPLE 4: Get PvsDiskUpdateDevice for DiskLocator
Get all PvsDiskUpdateDevice for the DiskLocator named theDiskLocator in the Site named theSite and Store named theStore.
Get-PvsDiskUpdateDevice -DiskLocatorName theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore
DiskLocatorId can be used instead of DiskLocatorName so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
EXAMPLE 5: Get PvsDiskUpdateDevice for Device
Get the PvsDiskUpdateDevice for the Device named theDevice.
Get-PvsDiskUpdateDevice -Name theDevice
EXAMPLE 6: Get PvsDiskUpdateDevice for Device MAC
Get the PvsDiskUpdateDevice for the Device with MAC 02-50-F2-00-00-01.
Get-PvsDiskUpdateDevice -DeviceMac "02-50-F2-00-00-01"
EXAMPLE 7: Get PvsDiskUpdateDevice for UpdateTask
Get the PvsDiskUpdateDevice for the UpdateTask named theUpdateTask in the Site named theSite.
Get-PvsDiskUpdateDevice -UpdateTaskName theUpdateTask -SiteName theSite
UpdateTaskId can be used instead of UpdateTaskName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
Get-PvsDiskUpdateStatus
Get the status of an Update Task, or all Update Tasks for a Site or Farm. All Disk Update Tasks are returned if no parameters are passed.
These are optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| UpdateTaskId | Guid[] | GUID of the Update Task to Get. |
| DeviceId | Guid[] | GUID of the Disk Update Device to Get Disk Update Status for. |
| DeviceName | string[] | Name of the Disk Update Device to Get Disk Update Status for. |
| DeviceMac | PvsPhysicalAddress[] | MAC of the Disk Update Device to Get Disk Update Status for. |
| Guid or DiskUpdateTaskId | Guid[] | GUID of the Disk Update Task and Device relationship to Get Disk Update Status for. |
| SiteId | Guid[] | GUID of the Site to Get all Update Tasks for. Also used with UpdateTaskName. |
| SiteName | string[] | Name of the Site to Get all Update Tasks for. Also used with UpdateTaskName. |
or this is optional & resolution
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| UpdateTaskName | string[] |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid[] | GUID of the Site to Get all Update Tasks for. Also used with UpdateTaskName. |
| SiteName | string[] | Name of the Site to Get all Update Tasks for. Also used with UpdateTaskName. |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
UpdateTaskId, DeviceId or SiteId
If only selected fields are needed, pass them in the Fields parameter as a string array.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DiskUpdateTaskId | GUID that uniquely identifies this Update Task and Device relationship. | |
| UpdateTaskId | GUID that uniquely identifies the Update Task. | |
| UpdateTaskName | Name of the Update Task. | |
| Description | User description of the Update Task. | |
| DiskLocatorId | GUID of the Disk Locator to update. | |
| Name or DiskLocatorName | Name of the Disk Locator File to update. | |
| VirtualHostingPoolId | GUID of the Virtual Hosting Pool being used for the update. | |
| VirtualHostingPoolName | Name of the Virtual Hosting Pool being used for the update. | |
| DeviceId | GUID that Device being used to do the update. | |
| DeviceName | Name of the Device being used to do the update. | |
| SiteId | GUID of the Site that this Update Task Name is a member of. | |
| SiteName | Name of the Site that this Update Task Name is a member of. | |
| StoreId | GUID of the Store that the Disk Locator is a member of. | |
| StoreName | Name of the Store that the Disk Locator is a member of. | |
| PreviousResult | Status of the last run. Values are: 0 (Ready), 1 (Update Pending), 2 (Preparing Image), 3 (Starting VM), 4 (Update In Progress), 5 (Stopping VM), 6 (Submitting Image), 7 (Reverting Image), 8 (Invalid), 9 (Aborted), 10 (Completed Successfully), 11 (No Updates) Min=0, Max=11, Default=0 | |
| PreviousResultMessage | Message string that includes the results of the last run. Default=”” Max Length=255 | |
| CurrentStatus | Current status of the update. Values are: 0 (Ready), 1 (Update Pending), 2 (Preparing Image), 3 (Starting VM), 4 (Update In Progress), 5 (Stopping VM), 6 (Submitting Image), 7 (Reverting Image), 8 (Invalid), 9 (Aborted), 10 (Completed Successfully), 11 (No Updates) Min=0, Max=11, Default=0 | |
| CurrentStatusMessage | Message string that includes the results of the run. Default=”” Max Length=255 |
PvsDiskUpdateStatus[]: If successful, the PvsDiskUpdateStatus object(s) are returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Get PvsDiskUpdateStatus for Farm
Get all PvsDiskUpdateStatus for the Farm.
Get-PvsDiskUpdateStatus
EXAMPLE 2: Get PvsDiskUpdateStatus for Site
Get all PvsDiskUpdateStatus for the Site named theSite.
Get-PvsDiskUpdateStatus -SiteName theSite
EXAMPLE 3: Get PvsDiskUpdateStatus for Server
Get all PvsDiskUpdateStatus for the Server named theServer.
Get-PvsDiskUpdateStatus -ServerName theServer
EXAMPLE 4: Get PvsDiskUpdateStatus for DiskLocator
Get all PvsDiskUpdateStatus for the DiskLocator named theDiskLocator in the Site named theSite and Store named theStore.
Get-PvsDiskUpdateStatus -DiskLocatorName theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore
DiskLocatorId can be used instead of DiskLocatorName so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
EXAMPLE 5: Get PvsDiskUpdateStatus for Device
Get the PvsDiskUpdateStatus for the Device named theDevice.
Get-PvsDiskUpdateStatus -Name theDevice
EXAMPLE 6: Get PvsDiskUpdateStatus for Device MAC
Get the PvsDiskUpdateStatus for the Device with MAC 02-50-F2-00-00-01.
Get-PvsDiskUpdateStatus -DeviceMac "02-50-F2-00-00-01"
EXAMPLE 7: Get PvsDiskUpdateStatus for UpdateTask
Get the PvsDiskUpdateStatus for the UpdateTask named theUpdateTask in the Site named theSite.
Get-PvsDiskUpdateStatus -UpdateTaskName theUpdateTask -SiteName theSite
UpdateTaskId can be used instead of UpdateTaskName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 8: Get PvsDiskUpdateStatus for DiskUpdateTaskId
Get the PvsDiskUpdateStatus for the Device named theDevice then uses the DiskUpdateTaskId of the PvsDiskUpdateStatus to get the future Get-PvsDiskUpdateStatus.
$u = Get-PvsDiskUpdateStatus -DeviceName theDevice -Fields DiskUpdateTaskId
Get-PvsDiskUpdateStatus -Guid $u.DiskUpdateTaskId
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
Get-PvsDiskVersion
Get the fields for a Disk Version or all Disk Versions for a Disk Locator.
This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DiskLocatorId | Guid[] | GUID of the Disk Locator to Get Disk Versions of. |
or this is required & resolution
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or DiskLocatorName | string[] |
These are optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Version | uint | |
| Type | uint |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid[] | |
| SiteName | string[] |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| StoreId | Guid[] | |
| StoreName | string[] |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
(DiskLocatorId and Version) or DiskLocatorId
If only selected fields are needed, pass them in the Fields parameter as a string array.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Version | Read-only version number. The base disk is version 0, the other version numbers are in part of the file name. Default=0 | |
| Description | User description. Default=”” Max Length=250 | |
| Type | Read-only type of the Disk Version. Values are: 0 (Base), 1 (Manual), 2 (Automatic), 3 (Merge), and 4 (MergeBase) Min=0, Max=4, Default=0 | |
| CreateDate | Read-only Date/Time that the Disk Version was created. Default=getdate | |
| ScheduledDate | Date/Time that the Disk Version is scheduled to become available. Has the date, hour and minute. Empty when the disk version is made available immediately. Default=Empty | |
| DeleteWhenFree | Read-only true if the Disk Version is no longer needed because of a merge. If not current booted by a Device, it can be deleted. Default=false | |
| Access | Read-only access of the Disk Version. Values are: 0 (Production), 1 (Maintenance), 2 (MaintenanceHighestVersion), 3 (Override), 4 (Merge), 5 (MergeMaintenance), 6 (MergeTest), and 7 (Test) Min=0, Max=7, Default=0 | |
| Name or DiskFileName | Name of the Disk File including the extension. Default=”” | |
| DeviceCount | Read-only count of Devices. Default=0 | |
| GoodInventoryStatus | True when the up to date file is accessible by all Servers, false otherwise. Default=false | |
| TaskId | When a Merge is occurring, this will be set with the task number of the process that is occurring. Default=”” | |
| LocalTimeBias | The time zone set in the vDisk version as the offset from UTC in minutes. -1 indicates vDisk timezone is not known or applicable. Default is -1 Default=-1 Max Length=5 | |
| CanDelete | Read-only true when the version can be deleted. Default=false | |
| CanMerge | Read-only true when the version can be update merged. Will be set for the highest version number. Default=false | |
| CanMergeBase | Read-only true when the version can be base merged. Will be set for the highest version number. Default=false | |
| CanPromote | Read-only true when the version can be promoted. Default=false | |
| CanRevertTest | Read-only true when the version can be reverted to Test Access. Default=false | |
| CanRevertMaintenance | Read-only true when the version can be reverted to Maintenance Access. Default=false | |
| CanSetScheduledDate | Read-only true when the version can have the scheduled date modified. Default=false | |
| CanOverride | Read-only true when the version can be set as the Override. Default=false | |
| IsPending | Read-only true when the version ScheduledDate has not occurred. Default=false | |
| TemporaryVersionSet | Read-only true when temporary version(s) are set. Some changes cannot be made to the version when this is set. Default=false |
PvsDiskVersion[]: If successful, the PvsDiskVersion object(s) are returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Get PvsDiskVersion for DiskLocator
Get all PvsDiskVersion for the DiskLocator named theDiskLocator in the Site named theSite and Store named theStore.
Get-PvsDiskVersion -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore
Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
EXAMPLE 2: Get PvsDiskVersion for DiskLocator
Get the first base PvsDiskVersion for the DiskLocator named theDiskLocator in Site named theSite and Store named theStore.
Get-PvsDiskVersion -Name theDiskLocator -Version 0 -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore
Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
EXAMPLE 3: Get Maintenance PvsDiskVersion for DiskLocator
Get the Maintenance PvsDiskVersion for the DiskLocator named theDiskLocator in Site named theSite and Store named theStore.
Get-PvsDiskVersion -Name theDiskLocator -Type 1 -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore
Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
EXAMPLE 4: Get Test PvsDiskVersion for DiskLocator
Get all Test PvsDiskVersion for the DiskLocator named theDiskLocator in Site named theSite and Store named theStore.
Get-PvsDiskVersion -Name theDiskLocator -Type 2 -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore
Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
EXAMPLE 5: Get Override PvsDiskVersion for DiskLocator
Get the Override PvsDiskVersion for the DiskLocator named theDiskLocator in Site named theSite and Store named theStore.
Get-PvsDiskVersion -Name theDiskLocator -Type 3 -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore
Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
Get-PvsExists
Return true if a Site, Server, Collection, View, Device, Store, Update Task or Virtual Hosting Pool Name is already used. If a CollectionName, SiteViewName, UpdateTaskName or VirtualHostingPoolName is specified, SiteName or SiteId must be included.
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteName | string | Name of the Site. |
| ServerName | string | Server name, to see if it is already used in the Farm. |
| FarmViewName | string | Farm View name, to see if it is already used in the Farm. |
| DeviceName | string | Device name, to see if it is already used in the Farm. |
| DeviceMac | PvsPhysicalAddress[] | Device MAC, to see if it is already used in the Farm. |
| StoreName | string | Store name, to see if it is already used. |
or one of these is required & resolutions
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| CollectionName | string | |
| SiteViewName | string | |
| VirtualHostingPoolName | string | |
| UpdateTaskName | string | |
| DiskLocatorName | string |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteName | string | Name of the Site. |
| SiteId | Guid |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| StoreId | Guid | |
| StoreName | string | Store name, to see if it is already used. |
Boolean: If successful, $true or $false is returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Get-PvsExists Determine if SiteName Already Exists
Get-PvsExists -SiteName theName
EXAMPLE 2: Get-PvsExists Determine if ServerName Already Exists
Get-PvsExists -ServerName theName
EXAMPLE 3: Get-PvsExists Determine if FarmViewName Already Exists
Get-PvsExists -FarmViewName theName
EXAMPLE 4: Get-PvsExists Determine if DeviceName Already Exists
Get-PvsExists -DeviceName theName
EXAMPLE 5: Get-PvsExists Determine if DeviceMac Already Exists
Get-PvsExists -DeviceMac "00-11-22-33-44-55"
EXAMPLE 6: Get-PvsExists Determine if StoreName Already Exists
Get-PvsExists -StoreName theName
EXAMPLE 7: Get-PvsExists Determine if CollectionName Already Exists
Get-PvsExists -CollectionName theName -SiteName theSite
SiteId can be used instead of SiteName.
EXAMPLE 8: Get-PvsExists Determine if SiteViewName Already Exists
Get-PvsExists -SiteViewName theName -SiteName theSite
SiteId can be used instead of SiteName.
EXAMPLE 9: Get-PvsExists Determine if VirtualHostingPoolName Already Exists
Get-PvsExists -VirtualHostingPoolName theName -SiteName theSite
SiteId can be used instead of SiteName.
EXAMPLE 10: Get-PvsExists Determine if UpdateTaskName Already Exists
Get-PvsExists -UpdateTaskName theName -SiteName theSite
SiteId can be used instead of SiteName.
EXAMPLE 11: Get-PvsExists Determine if DiskLocatorName Already Exists
Get-PvsExists -DiskLocatorName theName -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore
SiteId can be used instead of SiteName, and StoreId can be used instead of StoreName.
Get-PvsFarm
Get the fields for the Farm.
Optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or FarmId | Guid[] | GUID of the Farm to Get. This is optional since there is only one Farm. |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
FarmId
If only selected fields are needed, pass them in the Fields parameter as a string array.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or FarmId | Read-only GUID that uniquely identifies this Farm. | |
| Name or FarmName | Name of the Farm. Default=”” Max Length=50 | |
| Description | User description. Default=”” Max Length=250 | |
| AutoAddEnabled | True when Auto Add is enabled, false otherwise. Default=false | |
| AuditingEnabled | True when Auditing is enabled, false otherwise. Default=false | |
| LastAuditArchiveDate | Last date of Audit Trail data that was Archived. Has the date. Default=Empty | |
| DefaultSiteId | GUID of the Site to place new Devices into automatically. Not used with defaultSiteName. Default=00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 | |
| DefaultSiteName | Name of the Site to place new Devices into automatically. Not used with DefaultSiteId. Default=”” | |
| OfflineDatabaseSupportEnabled | True when Offline Database Support is enabled, false otherwise. Default=false | |
| AdGroupsEnabled | Active Directory groups are used for authorization, when set to true. Windows groups are used when set to false. Default=false | |
| LicenseServer | License server name. Default=”” Max Length=255 | |
| LicenseServerPort | License server port. Min=1025, Max=65534, Default=27000 | |
| LicenseTradeUp | License server trade up, when set to true. Default=false | |
| LicenseSKU | LicenseSKU. 0 for on-premises, 1 for cloud. Min=0, Max=1, Default=0 | |
| LicenseWebServicesPort | The license server web services for licensing port. Min=1025, Max=65534, Default=8083 | |
| AutomaticMergeEnabled | True when Automatic Merge is enabled, false otherwise. If the number of versions becomes more than the MaxVersions value, a merge will occur at the end of PromoteDiskVersion. Default=true | |
| MaxVersions | Maximum number a versions of a Disk that can exist before a merge will automatically occur. Min=3, Max=50, Default=5 | |
| MergeMode | Mode to place the version in after a merge has occurred. Values are: 0 (Production), 1 (Test) and 2 (Maintenance). Min=0, Max=2, Default=2 | |
| DatabaseServerName | Read-only name of the database server. | |
| DatabaseInstanceName | Read-only name of the database instance. | |
| DatabaseName | Read-only name of the database. | |
| FailoverPartnerServerName | Read-only name of the database server. | |
| FailoverPartnerInstanceName | Read-only name of the database server instance. | |
| MultiSubnetFailover | Read-only Database MultiSubnetFailover value | |
| Role | Read-only Role of the user for this item. 100 is Farm Administrator, and 999 is read-only. Default=999 | |
| IsReadOnly | Indicates whether the administrative role is read-only(true) or read-write(false). | |
| SetupType | Farm integration type. 0 for no integration, 1 for Citrix Cloud, 2 for Citrix Virtual Apps and Desktops. Min=0, Max=2, Default=0 | |
| CloudSetupActive | True if farm is integrated with Citrix Cloud and all PVS servers have been registered with Citrix Cloud. Default=false | |
| CustomerId | The Citrix Cloud customer ID if the SetupType is Citrix Cloud. Default=”” Max Length=128 | |
| CustomerName | The Citrix Cloud customer name if the SetupType is Citrix Cloud. Default=”” Max Length=256 | |
| FarmEpoch | Timestamp when the Data Encryption Key (DEK) was created and stored in the Credential Wallet. Default=0 | |
| EncryptionStatus | The current status for database encryption. 0 = Idle, 1 = Distributing Keys, 2= Re-encrypting database Min=0, Max=2, Default=0 | |
| ManualKeyCyclingRequired | Indicates if a manual encryption key rotation is required(true) or not(false). Default=false | |
| XdSetupActive | True if farm is integrated with Citrix Virtual Apps and Desktops and all PVS servers have been registered with the CVAD site. Default=false | |
| XdSiteId | The CVAD site ID if the SetupType is Citrix Virtual Apps and Desktops. Default=00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 | |
| XdSiteName | The CVAD site name if the SetupType is Citrix Virtual Apps and Desktops. Default=”” Max Length=256 | |
| KeyRotationInitiatingServerFqdn | The FQDN of the Server who initiated the database encryption key rotation. Default=”” Max Length=1024 | |
| DefaultDeviceLogLevel | The default logging level used by newly created target devices. Values are: 0 (None), 1 (Fatal), 2 (Error), 3 (Warning), 4 (Info), and 5 (Debug). Min=0, Max=6, Default=4 | |
| KeyExchangeType | The encryption key exchange type. 0=CredentialWallet, 1=Peer-2-Peer. Min=0, Max=1, Default=1 | |
| IsUsageDataScrambled | Indicates whether the sensitive information needs to be scrambled (true) or not (false) when uploading usage telemetry data. Default = true. Default=true | |
| LicenseServerCertThumbprint | Stores the license server’s server certificate thumbprint when the server certificate is explicitly accepted by the administrator. NULL if no certificate is explicitly accepted. Default=”” Max Length=65535 | |
| EntitledState | Indicates the entitled state of PVS Farm with LAS. 0 (not entitled), 1 (entitled via LAS), 2 (entitled via V6) | |
| EntitlementExpirationDate | Expiration date of the entitlement |
PvsFarm[]: If successful, the PvsFarm object(s) are returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Get PvsFarm
Get the PvsFarm.
Get-PvsFarm
Get-PvsFarmView
Get the fields for a Farm View or all Farm Views in the Farm. All Farm Views are returned if no parameters are passed.
These are optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or FarmViewId | Guid[] | GUID of the Farm View to Get. |
| Name or FarmViewName | string[] | Name of the Farm View to Get. |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
FarmViewId
If only selected fields are needed, pass them in the Fields parameter as a string array.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or FarmViewId | Read-only GUID that uniquely identifies this Farm View. | |
| Name or FarmViewName | name of the Farm View. Max Length=50 | |
| Description | User description. Default=”” Max Length=250 | |
| DeviceCount | Read-only count of Devices in this Farm View. Default=0 | |
| ActiveDeviceCount | Read-only count of active Devices in this Farm View. Default=0 | |
| MakActivateNeededCount | Read-only count of active Devices that need MAK activation in this Farm View. Default=0 |
PvsFarmView[]: If successful, the PvsFarmView object(s) are returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Get PvsFarmView for Farm
Get all PvsFarmView for the Farm.
Get-PvsFarmView
EXAMPLE 2: Get PvsFarmView
Get the PvsFarmView for the FarmView named theFarmView.
Get-PvsFarmView -Name theFarmView
Get-PvsGroup
Get the fields for the Groups for the user or the System.
Optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Domain | string[] | Domain of user (may be the name of the local computer). |
| User | string[] | Name of user. |
| AdGroupsEnabled | SwitchParameter | Get Active Directory groups, when set to true. Get Windows groups, when set to false. If not included, the Farm AdGroupsEnabled setting is used. |
If only selected fields are needed, pass them in the Fields parameter as a string array.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name | Name of the Group. | |
| Guid | GUID of the Active Directory group. 00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 for Windows groups. |
PvsGroup[]: If successful, the PvsGroup object(s) are returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Get PvsGroup for System
Get all PvsGroup for the System.
Get-PvsGroup
EXAMPLE 2: Get PvsGroup for User
Get all the PvsGroup in the Domain named theDomain for the User named theUser.
Get-PvsGroup -Domain theDomain -User theUser
EXAMPLE 3: Get Active Directory PvsGroup
Get all the Active Directory PvsGroup in the System.
Get-PvsGroup -AdGroupsEnabled
EXAMPLE 4: Get Windows Groups PvsGroup
Get all the Windows Groups PvsGroup in the System.
Get-PvsGroup -AdGroupsEnabled:$false
Get-PvsKeyRotationPendingServers
Gets all the offline servers in Farm that have ServerEpoch different than FarmEpoch when EncryptionStatus is Distributing keys. When EncryptionStatus is Idle, it gets list of all offline servers.
If only selected fields are needed, pass them in the Fields parameter as a string array.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or ServerName | Computer name with no spaces. | |
| SiteName | Name of the Site. | |
| Active | 1 if the Server is currently active, 2 if unknown, and 0 otherwise. |
PvsKeyRotationPendingServers[]: If successful, the PvsKeyRotationPendingServers object(s) are returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Get Get-PvsKeyRotationPendingServers
Gets all the offline servers in Farm that have serverEpoch different than farmEpoch when encryptionStatus is Distributing keys. When encryptionStatus is Idle, it gets list of all offline servers.
Get-PvsKeyRotationPendingServers
Get-PvsLocalServer
Return one record with the local server’s NetBios name
| Name | Type | Description | | :— | :— | :———- |
PvsLocalServer[]: If successful, the PvsLocalServer object(s) are returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Get PvsLocalServer
Get the PvsLocalServer for the PVS SoapServer connected to.
Get-PvsLocalServer
Get-PvsMaintenanceVersionExists
Return true if the if the DiskLocator has a maintenance version, false otherwise.
This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DiskLocatorId | Guid | DiskLocator GUID, to see if it has a maintenance version. |
or this is required & resolution
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or DiskLocatorName | string |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid | |
| SiteName | string |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| StoreId | Guid | |
| StoreName | string |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
DiskLocatorId
Boolean: If successful, $true or $false is returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Get-PvsMaintenanceVersionExists for Name
Get-PvsMaintenanceVersionExists -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore
Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
Get-PvsMinimumLastAutoAddDeviceNumber
Get the minimum that the Device Number of the last Auto Added Device can be.
This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| CollectionId | Guid | GUID of the Collection to get the Minimum LastAutoAddDeviceNumber for. |
or this is required & resolution
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| CollectionName | string |
Optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| AutoAddPrefix | string | |
| AutoAddSuffix | string | |
| AutoAddNumberLength | uint |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid | |
| SiteName | string |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
CollectionId
UInt32: If successful, the numeric value is returned
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Get-PvsMinimumLastAutoAddDeviceNumber
This example gets the highest auto-add number used so far for a PvsDevice that starts with the AutoAddPrefix and AutoAddSuffix of the PVsCollection.
Get-PvsMinimumLastAutoAddDeviceNumber -CollectionName theCollection -SiteName theSite
CollectionId can be used instead of CollectionName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 2: Get-PvsMinimumLastAutoAddDeviceNumber for AutoAddPrefix with AutoAddSuffix and AutoAddNumberLength
This example gets the highest auto-add number used so far for a PvsDevice with name length up to 10 characters and starts with the AutoAddPrefix and AutoAddSuffix specified.
Get-PvsMinimumLastAutoAddDeviceNumber -CollectionName theCollection -SiteName theSite -AutoAddPrefix "P" -AutoAddSuffix "S" -AutoAddNumberLength 10
CollectionId can be used instead of CollectionName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
Get-PvsMountedDisk
Get the mounted disk, if there is one.
These are optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| ServerId | Guid | GUID of the Server. |
| ServerName | string | Name of the Server. |
These are optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| StoreId | Guid | |
| StoreName | string |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
ServerId or StoreId
PvsDiskLocator: If successful, the mapped PvsDiskLocator is returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Get-PvsMountedDisk
This example gets the PvsMappedDisk. If no disk is mapped, null is returned.
$thePvsDiskLocator = Get-PvsMappedDisk
if ($thePvsDiskLocator -ne $null)
{
$thePvsDiskLocator.Name # display the name of the mapped PvsDiskLocator
}
EXAMPLE 2: Get-PvsMountedDisk for ServerName
This example gets any mapped disk for the ServerName. If no disk is mapped, null is returned.
$thePvsDiskLocator = Get-PvsMappedDisk -ServerName theServer
if ($thePvsDiskLocator -ne $null)
{
$thePvsDiskLocator.Name # display the name of the mapped PvsDiskLocator
}
EXAMPLE 3: Get-PvsMountedDisk for StoreName
This example gets any mapped disk for the StoreName. If no disk is mapped, null is returned.
$thePvsDiskLocator = Get-PvsMappedDisk -StoreName theStore
if ($thePvsDiskLocator -ne $null)
{
$thePvsDiskLocator.Name # display the name of the mapped PvsDiskLocator
}
Get-PvsMountedDriveLetter
If there is currently a Mounted Drive, return the Letter of the Drive.
String: If successful, the String value is returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Get-PvsMountedDriveLetter
This example gets any mapped disk drive letter. If no disk is mapped, a string with length greater than 0 is returned.
$theDriveLetter = Get-PvsMappedDisk
if ($theDriveLetter -ne $null -and $theDriveLetter.length -gt 0)
{
$theDriveLetter # display the drive letter
}
Get-PvsNewDiskVersion
Get new Disk versions for the Store on the Server specified.
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| ServerId | Guid[] | GUID of the Server to look for new Disk versions. |
| ServerName | string[] | Name of the Server to look for new Disk versions. |
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| StoreId | Guid[] | |
| StoreName | string[] |
Optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| AutoAddEnabled | SwitchParameter |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
ServerId or StoreId
If only selected fields are needed, pass them in the Fields parameter as a string array.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name | Name of the disk file without the extension. | |
| Status | Status of the disk file. Values are: 0 (Valid), 1 (Missing Properties File), 2 (Access Denied), 3 (Access Denied and Missing Properties File), 4 (Invalid Disk File), 5 (Manifest Invalid) |
PvsNewDiskVersion[]: If successful, the PvsNewDiskVersion object(s) are returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Get PvsNewDiskVersion
Get all PvsNewDiskVersion in the Store named theStore using the Server named theServer.
Get-PvsNewDiskVersion -ServerName theServer -StoreName theStore
EXAMPLE 2: Get PvsNewDiskVersion with AutoAdd
Get all PvsNewDiskVersion and Auto Adds them in the Store named theStore using the Server named theServer.
Get-PvsNewDiskVersion -ServerName theServer -StoreName theStore -AutoAddEnabled
Get-PvsScrambledDataReport
Returns a (scrambled value, real value) key pair for all device usage events (e.g. create, edit, delete)
If only selected fields are needed, pass them in the Fields parameter as a string array.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| ScrambledData | The scrambled data field | |
| Value | The real value of the scrambled data field |
PvsScrambledDataReport[]: If successful, the PvsScrambledDataReport object(s) are returned.
Get-PvsServer
Get the fields for a Server, all Servers in a Site that use a Store, service a DiskLocator, or for the whole Farm. All Servers are returned if no parameters are passed.
These are optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or ServerId | Guid[] | GUID of the Server to Get. |
| Name or ServerName | string[] | Name of the Server to Get. |
| SiteId | Guid[] | GUID of the Site to Get all Servers. |
| SiteName | string[] | Name of the Site to Get all Servers. |
| DiskLocatorId | Guid[] | GUID of the Disk Locator to Get all Servers. |
or this is optional & resolution
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| DiskLocatorName | string[] |
These are optional & resolutions
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| StoreId | Guid[] | |
| StoreName | string[] |
Optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| All | SwitchParameter |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid[] | GUID of the Site to Get all Servers. |
| SiteName | string[] | Name of the Site to Get all Servers. |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| StoreId | Guid[] | |
| StoreName | string[] |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
ServerId, SiteId, DiskLocatorId or StoreId
If only selected fields are needed, pass them in the Fields parameter as a string array.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or ServerId | Read-only GUID that uniquely identifies this Server. | |
| Name or ServerName | Computer name with no spaces. ASCII computer name characters Max Length=21 | |
| SiteId | GUID of the Site this Server is to be a member of. It is not used with SiteName. | |
| SiteName | Name of the Site this Server is to be a member of. It is not used with SiteId. | |
| Description | User description. Default=”” Max Length=250 | |
| AdMaxPasswordAge | Number of days before a password expires. Min=1, Max=30, Default=7 | |
| LicenseTimeout | Amount of seconds before a license times out. Min=15, Max=300, Default=30 | |
| VDiskCreatePacing | VDisk create time pacing in milliseconds. Min=0, Max=5, Default=0 | |
| FirstPort | Number of the first UDP port for use by the Stream Service, First and Last must allow at least 5 ports. Min=1025, Max=65534, Default=6910 | |
| LastPort | Number of the last UDP port for use by the Stream Service, First and Last must allow at least 5 ports. Min=1025, Max=65534, Default=6930 | |
| ThreadsPerPort | Number of worker threads per IO port. Required that (threadPerPort * numberPorts * numberIPs) <= 1000. Min=1, Max=60, Default=8 | |
| BuffersPerThread | Number of buffers per worker thread. Min=1, Max=128, Default=24 | |
| ServerCacheTimeout | Number of seconds to wait before considering another Server is down. Min=5, Max=60, Default=8 | |
| IoBurstSize | Number of bytes read/writes can send in a burst of packets. Required that IoBurstSize/(MaxTransmissionUnits-76)<=32. Min=4096, Max=61440, Default=32768 | |
| MaxTransmissionUnits | Ethernet maximum transmission unit size for the protocol for use for Server and Device. Required that IoBurstSize/(MaxTransmissionUnits-76)<=32. Min=502, Max=16426, Default=1506 | |
| MaxBootDevicesAllowed | Maximum number of Devices allowed to boot simultaneously. Min=1, Max=1000, Default=500 | |
| MaxBootSeconds | Maximum number of seconds for a Device to boot. Min=10, Max=900, Default=60 | |
| BootPauseSeconds | Number of seconds that a Device will pause during login if its server busy. Min=1, Max=60, Default=10 | |
| AdMaxPasswordAgeEnabled | Age the password, when set to true. Default=false | |
| EventLoggingEnabled | Enable event logging, when set to true. Default=true | |
| NonBlockingIoEnabled | Use non-Blocking IO, when set to true. Default=true | |
| Role | Read-only Role of the user for this item. 100 is Farm Administrator, and 200 is Site Administrator. Default=999 | |
| Ip | One or more streaming IPv4 Addresses. If more than one address is included they are comma delimited. NOTE that an empty string results in no configured IPv4 addresses | |
| Ipv6 | One or more streaming IPv6 Addresses. If more than one address is included they are comma delimited. NOTE that an empty string results in no configured IPv6 addresses | |
| InitialQueryConnectionPoolSize | Initial size of database connection pool for non-transactional queries. Min=1, Max=1000, Default=50 | |
| InitialTransactionConnectionPoolSize | Initial size of database connection pool for transactional queries. Min=1, Max=1000, Default=50 | |
| MaxQueryConnectionPoolSize | Maximum size of database connection pool for non-transactional queries. Min=1, Max=32767, Default=1000 | |
| MaxTransactionConnectionPoolSize | Maximum size of database connection pool for transactional queries. Min=1, Max=32767, Default=1000 | |
| RefreshInterval | Interval, in number of seconds, the server should wait before refreshing settings. If set to 0, unused database connections are never released. Min=0, Max=32767, Default=300 | |
| UnusedDbConnectionTimeout | Interval, in number of seconds, a connection should go unused before it is to be released. Min=0, Max=32767, Default=300 | |
| BusyDbConnectionRetryCount | Number of times a failed database connection will be retried. Min=0, Max=32767, Default=2 | |
| BusyDbConnectionRetryInterval | Interval, in number of milliseconds, the server should wait before retrying to connect to a database. Min=0, Max=10000, Default=25 | |
| LocalConcurrentIoLimit | Maximum concurrent IO transactions it performs for vDisks that are local. A value of 0 disables the feature. Min=0, Max=128, Default=4 | |
| RemoteConcurrentIoLimit | Maximum concurrent IO transactions it performs for vDisks that are remote. A value of 0 disables the feature. Min=0, Max=128, Default=4 | |
| Active | 1 if the Server is currently active, 2 if unknown, and 0 otherwise. Min=0, Max=2, Default=0 | |
| LogLevel | Level to perform logging at. Values are: 0 (None), 1 (Fatal), 2 (Error), 3 (Warning), 4 (Info), 5 (Debug), and 6 (Trace). Min=0, Max=6, Default=4 | |
| LogFileSizeMax | Maximum size log files can reach in Megabytes. Min=1, Max=50, Default=5 | |
| LogFileBackupCopiesMax | Maximum number of log file backups. Min=1, Max=50, Default=4 | |
| PowerRating | A strictly relative rating of this Server’s capabilities when compared to other Servers in the Store(s) it belongs too; can be used to help tune load balancing. Min=0.1, Max=1000, Default=1 | |
| ServerFqdn | Read-only fully qualified domain name. Default=”” Max Length=1024 | |
| ManagementIp | IP address used for management communications between Servers. Default=0.0.0.0 | |
| LastCeipUploadAttempt | Time that this server last attempted a CEIP upload. Default=Empty | |
| LastBugReportAttempt | Time that this server last attempted to upload or generate a bug report bundle. Default=Empty | |
| LastBugReportStatus | Status of the last bug report on this server. Default=”” Max Length=250 | |
| LastBugReportResult | Status of the last bug report on this server. Default=”” Max Length=4000 | |
| LastBugReportSummary | Summary of the last bug report on this server. Default=”” Max Length=250 | |
| CloudSetupActive | True if farm is integrated with Citrix Cloud and this PVS server has been registered with Citrix Cloud. Default=false | |
| ServerEpoch | Timestamp when the registry data for that server has been re-encrypted with updated encryption scheme. Default=0 | |
| ServerRegistrationKeyStatus | Status of the server registration key, 0 if valid, 1 if invalid, 2 if not present and 3 if failed to validate the registration key. Min=0, Max=4, Default=2 | |
| XdSetupActive | True if farm is integrated with Citrix Virtual Apps and Desktops and this PVS server has been registered with the CVAD site. Default=false | |
| IdentityPublicKey | PVS Server’s Identity Public key. This field is used for authentication in Peer-2-Peer communication between Servers. Default=”” Max Length=65535 | |
| XdControllerAddress | The Citrix Virtual Apps and Desktops controller used to register this PVS server with a CVAD site. Default=”” Max Length=1024 | |
| SecurityPolicy | SecurityPolicy Default=0 | |
| QuicSettings | QuicSettings Default=”” Max Length=65535 | |
| QuicPort | QuicPort Default=0 | |
| QuicServerCertThumbPrint | QuicServerCertThumbPrint Default=”” Max Length=65535 | |
| QuicCipherSuites | QuicCipherSuites Default=”” | |
| QuicStreamPayloadLength | QuicStreamPayloadLength Default=0 | |
| TpmKeyType | TPM key type, TPM_ALG_RSA(1), TPM_ALG_ECC(0x23) Default=0 | |
| TpmHashAlg | TPM hash algorithm, TPM_ALG_SHA256(0xb), TPM_ALG_SHA384(0xc), TPM_ALG_SHA512(0xd) Default=0 | |
| TpmCurveId | TPM ECC curve ID TPM_ECC_NIST_P256(3), TPM_ECC_NIST_P384(4), TPM_ECC_NIST_P521(5) Default=0 | |
| TrustCertificate | A PEM-encoded certificate that will be used to establish trust for the server’s certificate for PvsRpc communication. Default=”” Max Length=65535 |
PvsServer[]: If successful, the PvsServer object(s) are returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Get PvsServer for Farm
Get all PvsServer for the Farm.
Get-PvsServer
EXAMPLE 2: Get PvsServer for Site
Get all PvsServer for the Site named theSite.
Get-PvsServer -SiteName theSite
EXAMPLE 3: Get PvsServer for Site and Store
Get all PvsServer for the Site named theSite and Store named theStore.
Get-PvsServer -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore
EXAMPLE 4: Get PvsServer for DiskLocator
Get the PvsServer for the DiskLocator named theDiskLocator in the Site named theSite and Store named theStore.
Get-PvsServer -DiskLocatorName theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore
DiskLocatorId can be used instead of DiskLocatorName so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
EXAMPLE 5: Get PvsServer for Server
Get the PvsServer for the Server named theServer.
Get-PvsServer -Name theServer
EXAMPLE 6: Get PvsServer Not Active and Start
Get all PvsServer that are not Active and then Start them.
Get-PvsServer -Fields Active | Where-Object {\$\_.Active -eq 0} | Start-PvsStreamService
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
Get-PvsServerBiosBootstrap
Oem Only: Get the bootstrap fields for the Server dell_bios.bin BIOS bootstrap file.
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or ServerId | Guid[] | GUID of the Server to Get the dell_bios.bin BIOS bootstrap file from. |
| Name or ServerName | string[] | Name of the Server to Get the dell_bios.bin BIOS bootstrap file from. |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
ServerId
If only selected fields are needed, pass them in the Fields parameter as a string array.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Enabled | Automatically update the BIOS on the target device with these setting when set to true, otherwise do not use these settings. Default=false | |
| DhcpEnabled | Use DHCP to retrieve target device IP when set to true, otherwise use the static domain, dnsIpAddresstrue and dnsIpAddress2 settings. Default=true | |
| Lookup | Use DNS to find the Server when set to true with the ServerName host value, otherwise use the bootservertrue_Ip, bootservertrue_Port, bootserver2_Ip, bootserver2_Port, bootserver3_Ip, bootserver3_Port, bootserver4_Ip, and bootserver4_Port settings. Default=true | |
| VerboseMode | Display verbose diagnostic information when set to true. Default=false | |
| InterruptSafeMode | Interrupt safe mode (use if target device hangs during boot) when set to true. Default=false | |
| PaeMode | PAE mode (use if PAE enabled in boot.ini of target device) when set to true. Default=false | |
| BootFromHdOnFail | For network recovery reboot to hard drive when set to true, restore network connection when set to false. Default=false | |
| RecoveryTime | When bootFromHdOnFail is 1, this is the number of seconds to wait before reboot to hard drive. Min=10, Max=60000, Default=50 | |
| PollingTimeout | Login polling timeout in milliseconds. Min=1000, Max=60000, Default=5000 | |
| GeneralTimeout | Login general timeout in milliseconds. Min=1000, Max=60000, Default=5000 | |
| Name or ServerName | Host to use for DNS lookup. Only used when Lookup is true. Default=IMAGESERVER1 | |
| Bootserver1_Ip | 1st boot server IP. Only used when Lookup is false. | |
| Bootserver1_Port | 1st boot server port. Only used when Lookup is false. Min=1025, Max=65536, Default=6910 | |
| Bootserver2_Ip | 2nd boot server IP. Only used when Lookup is false. Default=0.0.0.0 | |
| Bootserver2_Port | 2nd boot server port. Only used when Lookup is false. Min=1025, Max=65536, Default=6910 | |
| Bootserver3_Ip | 3rd boot server IP. Only used when Lookup is false. Default=0.0.0.0 | |
| Bootserver3_Port | 3rd boot server port. Only used when Lookup is false. Min=1025, Max=65536, Default=6910 | |
| Bootserver4_Ip | 4th boot server IP. Only used when Lookup is false. Default=0.0.0.0 | |
| Bootserver4_Port | 4th boot server port. Only used when Lookup is false. Min=1025, Max=65536, Default=6910 | |
| Domain | Domain of the primary and secondary DNS servers. Only used when DhcpEnabled is false. | |
| DnsIpAddress1 | Primary DNS server IP. Only used when DhcpEnabled is false. | |
| DnsIpAddress2 | Secondary DNS server IP. Only used when DhcpEnabled is false. |
PvsServerBiosBootstrap[]: If successful, the PvsServerBiosBootstrap object(s) are returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Get PvsServerBiosBootstrap for Server
Get all PvsServerBiosBootstrap for the Server named theServer.
Get-PvsServerBiosBootstrap -Name theServer
Get-PvsServerBootstrap
Get the bootstrap fields for the Server and named bootstrap file specified.
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or ServerId | Guid[] | GUID of the Server to Get the named bootstrap file from. |
| ServerName | string[] | Name of the Server to Get the named bootstrap file from. |
This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name | string[] |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
(ServerId and Name) or ServerId
If only selected fields are needed, pass them in the Fields parameter as a string array.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Bootserver1_Ip | 1st boot server IP. | |
| Bootserver1_Netmask | 1st boot server netmask. Default=0.0.0.0 | |
| Bootserver1_Gateway | 1st boot server gateway. Default=0.0.0.0 | |
| Bootserver1_Port | 1st boot server port. Min=1025, Max=65536, Default=6910 | |
| Bootserver2_Ip | 2nd boot server IP. Default=0.0.0.0 | |
| Bootserver2_Netmask | 2nd boot server netmask. Default=0.0.0.0 | |
| Bootserver2_Gateway | 2nd boot server gateway. Default=0.0.0.0 | |
| Bootserver2_Port | 2nd boot server port. Min=1025, Max=65536, Default=6910 | |
| Bootserver3_Ip | 3rd boot server IP. Default=0.0.0.0 | |
| Bootserver3_Netmask | 3rd boot server netmask. Default=0.0.0.0 | |
| Bootserver3_Gateway | 3rd boot server gateway. Default=0.0.0.0 | |
| Bootserver3_Port | 3rd boot server port. Min=1025, Max=65536, Default=6910 | |
| Bootserver4_Ip | 4th boot server IP. Default=0.0.0.0 | |
| Bootserver4_Netmask | 4th boot server netmask. Default=0.0.0.0 | |
| Bootserver4_Gateway | 4th boot server gateway. Default=0.0.0.0 | |
| Bootserver4_Port | 4th boot server port. Min=1025, Max=65536, Default=6910 | |
| VerboseMode | Display verbose diagnostic information when set to true. Default=false | |
| InterruptSafeMode | Interrupt safe mode (use if target device hangs during boot) when set to true. Default=false | |
| PaeMode | PAE mode (use if PAE enabled in boot.ini of target device) when set to true. Default=false | |
| BootFromHdOnFail | For network recovery reboot to hard drive when set to true, restore network connection when set to false. Default=false | |
| RecoveryTime | When bootFromHdOnFail is 1, this is the number of seconds to wait before reboot to hard drive. Min=10, Max=60000, Default=50 | |
| PollingTimeout | Login polling timeout in milliseconds. Min=1000, Max=60000, Default=5000 | |
| GeneralTimeout | Login general timeout in milliseconds. Min=1000, Max=60000, Default=5000 |
PvsServerBootstrap[]: If successful, the PvsServerBootstrap object(s) are returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Get PvsServerBootstrap
Get the PvsServerBootstrap for the Bootstrap named theBootstrap on the Server named theServer.
Get-PvsServerBootstrap -ServerName theServer -Name theBootstrap
Get-PvsServerBootstrapName
Get the bootstrap names for a Server.
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or ServerId | Guid[] | GUID of the Server to Get bootstrap names for. |
| Name or ServerName | string[] | Name of the Server to Get bootstrap names for. |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
ServerId
| Name | Type | Description | | :— | :— | :———- |
PvsServerBootstrapName[]: If successful, the PvsServerBootstrapName object(s) are returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Get PvsServerBootstrapName for Server
Get all PvsServerBootstrapName for the Server named theServer.
Get-PvsServerBootstrapName -Name theServer
Get-PvsServerCount
Get count of Servers in a Site.
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or SiteId | Guid | GUID of the Site to get the Server Count of. |
| Name or SiteName | string | Name of the Site to get the Server Count of. |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
SiteId
UInt32: If successful, the numeric value is returned
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Get-PvsServerCount Returns the Number (or Count) of PvsServer in PvsSite
Get-PvsServerCount -Name theSite
Get-PvsServerInfo
Get the fields and status for a Server, all Servers in a Site that use a Store, service a DiskLocator, or for the whole Farm. All Servers are returned if no parameters are passed.
These are optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or ServerId | Guid[] | GUID of the Server to Get. |
| Name or ServerName | string[] | Name of the Server to Get. |
| SiteId | Guid[] | GUID of the Site to Get all Servers. |
| SiteName | string[] | Name of the Site to Get all Servers. |
| DiskLocatorId | Guid[] | GUID of the Disk Locator to Get all Servers. |
or this is optional & resolution
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| DiskLocatorName | string[] |
These are optional & resolutions
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| StoreId | Guid[] | |
| StoreName | string[] |
Optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| All | SwitchParameter |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid[] | GUID of the Site to Get all Servers. |
| SiteName | string[] | Name of the Site to Get all Servers. |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| StoreId | Guid[] | |
| StoreName | string[] |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
ServerId, SiteId, DiskLocatorId or StoreId
If only selected fields are needed, pass them in the Fields parameter as a string array.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or ServerId | Read-only GUID that uniquely identifies this Server. | |
| Name or ServerName | Computer name with no spaces. ASCII computer name characters Max Length=21 | |
| SiteId | GUID of the Site this Server is to be a member of. It is not used with SiteName. | |
| SiteName | Name of the Site this Server is to be a member of. It is not used with SiteId. | |
| Description | User description. Default=”” Max Length=250 | |
| AdMaxPasswordAge | Number of days before a password expires. Min=1, Max=30, Default=7 | |
| LicenseTimeout | Amount of seconds before a license times out. Min=15, Max=300, Default=30 | |
| VDiskCreatePacing | VDisk create time pacing in milliseconds. Min=0, Max=5, Default=0 | |
| FirstPort | Number of the first UDP port for use by the Stream Service, First and Last must allow at least 5 ports. Min=1025, Max=65534, Default=6910 | |
| LastPort | Number of the last UDP port for use by the Stream Service, First and Last must allow at least 5 ports. Min=1025, Max=65534, Default=6930 | |
| ThreadsPerPort | Number of worker threads per IO port. Required that (threadPerPort * numberPorts * numberIPs) <= 1000. Min=1, Max=60, Default=8 | |
| BuffersPerThread | Number of buffers per worker thread. Min=1, Max=128, Default=24 | |
| ServerCacheTimeout | Number of seconds to wait before considering another Server is down. Min=5, Max=60, Default=8 | |
| IoBurstSize | Number of bytes read/writes can send in a burst of packets. Required that IoBurstSize/(MaxTransmissionUnits-76)<=32. Min=4096, Max=61440, Default=32768 | |
| MaxTransmissionUnits | Ethernet maximum transmission unit size for the protocol for use for Server and Device. Required that IoBurstSize/(MaxTransmissionUnits-76)<=32. Min=502, Max=16426, Default=1506 | |
| MaxBootDevicesAllowed | Maximum number of Devices allowed to boot simultaneously. Min=1, Max=1000, Default=500 | |
| MaxBootSeconds | Maximum number of seconds for a Device to boot. Min=10, Max=900, Default=60 | |
| BootPauseSeconds | Number of seconds that a Device will pause during login if its server busy. Min=1, Max=60, Default=10 | |
| AdMaxPasswordAgeEnabled | Age the password, when set to true. Default=false | |
| EventLoggingEnabled | Enable event logging, when set to true. Default=true | |
| NonBlockingIoEnabled | Use non-Blocking IO, when set to true. Default=true | |
| Role | Read-only Role of the user for this item. 100 is Farm Administrator, and 200 is Site Administrator. Default=999 | |
| Ip | One or more streaming IPv4 Addresses. If more than one address is included they are comma delimited. NOTE that an empty string results in no configured IPv4 addresses | |
| Ipv6 | One or more streaming IPv6 Addresses. If more than one address is included they are comma delimited. NOTE that an empty string results in no configured IPv6 addresses | |
| InitialQueryConnectionPoolSize | Initial size of database connection pool for non-transactional queries. Min=1, Max=1000, Default=50 | |
| InitialTransactionConnectionPoolSize | Initial size of database connection pool for transactional queries. Min=1, Max=1000, Default=50 | |
| MaxQueryConnectionPoolSize | Maximum size of database connection pool for non-transactional queries. Min=1, Max=32767, Default=1000 | |
| MaxTransactionConnectionPoolSize | Maximum size of database connection pool for transactional queries. Min=1, Max=32767, Default=1000 | |
| RefreshInterval | Interval, in number of seconds, the server should wait before refreshing settings. If set to 0, unused database connections are never released. Min=0, Max=32767, Default=300 | |
| UnusedDbConnectionTimeout | Interval, in number of seconds, a connection should go unused before it is to be released. Min=0, Max=32767, Default=300 | |
| BusyDbConnectionRetryCount | Number of times a failed database connection will be retried. Min=0, Max=32767, Default=2 | |
| BusyDbConnectionRetryInterval | Interval, in number of milliseconds, the server should wait before retrying to connect to a database. Min=0, Max=10000, Default=25 | |
| LocalConcurrentIoLimit | Maximum concurrent IO transactions it performs for vDisks that are local. A value of 0 disables the feature. Min=0, Max=128, Default=4 | |
| RemoteConcurrentIoLimit | Maximum concurrent IO transactions it performs for vDisks that are remote. A value of 0 disables the feature. Min=0, Max=128, Default=4 | |
| Active | 1 if the Server is currently active, 2 if unknown, and 0 otherwise. Min=0, Max=2, Default=0 | |
| LogLevel | Level to perform logging at. Values are: 0 (None), 1 (Fatal), 2 (Error), 3 (Warning), 4 (Info), 5 (Debug), and 6 (Trace). Min=0, Max=6, Default=4 | |
| LogFileSizeMax | Maximum size log files can reach in Megabytes. Min=1, Max=50, Default=5 | |
| LogFileBackupCopiesMax | Maximum number of log file backups. Min=1, Max=50, Default=4 | |
| PowerRating | A strictly relative rating of this Server’s capabilities when compared to other Servers in the Store(s) it belongs too; can be used to help tune load balancing. Min=0.1, Max=1000, Default=1 | |
| ServerFqdn | Read-only fully qualified domain name. Default=”” Max Length=1024 | |
| ManagementIp | IP address used for management communications between Servers. Default=0.0.0.0 | |
| LastCeipUploadAttempt | Time that this server last attempted a CEIP upload. Default=Empty | |
| LastBugReportAttempt | Time that this server last attempted to upload or generate a bug report bundle. Default=Empty | |
| LastBugReportStatus | Status of the last bug report on this server. Default=”” Max Length=250 | |
| LastBugReportResult | Status of the last bug report on this server. Default=”” Max Length=4000 | |
| LastBugReportSummary | Summary of the last bug report on this server. Default=”” Max Length=250 | |
| CloudSetupActive | True if farm is integrated with Citrix Cloud and this PVS server has been registered with Citrix Cloud. Default=false | |
| ServerEpoch | Timestamp when the registry data for that server has been re-encrypted with updated encryption scheme. Default=0 | |
| ServerRegistrationKeyStatus | Status of the server registration key, 0 if valid, 1 if invalid, 2 if not present and 3 if failed to validate the registration key. Min=0, Max=4, Default=2 | |
| XdSetupActive | True if farm is integrated with Citrix Virtual Apps and Desktops and this PVS server has been registered with the CVAD site. Default=false | |
| IdentityPublicKey | PVS Server’s Identity Public key. This field is used for authentication in Peer-2-Peer communication between Servers. Default=”” Max Length=65535 | |
| XdControllerAddress | The Citrix Virtual Apps and Desktops controller used to register this PVS server with a CVAD site. Default=”” Max Length=1024 | |
| SecurityPolicy | SecurityPolicy Default=0 | |
| QuicSettings | QuicSettings Default=”” Max Length=65535 | |
| QuicPort | QuicPort Default=0 | |
| QuicServerCertThumbPrint | QuicServerCertThumbPrint Default=”” Max Length=65535 | |
| QuicCipherSuites | QuicCipherSuites Default=”” | |
| QuicStreamPayloadLength | QuicStreamPayloadLength Default=0 | |
| TpmKeyType | TPM key type, TPM_ALG_RSA(1), TPM_ALG_ECC(0x23) Default=0 | |
| TpmHashAlg | TPM hash algorithm, TPM_ALG_SHA256(0xb), TPM_ALG_SHA384(0xc), TPM_ALG_SHA512(0xd) Default=0 | |
| TpmCurveId | TPM ECC curve ID TPM_ECC_NIST_P256(3), TPM_ECC_NIST_P384(4), TPM_ECC_NIST_P521(5) Default=0 | |
| TrustCertificate | A PEM-encoded certificate that will be used to establish trust for the server’s certificate for PvsRpc communication. Default=”” Max Length=65535 | |
| ContactIp | Read-only contact IPv4 Address for the Server. | |
| ContactIpv6 | Read-only contact IPv6 Address for the Server. | |
| ContactPort | Read-only contact port for the Server. | |
| DeviceCount | Read-only count of Devices. Default=0 |
PvsServerInfo[]: If successful, the PvsServerInfo object(s) are returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Get PvsServerInfo for Farm
Get all PvsServerInfo for the Farm.
Get-PvsServerInfo
EXAMPLE 2: Get PvsServerInfo for Site
Get all PvsServerInfo for the Site named theSite.
Get-PvsServerInfo -SiteName theSite
EXAMPLE 3: Get PvsServerInfo for Site and Store
Get all PvsServerInfo for the Site named theSite and Store named theStore.
Get-PvsServerInfo -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore
EXAMPLE 4: Get PvsServerInfo for DiskLocator
Get the PvsServerInfo for the DiskLocator named theDiskLocator in the Site named theSite and Store named theStore.
Get-PvsServerInfo -DiskLocatorName theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore
DiskLocatorId can be used instead of DiskLocatorName so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
EXAMPLE 5: Get PvsServerInfo for Server
Get the PvsServerInfo for the Server named theServer.
Get-PvsServerInfo -Name theServer
EXAMPLE 6: Get PvsServerInfo Not Active and Start
Get all PvsServerInfo that are not Active and then Start them.
Get-PvsServerInfo -Fields Active | Where-Object {\$\_.Active -eq 0} | Start-PvsStreamService
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
Get-PvsServerName
Return the name of the Server the SoapServer is running on.
String: If successful, the String value is returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Get-PvsServerName
Get-PvsServerName
Get-PvsServerStatus
Get the Server Status fields for a Server.
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or ServerId | Guid[] | GUID of the Server to Get status for. |
| Name or ServerName | string[] | Name of Server to Get status for. |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
ServerId
If only selected fields are needed, pass them in the Fields parameter as a string array.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or ServerId | Read-only GUID of the Server. Can be used with Get Server. | |
| Name or ServerName | Read-only Name of the Server. Can be used with Get Server. | |
| Ip | Read-only contact IPv4 Address for the Server. | |
| Port | Read-only contact port for the Server. | |
| DeviceCount | Read-only count of Devices. Default=0 | |
| Status | Status of the server, 0 if down, 1 if up and 2 if unknown. Default=0 | |
| Ipv6 | Read-only contact IPv6 Address for the Server. Default=0 |
PvsServerStatus[]: If successful, the PvsServerStatus object(s) are returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Get PvsServerStatus for Server
Get the PvsServerStatus for the Server named theServer.
Get-PvsServerStatus -Name theServer
Get-PvsServerStore
Get the directory and cache paths of a Server for one or all Stores.
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| ServerId | Guid[] | GUID of a Server. |
| ServerName | string[] | Name of a Server. |
These are optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| StoreId | Guid[] | |
| StoreName | string[] |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
(ServerId and StoreId), ServerId or StoreId
If only selected fields are needed, pass them in the Fields parameter as a string array.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| StoreId | GUID of the Store. StoreName can be used instead. | |
| StoreName | Name of the Store. StoreId can be used instead. | |
| ServerId | GUID of the server that uses the Store. ServerName can be used instead. | |
| ServerName | Name of the server that uses the Store. ServerId can be used instead. | |
| Path | Directory path that the Server uses to access the Store. Default=”” Max Length=255 | |
| CachePath | Cache path(s) that the Server uses with the Store. If none are specified the caches will be placed in the Store cachePath. Default=None |
PvsServerStore[]: If successful, the PvsServerStore object(s) are returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Get PvsServerStore for Server
Get all PvsServerStore for the Server named theServer.
Get-PvsServerStore -ServerName theServer
EXAMPLE 2: Get PvsServerStore for Server and Store
Get the PvsServerStore for the Server named theServer and Store named theStore.
Get-PvsServerStore -ServerName theServer -StoreName theStore
Get-PvsServerStoreActiveDeviceCount
Get the count of Devices currently connected to any vdisk served from the Store by the Server.
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| ServerId | Guid | GUID of the Server. |
| ServerName | string | Name of the Server. |
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| StoreId | Guid | |
| StoreName | string |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
ServerId or StoreId
UInt32: If successful, the numeric value is returned
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Get-PvsServerStoreActiveDeviceCount Returns the Number (or Count) of PvsDevice Served from PvsStore by PvsServer
Get-PvsServerStoreActiveDeviceCount -ServerName theServer -StoreName theStore
Get-PvsSite
Get the fields for a Site or all Sites. All Sites are returned if no parameters are passed.
These are optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or SiteId | Guid[] | GUID of the Site to Get. |
| Name or SiteName | string[] | Name of the Site to Get. |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
SiteId
If only selected fields are needed, pass them in the Fields parameter as a string array.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or SiteId | Read-only GUID that uniquely identifies this Site. | |
| Name or SiteName | Name of the Site. Max Length=50 | |
| Description | User description. Default=”” Max Length=250 | |
| DefaultCollectionId | GUID of the Collection to place new Devices into automatically. Not used with defaultCollectionName. Default=00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 | |
| DefaultCollectionName | Name of the Collection to place new Devices into automatically. Not used with DefaultCollectionId. Default=”” | |
| InventoryFilePollingInterval | The number of seconds between polls for Disk changes in the Stores. Min=1, Max=600, Default=60 | |
| EnableDiskUpdate | True when Disk Updated is enabled for the Site, false otherwise. Default=false | |
| DiskUpdateServerId | GUID of the Disk Update Server for the Site. Not used with DiskUpdateServerName. Default=00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 | |
| DiskUpdateServerName | Name of the Disk Update Server for the Site. Not used with DiskUpdateServerId. Default=”” | |
| MakUser | User name used for MAK activation. Default=”” Max Length=64 | |
| MakPassword | User password used for MAK activation. Default=”” Max Length=64 | |
| Role | Read-only Role of the user for this item. 100 is Farm Administrator, 200 is Site Administrator, and 999 is read-only. Default=999 | |
| ResourceLocationId | The Citrix Cloud resource location ID if the farm SetupType is cloud mode. Default=”” Max Length=64 | |
| ResourceLocationName | The Citrix Cloud resource location name if the farm SetupType is cloud mode. Default=”” Max Length=128 | |
| EncryptionEpoch | Timestamp of the encryption Key used to encrypt fields Default=0 |
PvsSite[]: If successful, the PvsSite object(s) are returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Get PvsSite for Farm
Get all PvsSite for the Farm.
Get-PvsSite
EXAMPLE 2: Get PvsSite
Get the PvsSite for the Site named theSite.
Get-PvsSite -Name theSite
Get-PvsSiteView
Get the fields for a Site View or all Site Views in a Site or the whole Farm. All Site Views are returned if no parameters are passed.
These are optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or SiteViewId | Guid[] | GUID of the Site View to Get. |
| SiteId | Guid[] | GUID of the Site to Get all Views for. |
| SiteName | string[] | Name of the Site to Get all Views for. |
or this is optional & resolution
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or SiteViewName | string[] |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid[] | GUID of the Site to Get all Views for. |
| SiteName | string[] | Name of the Site to Get all Views for. |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
SiteViewId or SiteId
If only selected fields are needed, pass them in the Fields parameter as a string array.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or SiteViewId | Read-only GUID that uniquely identifies this Site View. | |
| Name or SiteViewName | Name of the Site View. Max Length=50 | |
| SiteId | GUID of the Site this View is to be a member of. It is not used with SiteName. | |
| SiteName | Name of the Site this View is to be a member of. It is not used with SiteId. | |
| Description | User description. Default=”” Max Length=250 | |
| DeviceCount | Read-only count of Devices in this Site View. Default=0 | |
| DeviceWithPVDCount | Read-only count of Devices with Personal vDisk in this Site View. Default=0 | |
| ActiveDeviceCount | Read-only count of active Devices in this Site View. Default=0 | |
| MakActivateNeededCount | Read-only count of active Devices that need MAK activation in this Site View. Default=0 | |
| Role | Read-only Role of the user for this item. 100 is Farm Administrator, and 200 is Site Administrator. Default=999 |
PvsSiteView[]: If successful, the PvsSiteView object(s) are returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Get PvsSiteView for Farm
Get all PvsSiteView for the Farm.
Get-PvsSiteView
EXAMPLE 2: Get PvsSiteView for Site
Get all PvsSiteView for the Site named theSite.
Get-PvsSiteView -SiteName theSite
EXAMPLE 3: Get PvsSiteView
Get the PvsSiteView for the SiteView named theSiteView in the Site named theSite.
Get-PvsSiteView -Name theSiteView -SiteName theSite
Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
Get-PvsStore
Get the fields for a Store or all Stores for a Server, Site or the Farm. All Stores are returned if no parameters are passed.
These are optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or StoreId | Guid[] | GUID of the Store to Get. |
| Name or StoreName | string[] | Name of the Store to Get. |
| ServerId | Guid[] | GUID of the Server to Get all Stores for. |
| ServerName | string[] | Name of the Server to Get all Stores for. |
| SiteId | Guid[] | GUID of the Site to Get all Stores for. |
| SiteName | string[] | Name of the Site to Get all Stores for. |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
StoreId, ServerId or SiteId
If only selected fields are needed, pass them in the Fields parameter as a string array.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or StoreId | Read-only GUID that uniquely identifies this Store. | |
| Name or StoreName | Name of the Store. Max Length=50 | |
| SiteId | GUID of the Site where Administrators of that Site can change this Store. Not used for Farm Stores. SiteName can be used instead. Default=00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 | |
| SiteName | Name of the Site where Administrators of that Site can change this Store. Not used for Farm Stores. SiteId can be used instead. Default=”” | |
| Description | User description. Default=”” Max Length=250 | |
| Path | Default directory path that the Servers use to access this Store. Max Length=255 | |
| CachePath | Default Cache path(s) that the Servers use with this Store. If none are specified the caches will be placed in the WriteCache subdirectory of the Store path. Default=None | |
| Role | Read-only Role of the user for this item. 100 is Farm Administrator, 200 is Site Administrator, and 999 is read-only. Default=999 | |
| PathType | Read-only field indicating if the vdisks are on a server’s local hard disk or on a remote share. |
PvsStore[]: If successful, the PvsStore object(s) are returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Get PvsStore for Farm
Get all PvsStore for the Farm.
Get-PvsStore
EXAMPLE 2: Get PvsStore for Site
Get all PvsStore for the Site named theSite.
Get-PvsStore -SiteName theSite
EXAMPLE 3: Get PvsStore for Server
Get all PvsStore for the Server named theServer.
Get-PvsStore -ServerName theServer
EXAMPLE 4: Get PvsStore
Get the PvsStore for the Store named theStore.
Get-PvsStore -Name theStore -SiteName theSite
Get-PvsStoreFreeSpace
Get the free megabytes available in the Store.
One of these is required & resolutions
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or StoreId | Guid | GUID of the Store. |
| Name or StoreName | string | Name of the Store. |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| ServerId | Guid | |
| ServerName | string | |
| SiteId | Guid | |
| SiteName | string |
UInt32: If successful, the numeric value is returned
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Get-PvsStoreFreeSpace for Name with ServerName
Get-PvsStoreFreeSpace -Name theStore -ServerName theServer
EXAMPLE 2: Get-PvsStoreFreeSpace for Name with SiteName
Get-PvsStoreFreeSpace -Name theStore -SiteName theSite
Get-PvsStoreSharedOrServerPath
Get the Stores and paths for the ServerName specified or Stores with only shared UNC paths.
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid[] | GUID of a Site used for authorization check. |
| SiteName | string[] | Name of a Site used for authorization check. |
Optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| ServerName | string[] |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
SiteId
If only selected fields are needed, pass them in the Fields parameter as a string array.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| StoreId | GUID of the Store. | |
| StoreName | Name of the Store. | |
| Path | Directory path that the Servers use to access this Store. |
PvsStoreSharedOrServerPath[]: If successful, the PvsStoreSharedOrServerPath object(s) are returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Get PvsStoreSharedOrServerPath with Sharded UNC Paths
Get PvsStoreSharedOrServerPath with shared UNC paths for the Farm.
Get-PvsStoreSharedOrServerPath -SiteName theSite
EXAMPLE 2: Get PvsStoreSharedOrServerPath with Sharded UNC Paths and Server Local Paths
Get PvsStoreSharedOrServerPath with shared UNC paths for the Farm with local paths for the Server named theServer.
Get-PvsStoreSharedOrServerPath -SiteName theSite -StoreName theServer
Get-PvsTask
Get the current Task fields for select, or all active and completed un-cleared tasks.
These are optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| TaskId | uint | ID of the Task to get. |
| SiteId | Guid[] | GUID of the Site to get Tasks for. |
| SiteName | string[] | Name of the Site to get Tasks for. |
Optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| State | uint |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
TaskId or SiteId
If only selected fields are needed, pass them in the Fields parameter as a string array.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| TaskId | Unique ID of the task. | |
| SiteId | GUID of the Site that this Task is being processed in. Default=00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 | |
| SiteName | Name of the Site that that this Task is being processed in. | |
| Handle | Handle to a running function. | |
| ServerFqdn | Qualified name of the server. Default=”” Max Length=1024 | |
| Ip | IPv4 Address of the remote host. | |
| Ipv6 | IPv6 Address of the remote host. Default=0 | |
| Port | Port number of the remote service. | |
| StartTime | Time the task was started. Has the date and time without milliseconds. | |
| ExpirationTime | Time the task record may be removed from the database if the task does not complete. Has the date and time without milliseconds. | |
| State | State of the Task. Values are: 0 (Processing), 1 (Cancelled), and 2 (Complete). Min=0, Max=2 | |
| CommandType | Type of the command. Values are: Add, Delete, Get, Info, Run, RunWithReturn, Set and SetList. Default=”” Max Length=13 | |
| Command | Command being processed. Default=”” Max Length=50 | |
| MapiException | Exception result in XML format. Default=”” | |
| Results | Result in XML format. Default=”” |
PvsTask[]: If successful, the PvsTask object(s) are returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Get PvsTask for Farm
Get all PvsTask for the Farm.
Get-PvsTask
EXAMPLE 2: Get PvsTask for Site
Get all PvsTask for the Site named theSite.
Get-PvsTask -SiteName theSite
EXAMPLE 3: Get PvsTask Currently Processing
Get PvsTask that are currently in Processing state for the Farm.
Get-PvsTask -State 0
EXAMPLE 4: Get PvsTask
Get PvsTask for TaskId 101.
Get-PvsTask -TaskId 101
Get-PvsTaskStatus
Get the status of a Task in percent complete.
This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| TaskId | uint | Id of the Task to get the Status of. |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
TaskId
UInt32: If successful, the numeric value is returned
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Get-PvsTaskStatus for Start-PvsBoot to PvsTask
$thePvsTask = Start-PvsBoot -Name theDevice # start the task
while ($thePvsTask.State -eq 0) # while the task is processing
{
%percentFinished = Get-PvsTaskStatus -Object $thePvsTask # get percent finished
%percentFinished.ToString() + "% finished" # display percent finished
Start-Sleep -seconds 10 # wait 10 seconds more
$thePvsTask = Get-PvsTask -Object $thePvsTask # get the current PvsTask object
}
if ($thePvsTask.State -eq 2) # check to see if completed
{
"Successful"
}
else
{
"Cancelled"
}
EXAMPLE 2: Get-PvsTaskStatus for taskId
Get-PvsTaskStatus -taskId 101
Get-PvsUndefinedDisk
Get undefined Disks for the Store on the Server specified.
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| ServerId | Guid[] | GUID of the Server to look for undefined Disks. |
| ServerName | string[] | Name of the Server to look for undefined Disks. |
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| StoreId | Guid[] | |
| StoreName | string[] |
Optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| AutoAddEnabled | SwitchParameter |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
ServerId or StoreId
If only selected fields are needed, pass them in the Fields parameter as a string array.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name | Name of the disk file without the extension. | |
| Status | Status of the disk file. Values are: 0 (Valid), 1 (Missing Properties File), 2 (Access Denied), 3 (Access Denied and Missing Properties File), 4 (Invalid Disk File), 5 (Manifest Missing or Invalid), 6 (Both VHD and VHDX) | |
| VHDX | If VHDX is true, the format of the image is VHDX. Otherwise it is VHD. Default=false |
PvsUndefinedDisk[]: If successful, the PvsUndefinedDisk object(s) are returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Get PvsUndefinedDisk
Get all PvsUndefinedDisk in the Store named theStore using the Server named theServer.
Get-PvsUndefinedDisk -ServerName theServer -StoreName theStore
EXAMPLE 2: Get PvsUndefinedDisk with AutoAdd
Get all PvsUndefinedDisk and Auto Adds them in the Store named theStore using the Server named theServer.
Get-PvsUndefinedDisk -ServerName theServer -StoreName theStore -AutoAddEnabled
Get-PvsUpdateTask
Get the fields for an Update Task or all Update Tasks in a Site or the whole Farm. All Update Tasks are returned if no parameters are passed.
These are optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or UpdateTaskId | Guid[] | GUID of the Update Task to Get. |
| SiteId | Guid[] | GUID of the Site to Get all Update Tasks for. |
| SiteName | string[] | Name of the Site to Get all Update Tasks for. |
or this is optional & resolution
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or UpdateTaskName | string[] |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid[] | GUID of the Site to Get all Update Tasks for. |
| SiteName | string[] | Name of the Site to Get all Update Tasks for. |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
UpdateTaskId or SiteId
If only selected fields are needed, pass them in the Fields parameter as a string array.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or UpdateTaskId | Read-only GUID that uniquely identifies this Update Task. | |
| Name or UpdateTaskName | Name of the Update Task. It is unique within the Site. Max Length=50 | |
| SiteId | GUID of the Site that this Update Task is a member of. It is not used with SiteName. | |
| SiteName | Name of the Site that this Update Task is a member of. It is not used with SiteId. | |
| Description | User description. Default=”” Max Length=250 | |
| Enabled | True when it will be processed, false otherwise. Default=true | |
| Hour | The hour of the day to perform the task. Min=0, Max=23, Default=0 | |
| Minute | The minute of the hour to perform the task. Min=0, Max=59, Default=0 | |
| Recurrence | The update will reoccur on this schedule. 0 = None, 1 = Daily, 2 = Every Weekday, 3 = Weekly, 4 = Monthly Date, 5 = Monthly Type. Min=0, Max=5, Default=0 | |
| DayMask | Days selected values. 1 = Monday, 2 = Tuesday, 4 = Wednesday, 8 = Thursday, 16 = Friday, 32 = Saturday, 64 = Sunday, 128 = Day. Default=0. This is used with Weekly and Monthly Type recurrence. Min=1, Max=255, Default=4 | |
| Date | Days of the month. Numbers from 1-31 are the only valid values. This is used with Monthly Date recurrence. Default=”” Max Length=83 | |
| MonthlyOffset | When to happen monthly. 0 = None, 1 = First, 2 = Second, 3 = Third, 4 = Forth, 5 = Last. This is used with Monthly Type recurrence. Min=0, Max=5, Default=3 | |
| EsdType | Esd to use. Valid values are SCCM or WSUS. If no value, a custom script is run on the client. Default=”” Max Length=50 | |
| PreUpdateScript | Script file to run before the update starts. Default=”” Max Length=255 | |
| PreVmScript | Script file to run before the VM is loaded. Default=”” Max Length=255 | |
| PostUpdateScript | Script file to run after the update finishes. Default=”” Max Length=255 | |
| PostVmScript | Script file to run after the VM is unloaded. Default=”” Max Length=255 | |
| Domain | Domain to add the Disk Update Device(s) to. If not included, the first Domain Controller found on the Server is used. Default=”” Max Length=255 | |
| OrganizationUnit | Organizational Unit to add the Disk Update Device(s) to. This parameter is optional. If it is not specified, the device is added to the built in Computers container. Child OU’s should be delimited with forward slashes, e.g. “ParentOU/ChildOU”. Special characters in an OU name, such as ‘”’, ‘#’, ‘+’, ‘,’, ‘;’, ‘>’, ‘=’, must be escaped with a backslash. For example, an OU called “commaIn,TheMiddle” must be specified as “commaIn\,TheMiddle”. The old syntax of delimiting child OU’s with a comma is still supported, but deprecated. Note that in this case, the child OU comes first, e.g. “ChildOU,ParentOU”. Default=”” Max Length=255 | |
| PostUpdateApprove | Access to place the version in after the update has occurred. 0 = Production, 1 = Test, 2 = Maintenance. Min=0, Max=2, Default=0 |
PvsUpdateTask[]: If successful, the PvsUpdateTask object(s) are returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Get PvsUpdateTask for Farm
Get all PvsUpdateTask for the Farm.
Get-PvsUpdateTask
EXAMPLE 2: Get PvsUpdateTask for Site
Get all PvsUpdateTask for the Site named theSite.
Get-PvsUpdateTask -SiteName theSite
EXAMPLE 3: Get PvsUpdateTask
Get PvsUpdateTask for UpdateTask named theUpdateTask in Site named theSite.
Get-PvsUpdateTask -Name theUpdateTask -SiteName theSite
Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
Get-PvsUploadCeip
Perform a one time upload of CEIP data. Return upload Id if successful.
This is optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| OneTimeUpload | string | If -OneTimeUpload is specified, perform a one time upload. |
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter. String: If successful, the String value is returned.
Get-PvsVersion
Get the version information.
If only selected fields are needed, pass them in the Fields parameter as a string array.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| MapiVersion | Version of the system in major.minor.point.build format. | |
| DbVersion | Version of the database schema as a number. Default=0 | |
| Type | Type of system. Values are 0 (Normal), 1 (OROM), and 2 (Secure). Default=0 | |
| DbEdition | Edition of the database. If ‘Express Edition’, monitor dbSize. | |
| DbSize | Size of the database in MB. Monitor this value if the edition is ‘Express Edition’ and this value is close to reaching the 4000 MB maximum. Default=0 | |
| MapiVersionNumber | Internal version number of the system. It is a number that is increaed by 100 for each major and minor release. Point releases are the numbers between each 100. Value is 0 when the system does not support MapiVersionNumber. Default=0 |
PvsVersion[]: If successful, the PvsVersion object(s) are returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Get PvsVersion
Get the PvsVersion for the PVS SoapServer connected to.
Get-PvsVersion
EXAMPLE 2: Get the PvsVersion MapiVersion
Get the PvsVersion for the PVS SoapServer connected to.
Get-PvsVersion -Fields MapiVersion
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
Get-PvsVirtualHostingPool
Get the fields for a Virtual Hosting Pool or all Virtual Hosting Pools in a Site or the whole Farm. All Virtual Hosting Pools are returned if no parameters are passed.
These are optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or VirtualHostingPoolId | Guid[] | GUID of the Virtual Hosting Pool to Get. |
| SiteId | Guid[] | GUID of the Site to Get all Virtual Hosting Pools for. |
| SiteName | string[] | Name of the Site to Get all Virtual Hosting Pools for. |
or this is optional & resolution
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or VirtualHostingPoolName | string[] |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid[] | GUID of the Site to Get all Virtual Hosting Pools for. |
| SiteName | string[] | Name of the Site to Get all Virtual Hosting Pools for. |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
VirtualHostingPoolId or SiteId
If only selected fields are needed, pass them in the Fields parameter as a string array.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or VirtualHostingPoolId | Read-only GUID that uniquely identifies this Virtual Hosting Pool. | |
| Name or VirtualHostingPoolName | Name of the Virtual Hosting Pool. It is unique within the Site. Max Length=50 | |
| SiteId | GUID of the Site that this Virtual Hosting Pool is a member of. It is not used with SiteName. | |
| SiteName | Name of the Site that this Virtual Hosting Pool is a member of. It is not used with SiteId. | |
| Type | Type of the Virtual Hosting Pool. 0 = Citrix XenServer, 1 = Microsoft SCVMM/Hyper-V, 2 = VMWare vSphere/ESX, 3 = Nutanix, 4 = Azure, 5 = GCP. Min=0, Max=255, Default=0 | |
| Description | User description. Default=”” Max Length=250 | |
| Server | Name or IP of the Host Server. Max Length=255 | |
| Port | Port of the Host Server. Min=80, Max=65534, Default=80 | |
| Datacenter | Datacenter of the Virtual Hosting Pool. Default=”” Max Length=250 | |
| UpdateLimit | Number of updates at the same time. Min=2, Max=1000, Default=1000 | |
| UpdateTimeout | Timeout for updates. Min=2, Max=240, Default=60 | |
| ShutdownTimeout | Timeout for shutdown. Min=2, Max=30, Default=10 | |
| UserName | Name to use when logging into the Server. | |
| Password | Password to use when logging into the Server. | |
| XdHostingUnitUuid | UUID of XenDesktop Hosting Unit Default=00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 | |
| PrepopulateEnabled | Enable prepopulate when set to true Default=false | |
| XsPvsSiteUuid | UUID of XenServer PVS_site Default=00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 | |
| PlatformVersion | Hypervisor Host Version Default=”” Max Length=250 | |
| XdHcHypervisorConnectionName | Hypervisor Connection Name for HCL Connection Details object Default=”” Max Length=250 | |
| XdHcHypervisorConnectionUid | Hypervisor Connection Uid for HCL Connection Details object Default=”” Max Length=250 | |
| XdHcRevision | Revision for HCL Connection Details object Default=”” Max Length=250 | |
| XdHcCustomProperties | Custom Properties for HCL Connection Details object Default=”” Max Length=65535 | |
| XdHcSslThumbprints | Ssl Thumbprints for HCL Connection Details object Default=”” Max Length=65535 | |
| CredentialsUid | UUID of any record associated with the credentials Default=”” Max Length=65535 | |
| DdcType | Type of the DDC. 0 = Unset, 1 = Citrix Cloud, 2 = customer-managed. Min=0, Max=2, Default=0 | |
| EncryptionEpoch | Timestamp of the encryption Key used to encrypt fields Default=0 |
PvsVirtualHostingPool[]: If successful, the PvsVirtualHostingPool object(s) are returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Get PvsVirtualHostingPool for Farm
Get all PvsVirtualHostingPool for the Farm.
Get-PvsVirtualHostingPool
EXAMPLE 2: Get PvsVirtualHostingPool for Site
Get all PvsVirtualHostingPool for the Site named theSite.
Get-PvsVirtualHostingPool -SiteName theSite
EXAMPLE 3: Get PvsVirtualHostingPool
Get PvsVirtualHostingPool for VirtualHostingPool named theVirtualHostingPool in Site named theSite.
Get-PvsVirtualHostingPool -Name theVirtualHostingPool -SiteName theSite
Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
Get-PvsXDSite
Get the fields for a XenDesktop Site or all XenDesktop Sites. All XenDisktop Sites are returned if no parameters are passed.
This is optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or XdSiteId | Guid[] | GUID of the XenDesktop Site to Get. |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
XdSiteId
If only selected fields are needed, pass them in the Fields parameter as a string array.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or XdSiteId | GUID of the XenDesktop Site. | |
| ConfigServices | XenDesktop Server addresses. Max Length=2000 |
PvsXDSite[]: If successful, the PvsXDSite object(s) are returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Get PvsXDSite for Farm
Get all PvsXDSite for the Farm.
Get-PvsXDSite
EXAMPLE 2: Get PvsXDSite
Get the PvsXDSite for the XDSite with Guid 45687f34-c9ec-4852-9d55-337a1af41405.
Get-PvsXDSite -Guid "45687f34-c9ec-4852-9d55-337a1af41405"
Grant-PvsAuthGroup
Assign an AuthGroup to have Farm, Site or Collection Authorization. If no Site or Collection is specified, the AuthGroup is given Farm Authorization.
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or AuthGroupId | Guid[] | GUID of the AuthGroup to assign Authorization for. |
| Name or AuthGroupName | string[] | Name of the AuthGroup to assign Authorization for. |
These are optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid[] | |
| SiteName | string[] | |
| CollectionId | Guid[] |
or this is optional & resolution
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| CollectionName | string[] |
This is optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| IsReadOnly | string[] |
Optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Role | uint |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid[] | |
| SiteName | string[] |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
AuthGroupId, SiteId or CollectionId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Grant-PvsAuthGroup for PvsAuthGroup to PvsFarm
Grant-PvsAuthGroup -Name theAuthGroup
EXAMPLE 2: Grant-PvsAuthGroup for PvsAuthGroup Using Pipe
The Get-PvsAuthGroup output is piped to the Grant-PvsAuthGroup.
Get-PvsAuthGroup -Name theAuthGroup -Fields Guid | Grant-PvsAuthGroup
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
EXAMPLE 3: Grant-PvsAuthGroup for PvsAuthGroup to PvsSite
Grant-PvsAuthGroup -Name theAuthGroup -SiteName theSite
EXAMPLE 4: Grant-PvsAuthGroup for PvsAuthGroup Using Pipe
The Get-PvsAuthGroup output is piped to the Grant-PvsAuthGroup.
Get-PvsAuthGroup -Name theAuthGroup -Fields Guid | Grant-PvsAuthGroup -SiteName theSite
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
EXAMPLE 5: Grant-PvsAuthGroup for PvsSite Using Pipe
The Get-PvsSite output is piped to the Grant-PvsAuthGroup.
Get-PvsSite -Name theSite -Fields Guid | Grant-PvsAuthGroup -Name theAuthGroup
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
EXAMPLE 6: Grant-PvsAuthGroup for PvsAuthGroup to PvsCollection
Grant-PvsAuthGroup -Name theAuthGroup -CollectionName theCollection -SiteName theSite
CollectionId can be used instead of CollectionName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 7: Grant-PvsAuthGroup for PvsAuthGroup Using Pipe
The Get-PvsAuthGroup output is piped to the Grant-PvsAuthGroup.
Get-PvsAuthGroup -Name theAuthGroup -Fields Guid | Grant-PvsAuthGroup -CollectionName theCollection -SiteName theSite
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. CollectionId can be used instead of CollectionName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 8: Grant-PvsAuthGroup for PvsCollection Using Pipe
The Get-PvsCollection output is piped to the Grant-PvsAuthGroup.
Get-PvsCollection -Name theCollection -SiteName theSite -Fields Guid | Grant-PvsAuthGroup -Name theAuthGroup
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 9: Grant-PvsAuthGroup for PvsAuthGroup to PvsCollection
Grant-PvsAuthGroup -Name theAuthGroup -CollectionName theCollection -SiteName theSite -Role 300
CollectionId can be used instead of CollectionName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 10: Grant-PvsAuthGroup for PvsAuthGroup Using Pipe
The Get-PvsAuthGroup output is piped to the Grant-PvsAuthGroup.
Get-PvsAuthGroup -Name theAuthGroup -Fields Guid | Grant-PvsAuthGroup -CollectionName theCollection -SiteName theSite -Role 300
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. CollectionId can be used instead of CollectionName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 11: Grant-PvsAuthGroup for PvsCollection Using Pipe
The Get-PvsCollection output is piped to the Grant-PvsAuthGroup.
Get-PvsCollection -Name theCollection -SiteName theSite -Fields Guid | Grant-PvsAuthGroup -Name theAuthGroup -Role 300
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
Import-PvsDevices
Import Devices from the contents of the comma or tab delimited fileName specified. Each record needs to have Device Name, Mac Address, Site Name, Collection Name, optional Description and optional Type. Description must exist for Type to be included, but it can have 0 length. Type can be 1 when it performs test of Disks, 2 when it performs maintenance on Disks, and 0 otherwise.
This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or FileName | string[] | Name of the file to import the Devices from. This must be a full file path name. |
These are optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| CollectionId | Guid[] | |
| SiteId | Guid[] | |
| SiteName | string[] |
or this is optional & resolution
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| CollectionName | string[] |
Optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| CopyTemplate | SwitchParameter | |
| DoNotCreateNewSites | SwitchParameter | |
| DoNotCreateNewCollections | SwitchParameter |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid[] | |
| SiteName | string[] |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
CollectionId or SiteId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “medium”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “medium” or “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Import-PvsDevices
Import-PvsDevices -Name "C:\import\theFileName"
EXAMPLE 2: Import-PvsDevices
Import-PvsDevices -CopyTemplate -DoNotCreateNewSites -DoNotCreateNewCollections -Name "C:\import\theFileName"
EXAMPLE 3: Import-PvsDevices for SiteName
Import-PvsDevices -SiteName theSite -Name "C:\import\theFileName"
EXAMPLE 4: Import-PvsDevices for SiteName with CopyTemplate and DoNotCreateNewCollections
Import-PvsDevices -SiteName theSite -CopyTemplate -DoNotCreateNewCollections -Name "C:\import\theFileName"
EXAMPLE 5: Import-PvsDevices for PvsSite Using Pipe
The Get-PvsSite output is piped to the Import-PvsDevices.
Get-PvsSite -Name theSite -Fields Guid | Import-PvsDevices -Name \"C:\import\theFileName\"
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
EXAMPLE 6: Import-PvsDevices for CollectionName
Import-PvsDevices -CollectionName theCollection -SiteName theSite -Name "C:\import\theFileName"
CollectionId can be used instead of CollectionName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 7: Import-PvsDevices for CollectionName with CopyTemplate
Import-PvsDevices -CollectionName theCollection -SiteName theSite -CopyTemplate -Name "C:\import\theFileName"
CollectionId can be used instead of CollectionName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 8: Import-PvsDevices for PvsCollection Using Pipe
The Get-PvsCollection output is piped to the Import-PvsDevices.
Get-PvsCollection -Name theCollection -SiteName theSite -Fields Guid | Import-PvsDevices -Name \"C:\import\theFileName\"
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
Import-PvsDisk
Import a Disk. It will add a Disk Locator for the Disk to the Site. A manifest file must exist in the Store. If successful, the new PvsDiskLocator is returned.
This required & resolution
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or DiskLocatorName | string | Name of the Disk Locator File. It is unique within the Store. ASCII Max Length=52 |
These are optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| ServerId | Guid | |
| ServerName | string |
Optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Description | string | |
| MenuText | string | |
| Enabled | SwitchParameter | |
| RebalanceEnabled | SwitchParameter | |
| RebalanceTriggerPercent | uint | |
| SubnetAffinity | uint | |
| Format | SwitchParameter |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid | |
| SiteName | string |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| StoreId | Guid | |
| StoreName | string |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
ServerId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter. PvsDiskLocator: If successful, the new PvsDiskLocator object is returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Import-PvsDisk for VHDX to PvsDiskLocator
This example imports a VHDX Disk and uses the default settings for all other optional parameters.
$thePvsDiskLocator = Import-PvsDisk -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore -VHDX
if ($thePvsDiskLocator -eq $null) # check that the PvsDiskLocator was returned
{
$thePvsDiskLocator.Name # display the name
}
EXAMPLE 2: Import-PvsDisk for VHD to PvsDiskLocator
This example imports a VHD Disk and sets all of the other optional parameters to non-default values.
$thePvsDiskLocator = Import-PvsDisk -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore -ServerName theServer -Description "The VHD disk." -MenuText "The VHD disk." -Enabled -RebalanceEnabled -rebalanceTriggerPercent 50 -SubnetAffinity 2
if ($thePvsDiskLocator -eq $null) # check that the PvsDiskLocator was returned
{
$thePvsDiskLocator.Name # display the name
}
Import-PvsOemLicenses
Oem Only: Import the Oem Licenses from the contents of the fileName specified.
This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or FileName | string[] | Name of the file to import the Oem Licenses from. This must be a full file path name. |
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “medium”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “medium” or “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Import-PvsOemLicenses
Import-PvsOemLicenses -Name "C:\import\theFileName"
Invoke-PvsActivateDeviceMAK
Proxy Activate with a Multiple Activation Key and/or apply the Confirmation ID to remote activate a Device DiskLocator pair.
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DeviceId | Guid[] | GUID of the Device to Activate. |
| Name or DeviceName | string[] | Name of the Device to Activate. |
| DeviceMac | PvsPhysicalAddress[] | MAC of the Device to Activate. |
This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| MakUsedToActivate | string[] |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
DeviceId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Invoke-ActivateDeviceMAK for Name
Invoke-ActivateDeviceMAK -Name theDevice -MakUsedToActivate "2FKWD-NYFC7-VH8G3-BK3GD-7T667"
EXAMPLE 2: Invoke-ActivateDeviceMAK for DeviceMac
Invoke-ActivateDeviceMAK -DeviceMac "00-11-22-33-44-55" -MakUsedToActivate "2FKWD-NYFC7-VH8G3-BK3GD-7T667"
EXAMPLE 3: Invoke-ActivateDeviceMAK for PvsDevice Using Pipe
The Get-PvsDevice output is piped to the Invoke-ActivateDeviceMAK.
Get-PvsDevice -Name theDevice -Fields Guid | Invoke-ActivateDeviceMAK -MakUsedToActivate \"2FKWD-NYFC7-VH8G3-BK3GD-7T667\"
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
Invoke-PvsMarkDown
Mark Down a Device, Collection, View, Server or Site.
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| DeviceId | Guid[] | GUID of the Device to Mark Down. |
| DeviceName | string[] | Name of the Device to Mark Down. |
| DeviceMac | PvsPhysicalAddress[] | MAC of the Device to Mark Down. |
| CollectionId | Guid[] | GUID of the Collection to Mark Down all Devices. |
| SiteViewId | Guid[] | GUID of the Site View to Mark Down all Devices. |
| SiteId | Guid[] | GUID of the Site. Can be used alone to Mark Down all Servers and Devices in the Site. |
| SiteName | string[] | Name of the Site. Can be used alone to Mark Down all Servers and Devices in the Site. |
| FarmViewId | Guid[] | GUID of the Farm View to Mark Down all Devices. |
| FarmViewName | string[] | Name of the Farm View to Mark Down all Devices. |
| DiskLocatorId | Guid[] | GUID of the DiskLocator to Mark Down all Devices. |
| ServerId | Guid[] | GUID of the Server to Mark Down. |
| ServerName | string[] | Name of the Server to Mark Down. |
or one of these is required & resolutions
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| CollectionName | string[] | |
| SiteViewName | string[] | |
| DiskLocatorName | string[] |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid[] | GUID of the Site. Can be used alone to Mark Down all Servers and Devices in the Site. |
| SiteName | string[] | Name of the Site. Can be used alone to Mark Down all Servers and Devices in the Site. |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| StoreId | Guid[] | |
| StoreName | string[] |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
DeviceId, CollectionId, SiteViewId, SiteId, FarmViewId, DiskLocatorId or ServerId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “medium”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “medium” or “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Invoke-PvsMarkDown for SiteName
Invoke-PvsMarkDown -SiteName theSite
EXAMPLE 2: Invoke-PvsMarkDown for PvsSite Using Pipe
The Get-PvsSite output is piped to the Invoke-PvsMarkDown.
Get-PvsSite -Name theSite -Fields Guid | Invoke-PvsMarkDown
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
EXAMPLE 3: Invoke-PvsMarkDown for ServerName
Invoke-PvsMarkDown -ServerName theServer
EXAMPLE 4: Invoke-PvsMarkDown for PvsServer Using Pipe
The Get-PvsServer output is piped to the Invoke-PvsMarkDown.
Get-PvsServer -Name theServer -Fields Guid | Invoke-PvsMarkDown
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
EXAMPLE 5: Invoke-PvsMarkDown for DeviceName
Invoke-PvsMarkDown -DeviceName theDevice
EXAMPLE 6: Invoke-PvsMarkDown for PvsDevice Using Pipe
The Get-PvsDevice output is piped to the Invoke-PvsMarkDown.
Get-PvsDevice -Name theDevice -Fields Guid | Invoke-PvsMarkDown
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
EXAMPLE 7: Invoke-PvsMarkDown for DeviceMac
Invoke-PvsMarkDown -DeviceMac "00-11-22-33-44-55"
EXAMPLE 8: Invoke-PvsMarkDown for PvsDevice Using Pipe
The Get-PvsDevice output is piped to the Invoke-PvsMarkDown.
Get-PvsDevice -DeviceMac \"00-11-22-33-44-55\" -Fields Guid | Invoke-PvsMarkDown
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
EXAMPLE 9: Invoke-PvsMarkDown for FarmViewName
Invoke-PvsMarkDown -FarmViewName theFarmView
EXAMPLE 10: Invoke-PvsMarkDown for PvsFarmView Using Pipe
The Get-PvsFarmView output is piped to the Invoke-PvsMarkDown.
Get-PvsFarmView -Name theFarmView -Fields Guid | Invoke-PvsMarkDown
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
EXAMPLE 11: Invoke-PvsMarkDown for CollectionName
Invoke-PvsMarkDown -CollectionName theCollection -SiteName theSite
CollectionId can be used instead of CollectionName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 12: Invoke-PvsMarkDown for PvsCollection Using Pipe
The Get-PvsCollection output is piped to the Invoke-PvsMarkDown.
Get-PvsCollection -Name theCollection -SiteName theSite -Fields Guid | Invoke-PvsMarkDown
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 13: Invoke-PvsMarkDown for SiteViewName
Invoke-PvsMarkDown -SiteViewName theSiteView -SiteName theSite
SiteViewId can be used instead of SiteViewName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 14: Invoke-PvsMarkDown for PvsSiteView Using Pipe
The Get-PvsSiteView output is piped to the Invoke-PvsMarkDown.
Get-PvsSiteView -Name theSiteView -SiteName theSite -Fields Guid | Invoke-PvsMarkDown
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 15: Invoke-PvsMarkDown for DiskLocatorName
Invoke-PvsMarkDown -DiskLocatorName theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore
DiskLocatorId can be used instead of DiskLocatorName so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
EXAMPLE 16: Invoke-PvsMarkDown for PvsDiskLocator Using Pipe
The Get-PvsDiskLocator output is piped to the Invoke-PvsMarkDown.
Get-PvsDiskLocator -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore -Fields Guid | Invoke-PvsMarkDown
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
Invoke-PvsPromoteDiskVersion
Commit the changes made in the current Maintenance or a Test version. Promotes the Maintenance version or a Test version to a Test or new Production version.
This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DiskLocatorId | Guid[] | GUID of the Disk Locator File to Promote the Disk Version of. |
or this is required & resolution
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or DiskLocatorName | string[] |
Optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| ScheduledDate | DateTime | |
| TestVersion | uint | |
| Test | SwitchParameter |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid[] | |
| SiteName | string[] |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| StoreId | Guid[] | |
| StoreName | string[] |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
DiskLocatorId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Invoke-PvsPromoteDiskVersion to Production
Invoke-PvsPromoteDiskVersion -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore
Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
EXAMPLE 2: Invoke-PvsPromoteDiskVersion to Production Using Pipe
Get-PvsDiskLocator -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore -Fields Guid | Invoke-PvsPromoteDiskVersion
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
EXAMPLE 3: Invoke-PvsPromoteDiskVersion to Test
Invoke-PvsPromoteDiskVersion -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore -Test
Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
EXAMPLE 4: Invoke-PvsPromoteDiskVersion to Test Using Pipe
Get-PvsDiskLocator -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore -Fields Guid | Invoke-PvsPromoteDiskVersion -Test
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
EXAMPLE 5: Invoke-PvsPromoteDiskVersion Test to Production
Invoke-PvsPromoteDiskVersion -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore -TestVersion 4
Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
EXAMPLE 6: Invoke-PvsPromoteDiskVersion Test to Production Using Pipe
Get-PvsDiskLocator -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore -Fields Guid | Invoke-PvsPromoteDiskVersion -TestVersion 4
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
EXAMPLE 7: Invoke-PvsPromoteDiskVersion to Production, for Future
Invoke-PvsPromoteDiskVersion -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore -ScheduledDate "2016/01/01"
Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
EXAMPLE 8: Invoke-PvsPromoteDiskVersion to Production, for Future Using Pipe
Get-PvsDiskLocator -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore -Fields Guid | Invoke-PvsPromoteDiskVersion -ScheduledDate \"2016/01/01\"
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
Invoke-PvsRebalanceDevices
Rebalance Devices for a Server. When successful, returns the number of Devices affected.
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or ServerId | Guid | GUID of the Server to Rebalance Devices on, ServerName. |
| Name or ServerName | string | Name of the Server to Rebalance Devices on, ServerId. |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
ServerId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter. UInt32: If successful, the numeric value is returned
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Invoke-PvsRebalanceDevices for Name
Invoke-PvsRebalanceDevices -Name theServer
Invoke-PvsRevertDiskVersion
Set the existing highest version disk to Maintenance or Test mode. A specified version can be reverted to Test mode if there are no Production versions higher than it. If the mode is Test, it can be set to Maintenance.
This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DiskLocatorId | Guid[] | GUID of the Disk Locator File to Revert. |
or this is required & resolution
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or DiskLocatorName | string[] |
Optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Version | uint | |
| Test | SwitchParameter |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid[] | |
| SiteName | string[] |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| StoreId | Guid[] | |
| StoreName | string[] |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
DiskLocatorId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “medium”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “medium” or “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Invoke-PvsRevertDiskVersion to Maintenance
Invoke-PvsRevertDiskVersion -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore
Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
EXAMPLE 2: Invoke-PvsRevertDiskVersion to Maintenance Using Pipe
Get-PvsDiskLocator -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore -Fields Guid | Invoke-PvsRevertDiskVersion
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
EXAMPLE 3: Invoke-PvsRevertDiskVersion to Test
Invoke-PvsRevertDiskVersion -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore -Test
Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
EXAMPLE 4: Invoke-PvsRevertDiskVersion to Test Using Pipe
Get-PvsDiskLocator -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore -Fields Guid | Invoke-PvsRevertDiskVersion -Test
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
EXAMPLE 5: Invoke-PvsRevertDiskVersion Production to Test
Invoke-PvsRevertDiskVersion -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore -Version 4
Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
EXAMPLE 6: Invoke-PvsRevertDiskVersion Production to Test Using Pipe
Get-PvsDiskLocator -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore -Fields Guid | Invoke-PvsRevertDiskVersion -Version 4
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
Merge-PvsDisk
Merge the Disk.
This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DiskLocatorId | Guid[] | GUID of the Disk Locator File to Merge. |
or this is required & resolution
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or DiskLocatorName | string[] |
Optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Access | uint | |
| Base | SwitchParameter |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid[] | |
| SiteName | string[] |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| StoreId | Guid[] | |
| StoreName | string[] |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
DiskLocatorId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “medium”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “medium” or “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Merge-PvsDisk for Name
Merge-PvsDisk -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore
Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
EXAMPLE 2: Merge-PvsDisk for PvsDiskLocator Using Pipe
The Get-PvsDiskLocator output is piped to the Merge-PvsDisk.
Get-PvsDiskLocator -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore -Fields Guid | Merge-PvsDisk
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
EXAMPLE 3: Merge-PvsDisk for Name with Access and NewBase
Merge-PvsDisk -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore -Access 2 -NewBase
Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
EXAMPLE 4: Merge-PvsDisk for PvsDiskLocator Using Pipe
The Get-PvsDiskLocator output is piped to the Merge-PvsDisk.
Get-PvsDiskLocator -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore -Fields Guid | Merge-PvsDisk -Access 2 -NewBase
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
Mount-PvsDisk
Mount a disk. If successful, the drive letter or an empty string is returned. An empty string can be returned if a drive letter was not assigned by the operating system before the maxDiskLetterWaitSeconds is used up.
This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DiskLocatorId | Guid | GUID of the Disk Locator to Mount the Disk. |
or this is required & resolution
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or DiskLocatorName | string |
These are optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| ServerId | Guid | |
| ServerName | string |
Optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| MaxDiskLetterWaitSeconds | uint |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid | |
| SiteName | string |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| StoreId | Guid | |
| StoreName | string |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
DiskLocatorId or ServerId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter. String: If successful, the String value is returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Mount-PvsDisk
$theDriveLetter = Start-PvsMapDisk -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore
if ($theDriveLetter -ne $null -and $theDriveLetter.length -gt 0)
{
$theDriveLetter # display the drive letter
}
Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
EXAMPLE 2: Mount-PvsDisk for PvsServer with MaxDiskLetterWaitSeconds
$theDriveLetter = Start-PvsMapDisk -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore -ServerName theServer -MaxDiskLetterWaitSeconds 60
if ($theDriveLetter -ne $null -and $theDriveLetter.length -gt 0)
{
$theDriveLetter # display the drive letter
}
Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
Move-PvsDeviceToCollection
Move a Device to a Collection. Personal vDisk Devices cannot be moved to a Collection in another Site.
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DeviceId | Guid[] | GUID of the Device to Move. |
| Name or DeviceName | string[] | Name of the Device to Move. |
| DeviceMac | PvsPhysicalAddress[] | MAC of the Device to Move. |
This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| CollectionId | Guid[] |
or this is required & resolution
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| CollectionName | string[] |
Optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| CopyTemplate | SwitchParameter |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid[] | |
| SiteName | string[] |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
DeviceId or CollectionId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Move-PvsDeviceToCollection for PvsDevice to PvsCollection
Move-PvsDeviceToCollection -Name theDevice -CollectionName theCollection -SiteName theSite
CollectionId can be used instead of CollectionName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 2: Move-PvsDeviceToCollection for PvsDevice Using Pipe
The Get-PvsDevice output is piped to the Move-PvsDeviceToCollection.
Get-PvsDevice -Name theDevice -Fields Guid | Move-PvsDeviceToCollection -CollectionName thetheCollection -SiteName theSite
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. CollectionId can be used instead of CollectionName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 3: Move-PvsDeviceToCollection for PvsCollection Using Pipe
The Get-PvsCollection output is piped to the Move-PvsDeviceToCollection.
Get-PvsCollection -Name theCollection -SiteName theSite -Fields Guid | Move-PvsDeviceToCollection -Name theDevice
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
Move-PvsServerToSite
Move a Server to a Site.
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or ServerId | Guid[] | GUID of the Server to Assign. |
| Name or ServerName | string[] | Name of the Server to Assign. |
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid[] | |
| SiteName | string[] |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
ServerId or SiteId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Move-PvsServerToSite for PvsServer to PvsSite
Move-PvsServerToSite -Name theServer -SiteName theSite
EXAMPLE 2: Move-PvsServerToSite for PvsServer Using Pipe
The Get-PvsServer output is piped to the Move-PvsServerToSite.
Get-PvsServer -Name theServer -Fields Guid | Move-PvsServerToSite -SiteName theSite
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
EXAMPLE 3: Move-PvsServerToSite for PvsSite Using Pipe
The Get-PvsSite output is piped to the Move-PvsServerToSite.
Get-PvsSite -Name theSite -Fields Guid | Move-PvsServerToSite -Name theServer
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
New-PvsAuthGroup
Create a new authorization AuthGroup for an Active Directory or Windows Group.
All parameters that do not have a Default are required, unless only a few of a group are required.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or AuthGroupName | string | Name of the Active Directory or Windows Group. Max Length=450 |
| Description | string | User description. Default=”” Max Length=250 |
| IsReadOnly | SwitchParameter | Indicates whether the administrative role is read-only(true) or read-write(false). Default=false |
SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter. PvsAuthGroup: If successful, the new PvsAuthGroup object is returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Create PvsAuthGroup with Minimum Fields
Creates a PvsAuthGroup for the “AD\PVSFarmAdminGroup” Active Directory security group.
New-PvsAuthGroup -Name "AD\PVSFarmAdminGroup"
EXAMPLE 2: Create PvsAuthGroup with All Fields
Creates a PvsAuthGroup for the “AD\PVSFarmAdminGroup” Active Directory security group with “Farm AuthGroup” as the description.
New-PvsAuthGroup -Name "AD\PVSFarmAdminGroup" -Description "Farm AuthGroup"
EXAMPLE 3: Create PvsAuthGroup and Assign to Site
Creates a PvsAuthGroup for the “AD\PVSSiteAdminGroup” Active Directory security group and Assigns it to theSite.
New-PvsAuthGroup -Name \"AD\PVSSiteAdminGroup\" | Grant-PvsAuthGroup -SiteName theSite
New-PvsCeipData
Create a new entry for CeipData table.
All parameters that do not have a Default are required, unless only a few of a group are required.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Enabled | uint | 1 if CEIP is enabled, otherwise 0. Min=0, Max=1 |
| NextUpload | DateTime | Date and time next CEIP upload is due if enabled is 1. Default=Empty |
| InProgress | uint | 1 if an upload is currently in progress, otherwise 0. Default=0 |
| ServerId | Guid | ID of server that is currently uploading, null if InProgress is 0. Default=00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 |
| OneTimeUpload | uint | 1 to perform a one time upload. Default=0 |
SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter. PvsCeipData: If successful, the new PvsCeipData object is returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Create PvsCeipData with Minimum Fields
Creates a PvsCeipData with enabled as false.
New-PvsCeipData -Enabled 0
EXAMPLE 2: Create PvsCeipData with All Fields
Creates a PvsCeipData with enabled as true and with all fields set different than defaults.
New-PvsCeipData -Enabled 1 -NextUpload "2016-01-14 15:52:00"
New-PvsCisData
Create a new entry for CisData table.
All parameters that do not have a Default are required, unless only a few of a group are required.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| UserName | string | Username used to obtain the token Max Length=255 |
| Path | string | Path where the last problem report bundle was saved Default=”” Max Length=255 |
| Password | string | Password of the user required to obtain the token. This is required only by Set and Add |
SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter. PvsCisData: If successful, the new PvsCisData object is returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Create PvsCisData with Minimum Fields
Creates a PvsCisData with userName as userName and with all fields set different than defaults.
New-PvsCisData -UserName userName
New-PvsCollection
Create a new Collection for a Site.
All parameters that do not have a Default are required, unless only a few of a group are required.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or CollectionName | string | Name of the Collection. It is unique within the Site. Max Length=50 |
| SiteId | Guid | GUID of the Site that this Collection is a member of. It is not used with SiteName. |
| SiteName | string | Name of the Site that this Collection is a member of. It is not used with SiteId. |
| Description | string | User description. Default=”” Max Length=250 |
| LastAutoAddDeviceNumber | uint | The Device Number of the last Auto Added Device. Default=0 |
| Disabled | SwitchParameter | If -Disabled is specified, the Devices in the Collection can not be booted. By default the Devices can be booted. |
| AutoAddPrefix | string | The string put before the Device Number for Auto Add. Default=”” ASCII computer name characters no end digit Max Length=12 |
| AutoAddSuffix | string | The string put after the Device Number for Auto Add. Default=”” ASCII computer name characters no begin digit Max Length=12 |
| NoAutoAddZeroFill | SwitchParameter | If -NoAutoAddZeroFill is specified, zeros will not be placed before the Device Number up to the AutoAddNumberLength for Auto Add. |
| AutoAddNumberLength | uint | The maximum length of the Device Number for Auto Add. This length plus the AutoAddPrefix length plus the AutoAddSuffix length must be less than 16. Required that ((lenautoAddPrefix+lenautoAddSuffix)+AutoAddNumberLength)<=15. Min=3, Max=9, Default=4 |
| ProvisioningType | uint | The provisioning facility which created the Devices in this Collection. 0 is PVS, 1 is Studio. Only writable when adding a colection. Min=0, Max=1, Default=0 |
SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter. PvsCollection: If successful, the new PvsCollection object is returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Create PvsCollection with Minimum Fields
Creates a PvsCollection named theCollection in theSite.
New-PvsCollection -Name theCollection -SiteName theSite
EXAMPLE 2: Create PvsCollection with All Fields
Creates a PvsCollection named theCollection in theSite with “XenServer Collection” as the description that is Disabled and has all AutoAdd settings different than defaults.
New-PvsCollection -Name theCollection -SiteName theSite -Description "XenServer Collection" -Disabled -LastAutoAddDeviceNumber 100 -AutoAddPrefix A -AutoAddSuffix A -NoAutoAddZeroFill -AutoAddNumberLength 3
EXAMPLE 3: Create PvsCollection and Assign AuthGroup to it
Creates a PvsCollection named theCollection in theSite and Assigns AuthGroup “AD\PVSCollectionAdminGroup” to it.
New-PvsCollection -Name theCollection -SiteName theSite | Grant-PvsAuthGroup -AuthGroupName \"AD\PVSCollectionAdminGroup\"
New-PvsDevice
Add a new Device to a Collection.
All parameters that do not have a Default are required, unless only a few of a group are required.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or DeviceName | string | Computer name with no spaces. ASCII computer name characters Max Length=15 |
| CollectionId | Guid | GUID of the Collection this Device is to be a member of. It is not used with CollectionName. |
| CollectionName | string | Name of the Collection this Device is to be a member of. SiteName or SiteId must also be used. |
| SiteId | Guid | GUID of the Site the CollectionName is to be a member of. This or SiteName is used with CollectionName. |
| SiteName | string | Name of the Site the CollectionName is to be a member of. This or SiteId is used with CollectionName. |
| Description | string | User description. Default=”” Max Length=250 |
| DeviceMac | PvsPhysicalAddress | Ethernet address can have the form XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX. Uniquely identifies the Device. Default=”” |
| BootFrom | uint | Device to boot from. Choices are 1 for vDisk, 2 for Hard Disk, and 3 for Floppy. Min=1, Max=3, Default=1 |
| ClassName | string | Used by Automatic Update feature to match new versions of Disks to a Device. Default=”” Max Length=41 |
| Port | uint | UDP port to use with Stream Service. Min=1025, Max=65534, Default=6901 |
| Disabled | SwitchParameter | If -Disabled is specified, the Device can not be booted. By default the Device can be booted. |
| LocalDiskEnabled | SwitchParameter | If -LocalDiskEnabled is specified, there will be a local disk menu choice for the Device. |
| Authentication | uint | Device log in authentication. Choices are 0 for none, 1 for User Name/Password, and 2 for Extern. Min=0, Max=2, Default=0 |
| User | string | Name of user to authenticate before the boot process continues. Default=”” ASCII Max Length=20 |
| Password | string | Password of user to authenticate before the boot process continues. Default=”” ASCII Max Length=65535 |
| CopyTemplate | SwitchParameter | If -CopyTemplate is specified, the Template Device for the collection, if it exists, will be used for the property settings of the new Device. |
| AdTimestamp | uint | The time the Active Directory machine account password was generated. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=0 |
| AdSignature | uint | The signature of the Active Directory machine account password. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=0 |
| AdPassword | string | The Active Directory machine account password. Default=”” ASCII Max Length=65535 |
| LogLevel | uint | Level to perform logging at. Values are: 0 (None), 1 (Fatal), 2 (Error), 3 (Warning), 4 (Info), and 5 (Debug). Min=0, Max=6, Default=4 |
| DomainName | string | Fully qualified name of the domain that the Device belongs to. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=”” Max Length=255 |
| DomainObjectSID | string | The value of the objectSID AD attribute of the same name for the Device’s computer account. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=”” Max Length=186 |
| DomainControllerName | string | The name of the DC used to create the host’s computer account. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=”” Max Length=4000 |
| DomainTimeCreated | DateTime | The time that the computer account was created. Has the date and time including milliseconds. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=Empty |
| Type | uint | 1 when it performs test of Disks, 2 when it performs maintenance on Disks, 0 otherwise. Min=0, Max=2, Default=0 |
| LocalWriteCacheDiskSize | uint | The size in GB to format the Device cache file disk. If the value is 0, then the disk is not formatted. Min=0, Max=2048, Default=0 |
| VirtualHostingPoolId | Guid | GUID that uniquely identifies the Virtual Hosting Pool for a VM. This is needed when Adding a VM device. Default=00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 |
| HypVmId | string | Hypervisor VM ID for HCL Default=”” Max Length=65535 |
| BdmBoot | SwitchParameter | If -BdmBoot is 0, use PXE, 1 use BDM. PXE boot is used by default. |
| BdmType | uint | Use PXE boot when set to 0, BDM (Bios) boot when set to 1 and BDM (Uefi) boot when set to 2. Default=0 |
| BdmFormat | uint | 1 use VHD for BDMboot, 2 use ISO, 3 use USB. Default=0 |
| BdmUpdated | DateTime | Timestamp of the last BDM boot disk update. Default=Empty |
| BdmCreated | DateTime | Timestamp when BDM device was created Default=Empty |
| XsPvsProxyUuid | Guid | UUID of XenServer PVS_proxy Default=00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 |
| EnableXsProxy | string | Enable XenServerProxy when set to 1 Default=”” |
| WriteCacheDisk | string | Write cache disk number Default=”” Max Length=3 |
| WriteCachePartition | string | Write cache disk partition number Default=”” Max Length=3 |
| UpdatePageFileSettings | SwitchParameter | Update pagefile settings Default=false |
| EncryptionEpoch | UInt64 | Timestamp of the encryption Key used to encrypt fields Default=0 |
| ProvisioningType | uint | The provisioning facility which created the device. 0 is PVS, 1 is Studio. Only writable when adding a device. Min=0, Max=1, Default=0 |
| EkPub | string | Client TPM EK public key Default=”” |
| SecurityPolicy | uint | Client security policy Expected values are 0, 2 or 10, Default=null. |
SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter. PvsDevice: If successful, the new PvsDevice object is returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Create PvsDevice with Minimum Fields
Creates a PvsDevice named theDevice in theCollection of theSite.
New-PvsDevice -Name theDevice -DeviceMac "00-11-22-33-44-55" -SiteName theSite -CollectionName theCollection
CollectionId can be used instead of CollectionName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 2: Create PvsDevice with All Fields
Creates a PvsDevice named theDevice in theCollection of theSite with all fields set different than defaults.
New-PvsDevice -Name theDevice -DeviceMac "00-11-22-33-44-55" -SiteName theSite -CollectionName theCollection -Description "XenServer Device" -BootFrom 2 -ClassName C -Port 6000 -Disabled -LocalDiskEnabled -Authentication 1 -User U -Password P -CopyTemplate -LogLevel 3 -Type 2 -LocalWriteCacheDiskSize 100 -BdmBoot -VirtualHostingPoolId "15e0544e-4cf9-449e-b47f-8d836b16026f"
Do not set AdTimestamp, AdSignature, DomainName, DomainObjectSID, DomainControllerName and DomainTimeCreated. They are only set internally by PVS. CollectionId can be used instead of CollectionName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 3: Create PvsDevice and Boot it
Creates a PvsDevice named theDevice in theCollection of theSite and Boots it.
New-PvsDevice -Name theDevice -DeviceMac \"00-11-22-33-44-55\" -SiteName theSite -CollectionName theCollection | Start-PvsBoot
CollectionId can be used instead of CollectionName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
New-PvsDeviceWithPersonalvDisk
Add a new Device with Personal vDisk to a collection.
All parameters that do not have a Default are required, unless only a few of a group are required.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or DeviceName | string | Computer name with no spaces. ASCII computer name characters Max Length=15 |
| CollectionId | Guid | GUID of the Collection this Device with Personal vDisk is to be a member of. It is not used with CollectionName. |
| CollectionName | string | Name of the Collection this Device with Personal vDisk is to be a member of. SiteName or SiteId must also be used. |
| DiskLocatorId | Guid | GUID of the Disk Locator to update with this Device. |
| SiteId | Guid | GUID of the Site the CollectionName is to be a member of. This or SiteName is used with CollectionName. |
| SiteName | string | Name of the Site the CollectionName is to be a member of. This or SiteId is used with CollectionName. |
| Description | string | User description. Default=”” Max Length=250 |
| DeviceMac | PvsPhysicalAddress | Ethernet address can have the form XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX. Uniquely identifies the Device with Personal vDisk. |
| Port | uint | UDP port to use with Stream Service. Min=1025, Max=65534, Default=6901 |
| AdTimestamp | uint | The time the Active Directory machine account password was generated. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=0 |
| AdSignature | uint | The signature of the Active Directory machine account password. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=0 |
| LogLevel | uint | Level to perform logging at. Values are: 0 (None), 1 (Fatal), 2 (Error), 3 (Warning), 4 (Info), 5 (Debug), and 6 (Trace). Min=0, Max=6, Default=4 |
| DomainName | string | Fully qualified name of the domain that the Device with Personal vDisk belongs to. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=”” Max Length=255 |
| DomainObjectSID | string | The value of the objectSID AD attribute of the same name for the Device with Personal vDisk’s computer account. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=”” Max Length=186 |
| DomainControllerName | string | The name of the DC used to create the host’s computer account. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=”” Max Length=4000 |
| DomainTimeCreated | DateTime | The time that the computer account was created. Has the date and time including milliseconds. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=Empty |
| Type | uint | 3 when it has a Personal vDisk, 4 when it has a Personal vDisk and performs tests. Min=3, Max=4, Default=3 |
| PvdDriveLetter | string | Personal vDisk Drive letter. Range is F to Z. Default=”” Max Length=1 |
| LocalWriteCacheDiskSize | uint | The size in GB to format the Device cache file disk. If the value is 0, then the disk is not formatted. Min=0, Max=2048, Default=0 |
| BdmBoot | SwitchParameter | If -BdmBoot is specified, user BDM instead of PXE boot. PXE boot is used by default. |
| XdSiteId | Guid | GUID of the XenDesktop Site. Default=00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 |
| XdCatalogId | uint | Integer identifier of the XenDesktop Catalog. Default=”” |
| VirtualHostingPoolId | Guid | GUID that uniquely identifies the Virtual Hosting Pool for a VM. This is needed when Adding a VM device. Default=00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 |
| EnableXsProxy | string | Enable XenServerProxy when set to 1 Default=”” |
SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter. PvsDeviceWithPersonalvDisk: If successful, the new PvsDeviceWithPersonalvDisk object is returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Create PvsDeviceWithPersonalvDisk with Minimum Fields
Creates a PvsDeviceWithPersonalvDisk with Personal vDisk named theDevice in theCollection of theSite.
New-PvsDeviceWithPersonalvDisk -Name theDevice -DeviceMac "00-11-22-33-44-55" -SiteName theSite -CollectionName theCollection
CollectionId can be used instead of CollectionName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 2: Create PvsDeviceWithPersonalvDisk with All Fields
Creates a PvsDeviceWithPersonalvDisk named theDevice in theCollection of theSite with all fields set different than defaults.
New-PvsDeviceWithPersonalvDisk -Name theDevice -DeviceMac "00-11-22-33-44-55" -SiteName theSite -CollectionName theCollection -Description "XenServer Device" -ClassName C -Port 6000 -LogLevel 3 -Type 4 -PvdDriveLetter G -LocalWriteCacheDiskSize 100 -BdmBoot XdSiteId "bd712b52-a262-4aa2-9c36-1602efe07f57" -XdCatalogId 5 -VirtualHostingPoolId "15e0544e-4cf9-449e-b47f-8d836b16026f"
Do not set AdTimestamp, AdSignature, DomainName, DomainObjectSID, DomainControllerName and DomainTimeCreated. They are only set internally by PVS. CollectionId can be used instead of CollectionName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 3: Create PvsDeviceWithPersonalvDisk and Boot it
Creates a PvsDeviceWithPersonalvDisk with Personal vDisk named theDevice in theCollection of theSite and Boots it.
New-PvsDeviceWithPersonalvDisk -Name theDevice -DeviceMac \"00-11-22-33-44-55\" -SiteName theSite -CollectionName theCollection | Start-PvsBoot
CollectionId can be used instead of CollectionName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
New-PvsDirectory
Create a Directory on the Server specified.
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or ServerId | Guid[] | GUID of the Server to create a Directory on. |
| Name or ServerName | string[] | Name of the Server to create a Directory on. |
This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Path | string[] |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
ServerId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: New-PvsDirectory for Name
New-PvsDirectory -Name theServer -Path "C:\directory\subdirectory"
EXAMPLE 2: New-PvsDirectory for PvsServer Using Pipe
The Get-PvsServer output is piped to the New-PvsDirectory.
Get-PvsServer -Name theServer -Fields Guid | New-PvsDirectory -Path \"C:\directory\subdirectory\"
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
New-PvsDiskLocator
Create a new Disk Locator for a Site. The Disk file must already exist.
All parameters that do not have a Default are required, unless only a few of a group are required.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or DiskLocatorName | string | Name of the Disk Locator File. It is unique within the Store. ASCII Max Length=52 |
| SiteId | Guid | GUID of the Site this DiskLocator is to be a member of. It is not used with SiteName. |
| SiteName | string | Name of the Site this DiskLocator is to be a member of. It is not used with SiteId. |
| StoreId | Guid | GUID of the Store that this Disk Locator is a member of. SiteName or SiteId must also be used. It is not used with StoreName. |
| StoreName | string | Name of the Store that this Disk Locator is a member of. SiteName or SiteId must also be used. It is not used with StoreId. |
| Description | string | User description. Default=”” Max Length=250 |
| MenuText | string | Text that is displayed in the Boot Menu. If this field has no value, the name value is used. Default=”” ASCII Max Length=64 |
| ServerId | Guid | GUID of the single Server that this Disk Locator is assigned to. It is not used with ServerName. Default=00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 |
| ServerName | string | Name of the single Server that this Disk Locator is assigned to. It is not used with ServerId. Default=”” |
| Disabled | SwitchParameter | If -Disabled is specified, the disk can not be booted. By default the disk can be booted. |
| RebalanceEnabled | SwitchParameter | If -RebalanceEnabled is specified, this Server can automatically rebalance Devices. |
| RebalanceTriggerPercent | uint | Percent over fair load that triggers a dynamic Device rebalance. Min=5, Max=5000, Default=25 |
| SubnetAffinity | uint | Qualifier for subnet affinity when assigning a Server. 0=None, 1=Best Effort, 2=Fixed. Min=0, Max=2, Default=0 |
| NewDiskWriteCacheType | string | The WriteCacheType that if a new Disk will be created, it will be set with. It is only used when a new Disk is being created. Value are: 0 (Private), (other values are standard image) 1 (Cache on Server), 3 (Cache in Device RAM), 4 (Cache on Device Hard Disk), 7 (Cache on Server, Persistent), or 9 (Cache in Device RAM with Overflow on Hard Disk) Default=0 |
| VHDX | SwitchParameter | If -VHDX is specified, the format of the image the DiskLocator is being added for that has never been added to the Farm is VHDX. Otherwise it is assumed to be VHD. |
SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter. PvsDiskLocator: If successful, the new PvsDiskLocator object is returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Create PvsDiskLocator with Minimum Fields
Creates a PvsDiskLocator named theDiskLocator in theSite and theStore.
New-PvsDiskLocator -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore
EXAMPLE 2: Create PvsDiskLocator with All Fields
Creates a PvsDiskLocator named theDiskLocator in theSite and theStore with all fields set different than defaults.
New-PvsDiskLocator -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore -Description "XenServer DiskLocator" -MenuText "XenServer Disk" -ServerName theServer -Disabled -RebalanceEnabled -RebalanceTriggerPercent -50 -SubnetAffinity -1 -NewDiskWriteCacheType 9 -VHDX
-NewDiskWriteCacheType 9 (Cache in Device RAM with Overflow on Hard Disk) is an important parameter since this is the most optimal cache type.
New-PvsDiskMaintenanceVersion
Create a Maintenance version for the Disk Locator. Returns a PvsDiskVersion when successful.
This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DiskLocatorId | Guid | GUID of the Disk Locator File to Enable Disk Maintenance on. |
or this is required & resolution
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or DiskLocatorName | string |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid | |
| SiteName | string |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| StoreId | Guid | |
| StoreName | string |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
DiskLocatorId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter. PvsDiskVersion: If successful, the new PvsDiskVersion object is returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: New-PvsDiskMaintenanceVersion
This example create a maintenance version for an existing DiskLocator. It returns a PvsDiskVersion when successful.
$thePvsDiskVersion = New-PvsDiskMaintenanceVersion -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore
if ($thePvsDiskVersion -ne $null)
{
$thePvsDiskVersion.Name # display the name of the version file
}
Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
New-PvsDiskUpdateDevice
Add a new Device related to a Disk that can be updated.
All parameters that do not have a Default are required, unless only a few of a group are required.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or DeviceName | string | Computer name with no spaces. ASCII computer name characters Max Length=15 |
| VirtualHostingPoolId | Guid | GUID of the Virtual Hosting Pool. It is not used with VirtualHostingPoolName. |
| VirtualHostingPoolName | string | Name of the Virtual Hosting Pool. |
| DiskLocatorId | Guid | GUID of the Disk Locator to update with this Device. |
| Description | string | User description. Default=”” Max Length=250 |
| DeviceMac | PvsPhysicalAddress | Ethernet address can have the form XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX. Uniquely identifies the Device. Default=”” |
| Port | uint | UDP port to use with Stream Service. Min=1025, Max=65534, Default=6901 |
| AdTimestamp | uint | The time the Active Directory machine account password was generated. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=0 |
| AdSignature | uint | The signature of the Active Directory machine account password. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=0 |
| LogLevel | uint | Level to perform logging at. Values are: 0 (None), 1 (Fatal), 2 (Error), 3 (Warning), 4 (Info), and 5 (Debug). Min=0, Max=6, Default=4 |
| DomainName | string | Fully qualified name of the domain that the Device belongs to. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=”” Max Length=255 |
| DomainObjectSID | string | The value of the objectSID AD attribute of the same name for the Device’s computer account. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=”” Max Length=186 |
| DomainControllerName | string | The name of the DC used to create the host’s computer account. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=”” Max Length=4000 |
| DomainTimeCreated | DateTime | The time that the computer account was created. Has the date and time including milliseconds. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=Empty |
| AdPassword | string | The Active Directory machine account password. Default=”” Max Length=65535 |
SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter. PvsDiskUpdateDevice: If successful, the new PvsDiskUpdateDevice object is returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Create PvsDiskUpdateDevice with Minimum Fields
Creates a PvsDiskUpdateDevice named theDevice for the DiskLocatorId 2888f183-2f48-4771-b8dd-e5a44b2ee59b.
New-PvsDiskUpdateDevice -Name theDevice -DeviceMac "00-11-22-33-44-55" -VirtualHostingPoolName theVirtualHostingPool -DiskLocatorId "2888f183-2f48-4771-b8dd-e5a44b2ee59b"
EXAMPLE 2: Create PvsDiskUpdateDevice with All Fields
Creates a PvsDiskUpdateDevice named theDevice for the DiskLocatorId 2888f183-2f48-4771-b8dd-e5a44b2ee59b with all fields set different than defaults.
New-PvsDiskUpdateDevice -Name theDevice -DeviceMac "00-11-22-33-44-55" -VirtualHostingPoolName theVirtualHostingPool -DiskLocatorId "2888f183-2f48-4771-b8dd-e5a44b2ee59b" -Description "DiskUpdate Device" -Port 6000 -LogLevel 3
Do not set AdTimestamp, AdSignature, DomainName, DomainObjectSID, DomainControllerName and DomainTimeCreated. They are only set internally by PVS.
New-PvsFarmView
Create a new View for the Farm.
All parameters that do not have a Default are required, unless only a few of a group are required.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or FarmViewName | string | name of the Farm View. Max Length=50 |
| Description | string | User description. Default=”” Max Length=250 |
SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter. PvsFarmView: If successful, the new PvsFarmView object is returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Create PvsFarmView with Minimum Fields
Creates a PvsFarmView named theFarmView.
New-PvsFarmView -Name theFarmView
EXAMPLE 2: Create PvsFarmView with All Fields
Creates a PvsFarmView named theFarmView with “XenServer FarmView” as the description.
New-PvsFarmView -Name theFarmView -Description "XenServer FarmView"
New-PvsServer
Add a new Server to a Site.
All parameters that do not have a Default are required, unless only a few of a group are required.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or ServerName | string | Computer name with no spaces. ASCII computer name characters Max Length=21 |
| SiteId | Guid | GUID of the Site this Server is to be a member of. It is not used with SiteName. |
| SiteName | string | Name of the Site this Server is to be a member of. It is not used with SiteId. |
| Description | string | User description. Default=”” Max Length=250 |
| AdMaxPasswordAge | uint | Number of days before a password expires. Min=1, Max=30, Default=7 |
| LicenseTimeout | uint | Amount of seconds before a license times out. Min=15, Max=300, Default=30 |
| VDiskCreatePacing | uint | VDisk create time pacing in milliseconds. Min=0, Max=5, Default=0 |
| FirstPort | uint | Number of the first UDP port for use by the Stream Service, First and Last must allow at least 5 ports. Min=1025, Max=65534, Default=6910 |
| LastPort | uint | Number of the last UDP port for use by the Stream Service, First and Last must allow at least 5 ports. Min=1025, Max=65534, Default=6930 |
| ThreadsPerPort | uint | Number of worker threads per IO port. Required that (threadPerPort * numberPorts * numberIPs) <= 1000. Min=1, Max=60, Default=8 |
| BuffersPerThread | uint | Number of buffers per worker thread. Min=1, Max=128, Default=24 |
| ServerCacheTimeout | uint | Number of seconds to wait before considering another Server is down. Min=5, Max=60, Default=8 |
| IoBurstSize | uint | Number of bytes read/writes can send in a burst of packets. Required that IoBurstSize/(MaxTransmissionUnits-76)<=32. Min=4096, Max=61440, Default=32768 |
| MaxTransmissionUnits | uint | Ethernet maximum transmission unit size for the protocol for use for Server and Device. Required that IoBurstSize/(MaxTransmissionUnits-76)<=32. Min=502, Max=16426, Default=1506 |
| MaxBootDevicesAllowed | uint | Maximum number of Devices allowed to boot simultaneously. Min=1, Max=1000, Default=500 |
| MaxBootSeconds | uint | Maximum number of seconds for a Device to boot. Min=10, Max=900, Default=60 |
| BootPauseSeconds | uint | Number of seconds that a Device will pause during login if its server busy. Min=1, Max=60, Default=10 |
| AdMaxPasswordAgeEnabled | SwitchParameter | If -AdMaxPasswordAgeEnabled is specified, Age the password. |
| EventLoggingEnabled | SwitchParameter | If -EventLoggingEnabled is specified, event logging is enabled. |
| NonBlockingIoDisabled | SwitchParameter | If -NonBlockingIoDisabled is specified, do not use non-Blocking IO. |
| Ip | string[] | One or more streaming IPv4 Addresses. If more than one address is included they are comma delimited. NOTE that an empty string results in no configured IPv4 addresses |
| Ipv6 | string[] | One or more streaming IPv6 Addresses. If more than one address is included they are comma delimited. NOTE that an empty string results in no configured IPv6 addresses |
| InitialQueryConnectionPoolSize | uint | Initial size of database connection pool for non-transactional queries. Min=1, Max=1000, Default=50 |
| InitialTransactionConnectionPoolSize | uint | Initial size of database connection pool for transactional queries. Min=1, Max=1000, Default=50 |
| MaxQueryConnectionPoolSize | uint | Maximum size of database connection pool for non-transactional queries. Min=1, Max=32767, Default=1000 |
| MaxTransactionConnectionPoolSize | uint | Maximum size of database connection pool for transactional queries. Min=1, Max=32767, Default=1000 |
| RefreshInterval | uint | Interval, in number of seconds, the server should wait before refreshing settings. If set to 0, unused database connections are never released. Min=0, Max=32767, Default=300 |
| UnusedDbConnectionTimeout | uint | Interval, in number of seconds, a connection should go unused before it is to be released. Min=0, Max=32767, Default=300 |
| BusyDbConnectionRetryCount | uint | Number of times a failed database connection will be retried. Min=0, Max=32767, Default=2 |
| BusyDbConnectionRetryInterval | uint | Interval, in number of milliseconds, the server should wait before retrying to connect to a database. Min=0, Max=10000, Default=25 |
| LocalConcurrentIoLimit | uint | Maximum concurrent IO transactions it performs for vDisks that are local. A value of 0 disables the feature. Min=0, Max=128, Default=4 |
| RemoteConcurrentIoLimit | uint | Maximum concurrent IO transactions it performs for vDisks that are remote. A value of 0 disables the feature. Min=0, Max=128, Default=4 |
| LogLevel | uint | Level to perform logging at. Values are: 0 (None), 1 (Fatal), 2 (Error), 3 (Warning), 4 (Info), 5 (Debug), and 6 (Trace). Min=0, Max=6, Default=4 |
| LogFileSizeMax | uint | Maximum size log files can reach in Megabytes. Min=1, Max=50, Default=5 |
| LogFileBackupCopiesMax | uint | Maximum number of log file backups. Min=1, Max=50, Default=4 |
| PowerRating | float | A strictly relative rating of this Server’s capabilities when compared to other Servers in the Store(s) it belongs too; can be used to help tune load balancing. Min=0.1, Max=1000, Default=1 |
| LastCeipUploadAttempt | DateTime | Time that this server last attempted a CEIP upload. Default=Empty |
| LastBugReportAttempt | DateTime | Time that this server last attempted to upload or generate a bug report bundle. Default=Empty |
| LastBugReportStatus | string | Status of the last bug report on this server. Default=”” Max Length=250 |
| LastBugReportResult | string | Status of the last bug report on this server. Default=”” Max Length=4000 |
| LastBugReportSummary | string | Summary of the last bug report on this server. Default=”” Max Length=250 |
| ServerEpoch | UInt64 | Timestamp when the registry data for that server has been re-encrypted with updated encryption scheme. Default=0 |
| SecurityPolicy | uint | SecurityPolicy Default=0 |
| QuicSettings | string | QuicSettings Default=”” Max Length=65535 |
| QuicPort | uint | QuicPort Default=0 |
| QuicServerCertThumbPrint | string | QuicServerCertThumbPrint Default=”” Max Length=65535 |
| QuicCipherSuites | uint | QuicCipherSuites Default=”” |
| QuicStreamPayloadLength | uint | QuicStreamPayloadLength Default=0 |
| TpmKeyType | uint | TPM key type, TPM_ALG_RSA(1), TPM_ALG_ECC(0x23) Default=0 |
| TpmHashAlg | uint | TPM hash algorithm, TPM_ALG_SHA256(0xb), TPM_ALG_SHA384(0xc), TPM_ALG_SHA512(0xd) Default=0 |
| TpmCurveId | uint | TPM ECC curve ID TPM_ECC_NIST_P256(3), TPM_ECC_NIST_P384(4), TPM_ECC_NIST_P521(5) Default=0 |
SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter. PvsServer: If successful, the new PvsServer object is returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Create PvsServer with Minimum Fields
Creates a PvsServer named theServer in theSite.
New-PvsServer -Name theServer -SiteName theSite -Ip 192.168.0.33 192.168.0.34
EXAMPLE 2: Create PvsServer with All Fields
Creates a PvsServer named theServer in theSite with all fields set different than defaults.
New-PvsServer -Name theServer -SiteName theSite -Ip 192.168.0.33 192.168.0.34 -Description "XenServer Server" -AdMaxPasswordAge 10 -LicenseTimeout 60 -VDiskCreatePacing 5 -FirstPort 7910 -LastPort 7930 -ThreadsPerPort 16 -BuffersPerThread 48 -ServerCacheTimeout 15 -IoBurstSize 13632 -MaxTransmissionUnits 502 -MaxBootDevicesAllowed 1000 -MaxBootSeconds 120 -BootPauseSeconds 20 -AdMaxPasswordAgeEnabled -EventLoggingEnabled -NonBlockingIoDisabled -InitialQueryConnectionPoolSize 100 -InitialTransactionConnectionPoolSize 100 -MaxQueryConnectionPoolSize 2000 -MaxTransactionConnectionPoolSize 2000 -RefreshInterval 500 -UnusedDbConnectionTimeout 500 -BusyDbConnectionRetryCount 5 -BusyDbConnectionRetryInterval 50 -LocalConcurrentIoLimit 5 -RemoteConcurrentIoLimit 5 -LogLevel 3 -LogFileSizeMax 10 -LogFileBackupCopiesMax 5 -PowerRating 1.5
New-PvsSite
Create a new Site for the Farm.
All parameters that do not have a Default are required, unless only a few of a group are required.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or SiteName | string | Name of the Site. Max Length=50 |
| Description | string | User description. Default=”” Max Length=250 |
| InventoryFilePollingInterval | uint | The number of seconds between polls for Disk changes in the Stores. Min=1, Max=600, Default=60 |
| EnableDiskUpdate | SwitchParameter | If -EnableDiskUpdate is specified, the Disk Update will be enabled for the Site. By default Disk Update is disabled. |
| DiskUpdateServerId | Guid | GUID of the Disk Update Server for the Site. Not used with DiskUpdateServerName. Default=00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 |
| DiskUpdateServerName | string | Name of the Disk Update Server for the Site. Not used with DiskUpdateServerId. Default=”” |
| MakUser | string | User name used for MAK activation. Default=”” Max Length=64 |
| MakPassword | string | User password used for MAK activation. Default=”” Max Length=64 |
| EnableXsProxy | string | Enable XenServerProxy when set to 1 Default=”” |
| VirtualHostingPoolId | Guid | GUID of the VirtualHostingPool object. |
| VirtualHostingPoolName | string | Name of the VirtualHostingPool object. |
| XsPvsSiteUuid | string | GUID of the XenServer PVS Site. |
SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter. PvsSite: If successful, the new PvsSite object is returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Create PvsSite with Minimum Fields
Creates a PvsSite named theSite.
New-PvsSite -Name theSite
EXAMPLE 2: Create PvsSite with All Fields
Creates a PvsSite named theSite with all fields set different than defaults.
New-PvsSite -Name theSite -Description "XenServer Site" -InventoryFilePollingInterval 100 -EnableDiskUpdate -DiskUpdateServerName theServer -MakUser theMakUser -MakPassword theMakPassword
EXAMPLE 3: Create PvsSite and Assign AuthGroup to it
Creates a PvsSite named theSite and Assigns AuthGroup “AD\PVSSiteAdminGroup” to it.
New-PvsSite -Name theSite | Grant-PvsAuthGroup -AuthGroupName \"AD\PVSSiteAdminGroup\"
New-PvsSiteView
Create a new View for a Site.
All parameters that do not have a Default are required, unless only a few of a group are required.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or SiteViewName | string | Name of the Site View. Max Length=50 |
| SiteId | Guid | GUID of the Site this View is to be a member of. It is not used with SiteName. |
| SiteName | string | Name of the Site this View is to be a member of. It is not used with SiteId. |
| Description | string | User description. Default=”” Max Length=250 |
SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter. PvsSiteView: If successful, the new PvsSiteView object is returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Create PvsSiteView with Minimum Fields
Creates a PvsSiteView named theSiteView in theSite.
New-PvsSiteView -Name theSiteView -SiteName theSite
EXAMPLE 2: Create PvsSiteView with All Fields
Creates a PvsSiteView named theSiteView in theSite with “XenServer SiteView” as the description.
New-PvsSiteView -Name theSiteView -SiteName theSite -Description "XenServer SiteView"
New-PvsStore
Create a new Store for the Farm.
All parameters that do not have a Default are required, unless only a few of a group are required.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or StoreName | string | Name of the Store. Max Length=50 |
| SiteId | Guid | GUID of the Site where Administrators of that Site can change this Store. Not used for Farm Stores. SiteName can be used instead. Default=00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 |
| SiteName | string | Name of the Site where Administrators of that Site can change this Store. Not used for Farm Stores. SiteId can be used instead. Default=”” |
| Description | string | User description. Default=”” Max Length=250 |
| Path | string | Default directory path that the Servers use to access this Store. Max Length=255 |
| CachePath | string[] | Default Cache path(s) that the Servers use with this Store. If none are specified the caches will be placed in the WriteCache subdirectory of the Store path. Default=None |
SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter. PvsStore: If successful, the new PvsStore object is returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Create PvsStore with Minimum Fields
Creates a PvsStore named theStore with network share path.
New-PvsStore -Name theStore -Path "\\thePath\subDirectory"
EXAMPLE 2: Create PvsStore with All Fields
Creates a PvsStore named theStore that only theSite administrators can change with all fields set different than defaults.
New-PvsStore -Name theStore -Path "c:\thePath" -SiteName theSite -Description "Local Server Path Store" -CachePath "c:\thePath\sub1" "c:\thePath\sub2"
New-PvsUpdateTask
Create a new Update Task for a Store.
All parameters that do not have a Default are required, unless only a few of a group are required.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or UpdateTaskName | string | Name of the Update Task. It is unique within the Site. Max Length=50 |
| SiteId | Guid | GUID of the Site that this Update Task is a member of. It is not used with SiteName. |
| SiteName | string | Name of the Site that this Update Task is a member of. It is not used with SiteId. |
| Description | string | User description. Default=”” Max Length=250 |
| Disabled | SwitchParameter | If -Disabled is specified, the updates will not be processed. By default the updates will be processed. |
| Hour | uint | The hour of the day to perform the task. Min=0, Max=23, Default=0 |
| Minute | uint | The minute of the hour to perform the task. Min=0, Max=59, Default=0 |
| Recurrence | uint | The update will reoccur on this schedule. 0 = None, 1 = Daily, 2 = Every Weekday, 3 = Weekly, 4 = Monthly Date, 5 = Monthly Type. Min=0, Max=5, Default=0 |
| DayMask | uint | Days selected values. 1 = Monday, 2 = Tuesday, 4 = Wednesday, 8 = Thursday, 16 = Friday, 32 = Saturday, 64 = Sunday, 128 = Day. Default=0. This is used with Weekly and Monthly Type recurrence. Min=1, Max=255, Default=4 |
| Date | uint[] | Days of the month. Numbers from 1-31 are the only valid values. This is used with Monthly Date recurrence. Default=”” Max Length=83 |
| MonthlyOffset | uint | When to happen monthly. 0 = None, 1 = First, 2 = Second, 3 = Third, 4 = Forth, 5 = Last. This is used with Monthly Type recurrence. Min=0, Max=5, Default=3 |
| EsdType | string | Esd to use. Valid values are SCCM or WSUS. If no value, a custom script is run on the client. Default=”” Max Length=50 |
| PreUpdateScript | string | Script file to run before the update starts. Default=”” Max Length=255 |
| PreVmScript | string | Script file to run before the VM is loaded. Default=”” Max Length=255 |
| PostUpdateScript | string | Script file to run after the update finishes. Default=”” Max Length=255 |
| PostVmScript | string | Script file to run after the VM is unloaded. Default=”” Max Length=255 |
| Domain | string | Domain to add the Disk Update Device(s) to. If not included, the first Domain Controller found on the Server is used. Default=”” Max Length=255 |
| OrganizationUnit | string | Organizational Unit to add the Disk Update Device(s) to. This parameter is optional. If it is not specified, the device is added to the built in Computers container. Child OU’s should be delimited with forward slashes, e.g. “ParentOU/ChildOU”. Special characters in an OU name, such as ‘”’, ‘#’, ‘+’, ‘,’, ‘;’, ‘>’, ‘=’, must be escaped with a backslash. For example, an OU called “commaIn,TheMiddle” must be specified as “commaIn\,TheMiddle”. The old syntax of delimiting child OU’s with a comma is still supported, but deprecated. Note that in this case, the child OU comes first, e.g. “ChildOU,ParentOU”. Default=”” Max Length=255 |
| PostUpdateApprove | uint | Access to place the version in after the update has occurred. 0 = Production, 1 = Test, 2 = Maintenance. Min=0, Max=2, Default=0 |
SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter. PvsUpdateTask: If successful, the new PvsUpdateTask object is returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Create PvsUpdateTask with Minimum Fields
Creates a PvsUpdateTask named theUpdateTask in theSite. Since no EsdType is set, the update.bat in the client install directory will be executed for this task.
New-PvsUpdateTask -Name theUpdateTask -SiteName theSite
EXAMPLE 2: Create PvsUpdateTask for Daily Updates
Creates a PvsUpdateTask named theUpdateTask in theSite for SCCM that occurs every day at midnight.
New-PvsUpdateTask -Name theUpdateTask -SiteName theSite -Description "Every day at Midnight" -Recurrence 1 -Hour 0 -Minute 0 -EsdType SCCM
EXAMPLE 3: Create PvsUpdateTask for Weekday Updates
Creates a PvsUpdateTask named theUpdateTask in theSite for WSUS that occurs every weekday at midnight.
New-PvsUpdateTask -Name theUpdateTask -SiteName theSite -Description "Every weekday at Midnight" -Recurrence 2 -Hour 0 -Minute 0 -EsdType WSUS
EXAMPLE 4: Create PvsUpdateTask for Weekly Updates
Creates a PvsUpdateTask named theUpdateTask in theSite for SCCM that occurs every week on Monday and Friday at 3 AM.
New-PvsUpdateTask -Name theUpdateTask -SiteName theSite -Description "Every week on Monday and Friday at 3 AM" -Recurrence 3 -Hour 3 -Minute 0 -DayMask 17 -EsdType SCCM
EXAMPLE 5: Create PvsUpdateTask for Monthly Updates
Creates a PvsUpdateTask named theUpdateTask in theSite for WSUS that occurs every month on the 1st and 15th at midnight.
New-PvsUpdateTask -Name theUpdateTask -SiteName theSite -Description "Every month on the 1st and 15th at Midnight" -Recurrence 4 -Hour 0 -Minute 0 -Date 1 15 -EsdType WSUS
EXAMPLE 6: Create PvsUpdateTask for Monthly Type Updates
Creates a PvsUpdateTask named theUpdateTask in theSite for SCCM that is disabled and occurs every month on the 2nd Tuesday and Thusday at Midnight.
New-PvsUpdateTask -Name theUpdateTask -SiteName theSite -Description "Every month on the 2nd Tuesday and Thusday at Midnight" -Disabled -Recurrence 5 -Hour 0 -Minute 0 -DayMask 10 -MonthlyOffset 2 -EsdType SCCM
New-PvsVirtualHostingPool
Add a new Virtual Hosting Pool to a Site.
All parameters that do not have a Default are required, unless only a few of a group are required.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or VirtualHostingPoolName | string | Name of the Virtual Hosting Pool. It is unique within the Site. Max Length=50 |
| SiteId | Guid | GUID of the Site that this Virtual Hosting Pool is a member of. It is not used with SiteName. |
| SiteName | string | Name of the Site that this Virtual Hosting Pool is a member of. It is not used with SiteId. |
| Type | uint | Type of the Virtual Hosting Pool. 0 = Citrix XenServer, 1 = Microsoft SCVMM/Hyper-V, 2 = VMWare vSphere/ESX, 3 = Nutanix, 4 = Azure, 5 = GCP. Min=0, Max=255, Default=0 |
| Description | string | User description. Default=”” Max Length=250 |
| Server | string | Name or IP of the Host Server. Max Length=255 |
| Port | uint | Port of the Host Server. Min=80, Max=65534, Default=80 |
| Datacenter | string | Datacenter of the Virtual Hosting Pool. Default=”” Max Length=250 |
| UpdateLimit | uint | Number of updates at the same time. Min=2, Max=1000, Default=1000 |
| UpdateTimeout | uint | Timeout for updates. Min=2, Max=240, Default=60 |
| ShutdownTimeout | uint | Timeout for shutdown. Min=2, Max=30, Default=10 |
| UserName | string | Name to use when logging into the Server. |
| Password | string | Password to use when logging into the Server. |
| XdHostingUnitUuid | Guid | UUID of XenDesktop Hosting Unit Default=00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 |
| PrepopulateEnabled | SwitchParameter | Enable prepopulate when set to true Default=false |
| XsPvsSiteUuid | Guid | UUID of XenServer PVS_site Default=00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 |
| PlatformVersion | string | Hypervisor Host Version Default=”” Max Length=250 |
| XdHcHypervisorConnectionName | string | Hypervisor Connection Name for HCL Connection Details object Default=”” Max Length=250 |
| XdHcHypervisorConnectionUid | string | Hypervisor Connection Uid for HCL Connection Details object Default=”” Max Length=250 |
| XdHcRevision | string | Revision for HCL Connection Details object Default=”” Max Length=250 |
| XdHcCustomProperties | string | Custom Properties for HCL Connection Details object Default=”” Max Length=65535 |
| XdHcSslThumbprints | string | Ssl Thumbprints for HCL Connection Details object Default=”” Max Length=65535 |
| CredentialsUid | string | UUID of any record associated with the credentials Default=”” Max Length=65535 |
| DdcType | uint | Type of the DDC. 0 = Unset, 1 = Citrix Cloud, 2 = customer-managed. Min=0, Max=2, Default=0 |
| EncryptionEpoch | UInt64 | Timestamp of the encryption Key used to encrypt fields Default=0 |
| DisableHostXsProxy | string | True to disable PVS-Accelerator Default=”” |
SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter. PvsVirtualHostingPool: If successful, the new PvsVirtualHostingPool object is returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Create PvsVirtualHostingPool with Minimum Fields
Creates a PvsVirtualHostingPool named theVirtualHostingPool in theSite.
New-PvsVirtualHostingPool -Name theVirtualHostingPool -SiteName theSite -Server 192.168.0.33 -UserName theUserName -Password thePassword
EXAMPLE 2: Create PvsVirtualHostingPool with All Fields
Creates a PvsVirtualHostingPool named theVirtualHostingPool in theSite with all fields set different than defaults.
New-PvsVirtualHostingPool -Name theVirtualHostingPool -SiteName theSite -Server 192.168.0.33 -UserName theUserName -Password thePassword -Type 1 -Description "A VirtualHostingPool" -Port 180 -Datacenter Data -UpperLimit 500 -UpdateTimeout 120 -ShutdownTimeout 20
Remove-PvsAuthGroup
Remove one or more AuthGroup Active Directory or Windows Group names.
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or AuthGroupId | Guid[] | GUID of the AuthGroup to Delete. |
| Name or AuthGroupName | string[] | Name of the AuthGroup to Delete. |
Optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Force | SwitchParameter |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
AuthGroupId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “medium”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “medium” or “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Remove the PvsAuthGroup with Name theAuthGroup
This example removes the PvsAuthGroup named theAuthGroup.
Remove-PvsAuthGroup -Name theAuthGroup
EXAMPLE 2: Remove the PvsAuthGroup with Name theAuthGroup using Pipe
This example uses Get-PvsAuthGroup that returns the PvsAuthGroup named theAuthGroup that is piped to Remove-PvsAuthGroup for removal.
Get-PvsAuthGroup -Name theAuthGroup | Remove-PvsAuthGroup
EXAMPLE 3: Remove All PvsAuthGroup in a Collection Even When Still Used
This example removes all PvsAuthGroup in the Collection named theCollection of the Site named theSite even when the PvsAuthGroup is still being used.
Remove-PvsAuthGroup -SiteName theSite -CollectionName theCollection -Force
CollectionId can be used instead of CollectionName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 4: Remove All Operator PvsAuthGroup in a Collection using Pipe
This example uses Get-PvsAuthGroup that returns a list of Role 400 PvsAuthGroup in the Collection named theCollection of the Site named theSite that is piped to Remove-PvsAuthGroup for removal.
Get-PvsAuthGroup -SiteName theSite -CollectionName theCollection -Fields Role | Where-Object {\$\_.Role -eq 400} | Remove-PvsAuthGroup
CollectionId can be used instead of CollectionName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed. The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. The “Where-Object {$_.Role -eq 400}” only includes PvsAuthGroup with Role equal to 400 (Collection Operator).
Remove-PvsCollection
Remove one or more Collections.
This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or CollectionId | Guid[] | GUID of the Collection to Delete. |
or this is required & resolution
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or CollectionName | string[] |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid[] | |
| SiteName | string[] |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
CollectionId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “medium”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “medium” or “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Remove the PvsCollection with Name theCollection
This example removes the PvsCollection named theCollection in the Site named theSite.
Remove-PvsCollection -Name theCollection -SiteName theSite
Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 2: Remove the PvsCollection with Name theCollection using Pipe
This example uses Get-PvsCollection that returns the PvsCollection named theCollection in the Site named theSite that is piped to Remove-PvsCollection for removal.
Get-PvsCollection -Name theCollection -SiteName theSite | Remove-PvsCollection
Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
Remove-PvsDevice
Remove one or more Devices.
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DeviceId | Guid[] | GUID of the Device to Delete. |
| Name or DeviceName | string[] | Name of the Device to Delete. |
| DeviceMac | PvsPhysicalAddress[] | MAC of the Device to Delete. |
| EkPub | string[] | TPM EK public key of the Device to Delete |
| CollectionId | Guid[] | GUID of the Collection to delete all Devices. |
or this is required & resolution
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| CollectionName | string[] |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid[] | |
| SiteName | string[] |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
DeviceId or CollectionId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “medium”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “medium” or “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Remove the PvsDevice with Name theDevice
This example removes the PvsDevice named theDevice.
Remove-PvsDevice -Name theDevice
EXAMPLE 2: Remove the PvsDevice with Name theDevice using Pipe
This example uses Get-PvsDevice that returns the PvsDevice named theDevice that is piped to Remove-PvsDevice for removal.
Get-PvsDevice -Name theDevice | Remove-PvsDevice
EXAMPLE 3: Remove All PvsDevice in a Collection
This example removes all PvsDevice in the Collection named theCollection of the Site named theSite.
Remove-PvsDevice -SiteName theSite -CollectionName theCollection
CollectionId can be used instead of CollectionName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 4: Remove All Not Active PvsDevice in a Collection using Pipe
This example uses Get-PvsDevice that returns a list of not Active PvsDevice in the Collection named theCollection of the Site named theSite that is piped to Remove-PvsDevice for removal.
Get-PvsDevice -SiteName theSite -CollectionName theCollection -Fields Active | Where-Object {\$\_.Active -eq \$false} | Remove-PvsDevice
CollectionId can be used instead of CollectionName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed. The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. The “Where-Object {$_.Active -eq $false}” only includes PvsDevice with Active equal to false.
Remove-PvsDeviceDiskCacheFile
Remove one or more Disk cache files for Devices.
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DeviceId | Guid[] | GUID of the Device to Delete Disk cache files. |
| Name or DeviceName | string[] | Name of the Device to Delete Disk cache files. |
| DeviceMac | PvsPhysicalAddress[] | MAC of the Device to Delete Disk cache files. |
This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| DiskLocatorId | Guid[] |
or this is required & resolution
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| DiskLocatorName | string[] |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid[] | |
| SiteName | string[] |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| StoreId | Guid[] | |
| StoreName | string[] |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
DeviceId or DiskLocatorId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “medium”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “medium” or “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Remove the PvsDeviceDiskCacheFile for Device with Name theDevice
This example removes the PvsDeviceDiskCacheFile for the Device named theDevice.
Remove-PvsDeviceDiskCacheFile -Name theDevice
EXAMPLE 2: Remove the PvsDeviceDiskCacheFile for the Devices that use the DiskLocator with Name theDiskLocator
This example removes the PvsDeviceDiskCacheFile for the Devices that use DiskLocator named theDiskLocator in Site named theSite and Store named theStore.
Remove-PvsDeviceDiskCacheFile -DiskLocatorName theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore
DiskLocatorId can be used instead of DiskLocatorName so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
Remove-PvsDeviceFromDomain
Remove a Device, all Devices in a Collection or View from a Domain.
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DeviceId | Guid[] | GUID of the Device to Remove from the Domain. |
| Name or DeviceName | string[] | Name of the Device to Remove from the Domain. |
| DeviceMac | PvsPhysicalAddress[] | MAC of the Device to Remove from the Domain. |
| CollectionId | Guid[] | GUID of the Collection to Remove all Devices from the Domain. |
| SiteViewId | Guid[] | GUID of the Site View to Remove all Devices from the Domain. |
| FarmViewId | Guid[] | GUID of the Farm View to Remove all Devices from the Domain. |
| FarmViewName | string[] | Name of the Farm View toRemove all Devices from the Domain. |
or one of these is required & resolutions
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| CollectionName | string[] | |
| SiteViewName | string[] |
Optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Domain | string[] |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid[] | |
| SiteName | string[] |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
DeviceId, CollectionId, SiteViewId or FarmViewId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “medium”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “medium” or “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Remove-PvsDeviceFromDomain for Name
Remove-PvsDeviceFromDomain -Name theDevice
EXAMPLE 2: Remove-PvsDeviceFromDomain for Name with Domain
Remove-PvsDeviceFromDomain -Name theDevice -Domain theDomain
EXAMPLE 3: Remove-PvsDeviceFromDomain for PvsDevice Using Pipe
The Get-PvsDevice output is piped to the Remove-PvsDeviceFromDomain.
Get-PvsDevice -Name theDevice -Fields Guid | Remove-PvsDeviceFromDomain -Domain theDomain -OrganizationUnit theOrganizationUnit
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
EXAMPLE 4: Remove-PvsDeviceFromDomain for FarmViewName
Remove-PvsDeviceFromDomain -FarmViewName theFarmView
EXAMPLE 5: Remove-PvsDeviceFromDomain for FarmViewName with Domain
Remove-PvsDeviceFromDomain -FarmViewName theFarmView -Domain theDomain
EXAMPLE 6: Remove-PvsDeviceFromDomain for PvsFarmView Using Pipe
The Get-PvsFarmView output is piped to the Remove-PvsDeviceFromDomain.
Get-PvsFarmView -Name theFarmView -Fields Guid | Remove-PvsDeviceFromDomain -Domain theDomain -OrganizationUnit theOrganizationUnit
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
EXAMPLE 7: Remove-PvsDeviceFromDomain for CollectionName
Remove-PvsDeviceFromDomain -CollectionName theCollection -SiteName theSite
CollectionId can be used instead of CollectionName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 8: Remove-PvsDeviceFromDomain for CollectionName with Domain
Remove-PvsDeviceFromDomain -CollectionName theCollection -SiteName theSite -Domain theDomain
CollectionId can be used instead of CollectionName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 9: Remove-PvsDeviceFromDomain for PvsCollection Using Pipe
The Get-PvsCollection output is piped to the Remove-PvsDeviceFromDomain.
Get-PvsCollection -Name theCollection -SiteName theSite -Fields Guid | Remove-PvsDeviceFromDomain -Domain theDomain -OrganizationUnit theOrganizationUnit
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 10: Remove-PvsDeviceFromDomain for SiteViewName
Remove-PvsDeviceFromDomain -SiteViewName theSiteView -SiteName theSite
SiteViewId can be used instead of SiteViewName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 11: Remove-PvsDeviceFromDomain for SiteViewName with Domain
Remove-PvsDeviceFromDomain -SiteViewName theSiteView -SiteName theSite -Domain theDomain
SiteViewId can be used instead of SiteViewName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 12: Remove-PvsDeviceFromDomain for PvsSiteView Using Pipe
The Get-PvsSiteView output is piped to the Remove-PvsDeviceFromDomain.
Get-PvsSiteView -Name theSiteView -SiteName theSite -Fields Guid | Remove-PvsDeviceFromDomain -Domain theDomain -OrganizationUnit theOrganizationUnit
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
Remove-PvsDeviceFromView
Remove a Device from a View.
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DeviceId | Guid[] | GUID of the Device to Remove. |
| Name or DeviceName | string[] | Name of the Device to Remove. |
| DeviceMac | PvsPhysicalAddress[] | MAC of the Device to Remove. |
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteViewId | Guid[] | |
| FarmViewId | Guid[] | |
| FarmViewName | string[] |
or this is required & resolution
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteViewName | string[] |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid[] | |
| SiteName | string[] |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
DeviceId, SiteViewId or FarmViewId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Remove-PvsDeviceFromView for PvsDevice to PvsFarmView
Remove-PvsDeviceFromView -Name theDevice -PvsFarmViewName thePvsFarmView
EXAMPLE 2: Remove-PvsDeviceFromView for PvsDevice Using Pipe
The Get-PvsDevice output is piped to the Remove-PvsDeviceFromView.
Get-PvsDevice -Name theDevice -Fields Guid | Remove-PvsDeviceFromView -PvsFarmViewName thePvsFarmView
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
EXAMPLE 3: Remove-PvsDeviceFromView for PvsFarmView Using Pipe
The Get-PvsFarmView output is piped to the Remove-PvsDeviceFromView.
Get-PvsFarmView -Name theFarmView -Fields Guid | Remove-PvsDeviceFromView -Name theDevice
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
EXAMPLE 4: Remove-PvsDeviceFromView for PvsDevice to PvsSiteView
Remove-PvsDeviceFromView -Name theDevice -SiteViewName theSiteView -SiteName theSite
SiteViewId can be used instead of SiteViewName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 5: Remove-PvsDeviceFromView for PvsDevice Using Pipe
The Get-PvsDevice output is piped to the Remove-PvsDeviceFromView.
Get-PvsDevice -Name theDevice -Fields Guid | Remove-PvsDeviceFromView -SiteViewName theSiteView -SiteName theSite
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. SiteViewId can be used instead of SiteViewName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 6: Remove-PvsDeviceFromView for PvsSiteView Using Pipe
The Get-PvsSiteView output is piped to the Remove-PvsDeviceFromView.
Get-PvsSiteView -Name theSiteView -SiteName theSite -Fields Guid | Remove-PvsDeviceFromView -Name theDevice
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. SiteViewId can be used instead of SiteViewName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
Remove-PvsDirectory
Remove a Directory on the Server specified.
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or ServerId | Guid[] | GUID of the Server to remove a Directory from. The directory must be empty to be removed. |
| Name or ServerName | string[] | Name of the Server to remove a Directory from. The directory must be empty to be removed. |
This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Path | string[] |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
ServerId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “medium”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “medium” or “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Remove-PvsDirectory for Name
Remove-PvsDirectory -Name theServer -Path "C:\directory\subdirectory"
EXAMPLE 2: Remove-PvsDirectory for PvsServer Using Pipe
The Get-PvsServer output is piped to the Remove-PvsDirectory.
Get-PvsServer -Name theServer -Fields Guid | Remove-PvsDirectory -Path \"C:\directory\subdirectory\"
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
Remove-PvsDiskFromUpdateTask
Remove a Disk from an Update Task.
This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DiskLocatorId | Guid[] | GUID of the Disk Locator to Remove. |
or this is required & resolution
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or DiskLocatorName | string[] |
These are optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| UpdateTaskId | Guid[] | |
| UpdateTaskName | string[] |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid[] | |
| SiteName | string[] |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| StoreId | Guid[] | |
| StoreName | string[] |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
DiskLocatorId or UpdateTaskId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “medium”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “medium” or “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Remove-DiskFromUpdateTask for PvsDiskLocator to PvsUpdateTask
Remove-DiskFromUpdateTask -Name theDiskLocator -UpdateTaskName theUpdateTask -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore
UpdateTaskId can be used instead of UpdateTaskName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 2: Remove-DiskFromUpdateTask for PvsDiskLocator Using Pipe
The Get-PvsDiskLocator output is piped to the Remove-DiskFromUpdateTask.
Get-PvsDiskLocator -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore -Fields Guid | Remove-DiskFromUpdateTask -UpdateTaskName theUpdateTask -SiteName theSite
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
EXAMPLE 3: Remove-DiskFromUpdateTask for PvsUpdateTask Using Pipe
The Get-PvsUpdateTask output is piped to the Remove-DiskFromUpdateTask.
Get-PvsUpdateTask -Name theUpdateTask -SiteName theSite -Fields Guid | Remove-DiskFromUpdateTask -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
Remove-PvsDiskLocator
Remove one or more Disk Locators.
This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DiskLocatorId | Guid[] | GUID of the Disk Locator to Delete. |
or one of these is required & resolutions
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or DiskLocatorName | string[] | |
| StoreId | Guid[] | |
| StoreName | string[] |
Optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| DeleteDiskFile | SwitchParameter |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid[] | |
| SiteName | string[] |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| StoreId | Guid[] | |
| StoreName | string[] |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
DiskLocatorId or StoreId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “medium”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “medium” or “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Remove the PvsDiskLocator with Name theDiskLocator
This example removes the PvsDiskLocator named theDiskLocator in the Site named theSite and Store named theStore and deletes the vDisk file.
Remove-PvsDiskLocator -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore -DeleteDiskFile
Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
EXAMPLE 2: Remove the PvsDiskLocator with Name theDiskLocator using Pipe
This example uses Get-PvsDiskLocator that returns the PvsDiskLocator named theDiskLocator in the Site named theSite and Store named theStore that is piped to Remove-PvsDiskLocator for removal.
Get-PvsDiskLocator -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore | Remove-PvsDiskLocator
Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
Remove-PvsDiskLocatorFromDevice
Remove a Disk Locator from a Device, Collection, View, or Site.
This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DiskLocatorId | Guid[] | GUID of the Disk Locator to Remove. |
or this is required & resolution
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or DiskLocatorName | string[] |
These are optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| DeviceId | Guid[] | |
| DeviceName | string[] | |
| DeviceMac | PvsPhysicalAddress[] | |
| CollectionId | Guid[] | |
| SiteViewId | Guid[] | |
| FarmViewId | Guid[] | |
| FarmViewName | string[] |
These are optional & resolutions
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| CollectionName | string[] | |
| SiteViewName | string[] |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid[] | |
| SiteName | string[] |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| StoreId | Guid[] | |
| StoreName | string[] |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
DiskLocatorId, DeviceId, CollectionId, SiteViewId or FarmViewId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “medium”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “medium” or “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Remove-PvsDiskLocatorFromDevice for PvsDiskLocator to PvsDevice
Remove-PvsDiskLocatorFromDevice -Name theDiskLocator -DeviceName theDevice -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore
Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
EXAMPLE 2: Remove-PvsDiskLocatorFromDevice for PvsDiskLocator Using Pipe
The Get-PvsDiskLocator output is piped to the Remove-PvsDiskLocatorFromDevice.
Get-PvsDiskLocator -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore -Fields Guid | Remove-PvsDiskLocatorFromDevice -DeviceName theDevice
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
EXAMPLE 3: Remove-PvsDiskLocatorFromDevice for PvsDevice Using Pipe
The Get-PvsDevice output is piped to the Remove-PvsDiskLocatorFromDevice.
Get-PvsDevice -Name theDevice -Fields Guid | Remove-PvsDiskLocatorFromDevice -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStoreName
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
EXAMPLE 4: Remove-PvsDiskLocatorFromDevice for PvsDiskLocator to PvsCollection
Remove-PvsDiskLocatorFromDevice -Name theDiskLocator -CollectionName theCollection -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore
EXAMPLE 5: Remove-PvsDiskLocatorFromDevice for PvsDiskLocator Using Pipe
The Get-PvsDiskLocator output is piped to the Remove-PvsDiskLocatorFromDevice.
Get-PvsDiskLocator -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore -Fields Guid | Remove-PvsDiskLocatorFromDevice -CollectionName theCollection -SiteName theSite
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
EXAMPLE 6: Remove-PvsDiskLocatorFromDevice for PvsCollection Using Pipe
The Get-PvsCollection output is piped to the Remove-PvsDiskLocatorFromDevice.
Get-PvsCollection -Name theCollection -SiteName theSite -Fields Guid | Remove-PvsDiskLocatorFromDevice -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStoreName
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
EXAMPLE 7: Remove-PvsDiskLocatorFromDevice for PvsDiskLocator to PvsFarmView
Remove-PvsDiskLocatorFromDevice -Name theDiskLocator -FarmViewName theFarmView -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore
Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
EXAMPLE 8: Remove-PvsDiskLocatorFromDevice for PvsDiskLocator Using Pipe
The Get-PvsDiskLocator output is piped to the Remove-PvsDiskLocatorFromDevice.
Get-PvsDiskLocator -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore -Fields Guid | Remove-PvsDiskLocatorFromDevice -FarmViewName theFarmView
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
EXAMPLE 9: Remove-PvsDiskLocatorFromDevice for PvsFarmView Using Pipe
The Get-PvsFarmView output is piped to the Remove-PvsDiskLocatorFromDevice.
Get-PvsFarmView -Name theFarmView -Fields Guid | Remove-PvsDiskLocatorFromDevice -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStoreName
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
EXAMPLE 10: Remove-PvsDiskLocatorFromDevice for PvsDiskLocator to PvsSiteView
Remove-PvsDiskLocatorFromDevice -Name theDiskLocator -SiteViewName theSiteView -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore
EXAMPLE 11: Remove-PvsDiskLocatorFromDevice for PvsDiskLocator Using Pipe
The Get-PvsDiskLocator output is piped to the Remove-PvsDiskLocatorFromDevice.
Get-PvsDiskLocator -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore -Fields Guid | Remove-PvsDiskLocatorFromDevice -SiteViewName theSiteView -SiteName theSite
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
EXAMPLE 12: Remove-PvsDiskLocatorFromDevice for PvsSiteView Using Pipe
The Get-PvsSiteView output is piped to the Remove-PvsDiskLocatorFromDevice.
Get-PvsSiteView -Name theSiteView -SiteName theSite -Fields Guid | Remove-PvsDiskLocatorFromDevice -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStoreName
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
Remove-PvsDiskUpdateDevice
Remove one or more Disk Update Devices.
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DeviceId | Guid[] | GUID of the Disk Update Device to Delete. |
| Name or DeviceName | string[] | Name of the Disk Update Device to Delete. |
| DeviceMac | PvsPhysicalAddress[] | MAC of the Disk Update Device to Delete. |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
DeviceId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “medium”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “medium” or “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Remove the PvsDiskUpdateDevice with Name theDevice
This example removes the PvsDiskUpdateDevice named theDevice.
Remove-PvsDiskUpdateDevice -Name theDevice
EXAMPLE 2: Remove the PvsDiskUpdateDevice with Name theDevice using Pipe
This example uses Get-PvsDiskUpdateDevice that returns the PvsDiskUpdateDevice named theDevice that is piped to Remove-PvsDiskUpdateDevice for removal.
Get-PvsDiskUpdateDevice -Name theDevice | Remove-PvsDiskUpdateDevice
EXAMPLE 3: Remove All Not Active PvsDiskUpdateDevice for a DiskLocator using Pipe
This example uses Get-PvsDiskUpdateDevice that returns a list of not Active PvsDiskUpdateDevice for the DiskLocator named theDiskLocator of the Site named theSite and Store named theStore that is piped to Remove-PvsDiskUpdateDevice for removal.
Get-PvsDiskUpdateDevice -DiskLocatorName theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore -Fields Active | Where-Object {\$\_.Active -eq \$false} | Remove-PvsDiskUpdateDevice
DiskLocatorId can be used instead of DiskLocatorName so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed. The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. The “Where-Object {$_.Active -eq $false}” only includes PvsDiskUpdateDevice with Active equal to false.
Remove-PvsDiskVersion
Remove the latest Disk version or no longer needed version if no Devices are currently booted from that version.
This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DiskLocatorId | Guid[] | GUID of the Disk Locator to Delete the Version from. |
or this is required & resolution
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or DiskLocatorName | string[] |
Optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Version | uint |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid[] | |
| SiteName | string[] |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| StoreId | Guid[] | |
| StoreName | string[] |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
(DiskLocatorId and Version) or DiskLocatorId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “medium”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “medium” or “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Remove the Highest PvsDiskVersion with Name theDiskLocator
This example removes the highest PvsDiskVersion for DiskLocator named theDiskLocator in the Site named theSite and Store named theStore.
Remove-PvsDiskVersion -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore
Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
EXAMPLE 2: Remove the highest PvsDiskVersion with Name theDiskLocator using Pipe
This example uses Get-PvsDiskLocator that returns the PvsDiskLocator named theDiskLocator in the Site named theSite and Store named theStore that is piped to Remove-PvsDiskVersion for removal of the highest version.
Get-PvsDiskLocator -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore | Remove-PvsDiskVersion
Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
EXAMPLE 3: Remove the Version PvsDiskVersion with Name theDiskLocator
This example removes the Version PvsDiskVersion for DiskLocator named theDiskLocator in the Site named theSite and Store named theStore.
Remove-PvsDiskVersion -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore -Version 5
Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
EXAMPLE 4: Remove the Version PvsDiskVersion with Name theDiskLocator using Pipe
This example uses Get-PvsDiskVersion that returns the Version PvsDiskVersion for DiskLocator named theDiskLocator in the Site named theSite and Store named theStore that is piped to Remove-PvsDiskVersion for removal of the specified version.
Get-PvsDiskVersion -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore -Version 5 | Remove-PvsDiskVersion
Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
Remove-PvsFarmView
Remove one or more Views from the Farm.
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or FarmViewId | Guid[] | GUID of the Farm View to Delete. |
| Name or FarmViewName | string[] | Name of the Farm View to Delete. |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
FarmViewId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “medium”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “medium” or “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Remove the PvsFarmView with Name theFarmView
This example removes the PvsFarmView named theFarmView.
Remove-PvsFarmView -Name theFarmView
EXAMPLE 2: Remove the PvsFarmView with Name theFarmView using Pipe
This example uses Get-PvsFarmView that returns the PvsFarmView named theFarmView that is piped to Remove-PvsFarmView for removal.
Get-PvsFarmView -Name theFarmView | Remove-PvsFarmView
Remove-PvsServer
Remove one or more Servers.
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or ServerId | Guid[] | GUID of the Server to Delete. |
| Name or ServerName | string[] | Name of the Server to Delete. |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
ServerId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “medium”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “medium” or “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Remove the PvsServer with Name theServer
This example removes the PvsServer named theServer.
Remove-PvsServer -Name theServer
EXAMPLE 2: Remove the PvsServer with Name theServer using Pipe
This example uses Get-PvsServer that returns the PvsServer named theServer that is piped to Remove-PvsServer for removal.
Get-PvsServer -Name theServer | Remove-PvsServer
Remove-PvsServerStore
Remove the connection from Servers to Stores.
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or ServerId | Guid[] | GUID of a Server that uses the path to get to the Store. |
| Name or ServerName | string[] | Name of a Server that uses the path to get to the Store. |
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| StoreId | Guid[] | |
| StoreName | string[] |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
ServerId or StoreId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “medium”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “medium” or “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Remove the PvsServerStore with Name theServer/theStore
This example removes the PvsServerStore for the Server named theServer and Store named theStore.
Remove-PvsServerStore -Name theServer -StoreName theStore
EXAMPLE 2: Remove the PvsServerStore with Name theServer/theStore using Pipe
This example uses Get-PvsServer that returns the PvsServer named theServer that is piped to Remove-PvsServerStore with StoreName theStore for removal.
Get-PvsServer -Name theServer | Remove-PvsServerStore -StoreName theStore
Remove-PvsSite
Remove one or more Sites.
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or SiteId | Guid[] | GUID of the Site to Delete. |
| Name or SiteName | string[] | Name of the Site to Delete. |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
SiteId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “medium”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “medium” or “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Remove the PvsSite with Name theSite
This example removes the PvsSite named theSite.
Remove-PvsSite -Name theSite
EXAMPLE 2: Remove the PvsSite with Name theSite using Pipe
This example uses Get-PvsSite that returns the PvsSite named theSite that is piped to Remove-PvsSite for removal.
Get-PvsSite -Name theSite | Remove-PvsSite
Remove-PvsSiteView
Remove one or more Views from Sites.
This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or SiteViewId | Guid[] | GUID of the Site View to Delete. |
or this is required & resolution
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or SiteViewName | string[] |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid[] | |
| SiteName | string[] |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
SiteViewId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “medium”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “medium” or “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Remove the PvsSiteView with Name theSiteView
This example removes the PvsSiteView named theSiteView in the Site named theSite.
Remove-PvsSiteView -Name theSiteView -SiteName theSite
Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 2: Remove the PvsSiteView with Name theSiteView using Pipe
This example uses Get-PvsSiteView that returns the PvsSiteView named theSiteView in the Site named theSite that is piped to Remove-PvsSiteView for removal.
Get-PvsSiteView -Name theSiteView -SiteName theSite | Remove-PvsSiteView
Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
Remove-PvsStore
Remove one or more Stores.
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or StoreId | Guid[] | GUID of the Store to Delete. |
| Name or StoreName | string[] | Name of the Store to Delete. |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
StoreId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “medium”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “medium” or “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Remove the PvsStore with Name theStore
This example removes the PvsStore named theStore.
Remove-PvsStore -Name theStore
EXAMPLE 2: Remove the PvsStore with Name theStore using Pipe
This example uses Get-PvsStore that returns the PvsStore named theStore that is piped to Remove-PvsStore for removal.
Get-PvsStore -Name theStore | Remove-PvsStore
Remove-PvsUpdateTask
Remove one or more Update Tasks from Sites.
This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or UpdateTaskId | Guid[] | GUID of the Update Task to Delete. |
or this is required & resolution
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or UpdateTaskName | string[] |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid[] | |
| SiteName | string[] |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
UpdateTaskId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “medium”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “medium” or “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Remove the PvsUpdateTask with Name theUpdateTask
This example removes the PvsUpdateTask named theUpdateTask in the Site named theSite.
Remove-PvsUpdateTask -Name theUpdateTask -SiteName theSite
Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 2: Remove the PvsUpdateTask with Name theUpdateTask using Pipe
This example uses Get-PvsUpdateTask that returns the PvsUpdateTask named theUpdateTask in the Site named theSite that is piped to Remove-PvsUpdateTask for removal.
Get-PvsUpdateTask -Name theUpdateTask -SiteName theSite | Remove-PvsUpdateTask
Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
Remove-PvsVirtualHostingPool
Remove one or more Virtual Hosting Pools from Sites.
This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or VirtualHostingPoolId | Guid[] | GUID of the Virtual Hosting Pool to Delete. |
or this is required & resolution
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or VirtualHostingPoolName | string[] |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid[] | |
| SiteName | string[] |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
VirtualHostingPoolId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “medium”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “medium” or “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Remove the PvsVirtualHostingPool with Name theVirtualHostingPool
This example removes the PvsVirtualHostingPool named theVirtualHostingPool in the Site named theSite.
Remove-PvsVirtualHostingPool -Name theVirtualHostingPool -SiteName theSite
Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 2: Remove the PvsVirtualHostingPool with Name theVirtualHostingPool using Pipe
This example uses Get-PvsVirtualHostingPool that returns the PvsVirtualHostingPool named theVirtualHostingPool in the Site named theSite that is piped to Remove-PvsVirtualHostingPool for removal.
Get-PvsVirtualHostingPool -Name theVirtualHostingPool -SiteName theSite | Remove-PvsVirtualHostingPool
Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
Reset-PvsDatabase
Cause the database location to be reloaded.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Reset-PvsDatabase
Reset-PvsDatabase
Reset-PvsDeviceForDomain
Reset a Device, all Devices in a Collection or View for a Domain.
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DeviceId | Guid[] | GUID of the Device to Reset for the Domain. |
| Name or DeviceName | string[] | Name of the Device to Reset for the Domain. |
| DeviceMac | PvsPhysicalAddress[] | MAC of the Device to Reset for the Domain. |
| CollectionId | Guid[] | GUID of the Collection to Reset all Devices for the Domain. |
| SiteViewId | Guid[] | GUID of the Site View to Reset all Devices for the Domain. |
| FarmViewId | Guid[] | GUID of the Farm View to Reset all Devices for the Domain. |
| FarmViewName | string[] | Name of the Farm View to Reset all Devices for the Domain. |
or one of these is required & resolutions
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| CollectionName | string[] | |
| SiteViewName | string[] |
Optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Domain | string[] | |
| OrganizationUnit | string[] |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid[] | |
| SiteName | string[] |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
DeviceId, CollectionId, SiteViewId or FarmViewId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “medium”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “medium” or “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Reset-PvsDeviceForDomain for Name
Reset-PvsDeviceForDomain -Name theDevice
EXAMPLE 2: Reset-PvsDeviceForDomain for Name with Domain
Reset-PvsDeviceForDomain -Name theDevice -Domain theDomain
EXAMPLE 3: Reset-PvsDeviceForDomain for Name with Domain and OrganizationUnit
Reset-PvsDeviceForDomain -Name theDevice -Domain theDomain -OrganizationUnit theOrganizationUnit
EXAMPLE 4: Reset-PvsDeviceForDomain for PvsDevice Using Pipe
The Get-PvsDevice output is piped to the Reset-PvsDeviceForDomain.
Get-PvsDevice -Name theDevice -Fields Guid | Reset-PvsDeviceForDomain -Domain theDomain -OrganizationUnit theOrganizationUnit
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
EXAMPLE 5: Reset-PvsDeviceForDomain for FarmViewName
Reset-PvsDeviceForDomain -FarmViewName theFarmView
EXAMPLE 6: Reset-PvsDeviceForDomain for FarmViewName with Domain
Reset-PvsDeviceForDomain -FarmViewName theFarmView -Domain theDomain
EXAMPLE 7: Reset-PvsDeviceForDomain for FarmViewName with Domain and OrganizationUnit
Reset-PvsDeviceForDomain -FarmViewName theFarmView -Domain theDomain -OrganizationUnit theOrganizationUnit
EXAMPLE 8: Reset-PvsDeviceForDomain for PvsFarmView Using Pipe
The Get-PvsFarmView output is piped to the Reset-PvsDeviceForDomain.
Get-PvsFarmView -Name theFarmView -Fields Guid | Reset-PvsDeviceForDomain -Domain theDomain -OrganizationUnit theOrganizationUnit
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
EXAMPLE 9: Reset-PvsDeviceForDomain for CollectionName
Reset-PvsDeviceForDomain -CollectionName theCollection -SiteName theSite
CollectionId can be used instead of CollectionName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 10: Reset-PvsDeviceForDomain for CollectionName with Domain
Reset-PvsDeviceForDomain -CollectionName theCollection -SiteName theSite -Domain theDomain
CollectionId can be used instead of CollectionName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 11: Reset-PvsDeviceForDomain for CollectionName with Domain and OrganizationUnit
Reset-PvsDeviceForDomain -CollectionName theCollection -SiteName theSite -Domain theDomain -OrganizationUnit theOrganizationUnit
CollectionId can be used instead of CollectionName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 12: Reset-PvsDeviceForDomain for PvsCollection Using Pipe
The Get-PvsCollection output is piped to the Reset-PvsDeviceForDomain.
Get-PvsCollection -Name theCollection -SiteName theSite -Fields Guid | Reset-PvsDeviceForDomain -Domain theDomain -OrganizationUnit theOrganizationUnit
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 13: Reset-PvsDeviceForDomain for SiteViewName
Reset-PvsDeviceForDomain -SiteViewName theSiteView -SiteName theSite
SiteViewId can be used instead of SiteViewName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 14: Reset-PvsDeviceForDomain for SiteViewName with Domain
Reset-PvsDeviceForDomain -SiteViewName theSiteView -SiteName theSite -Domain theDomain
SiteViewId can be used instead of SiteViewName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 15: Reset-PvsDeviceForDomain for SiteViewName with Domain and OrganizationUnit
Reset-PvsDeviceForDomain -SiteViewName theSiteView -SiteName theSite -Domain theDomain -OrganizationUnit theOrganizationUnit
SiteViewId can be used instead of SiteViewName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 16: Reset-PvsDeviceForDomain for PvsSiteView Using Pipe
The Get-PvsSiteView output is piped to the Reset-PvsDeviceForDomain.
Get-PvsSiteView -Name theSiteView -SiteName theSite -Fields Guid | Reset-PvsDeviceForDomain -Domain theDomain -OrganizationUnit theOrganizationUnit
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
Restart-PvsStreamService
Restart the Stream Service on a Server or all Servers in a Site.
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or ServerId | Guid[] | GUID of the Server to restart the Stream Service. |
| Name or ServerName | string[] | Name of the Server to restart the Stream Service. |
| SiteId | Guid[] | GUID of the Site to restart the Stream Service on all Servers. |
| SiteName | string[] | Name of the Site to restart the Stream Service on all Servers. |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
ServerId or SiteId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “medium”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “medium” or “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Restart-PvsStreamService for Name
Restart-PvsStreamService -Name theServer
EXAMPLE 2: Restart-PvsStreamService for PvsServer Using Pipe
The Get-PvsServer output is piped to the Restart-PvsStreamService.
Get-PvsServer -Name theServer -Fields Guid | Restart-PvsStreamService
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
EXAMPLE 3: Restart-PvsStreamService for SiteName
Restart-PvsStreamService -SiteName theSite
EXAMPLE 4: Restart-PvsStreamService for PvsSite Using Pipe
The Get-PvsSite output is piped to the Restart-PvsStreamService.
Get-PvsSite -Name theSite -Fields Guid | Restart-PvsStreamService
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
Revoke-PvsAuthGroup
Remove Farm, Site or Collection Authorization for an AuthGroup. If no Site or Collection is specified, Farm Authorization is removed for the AuthGroup.
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or AuthGroupId | Guid[] | GUID of the AuthGroup to remove Authorization for. |
| Name or AuthGroupName | string[] | Name of the AuthGroup to remove Authorization for. |
These are optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid[] | |
| SiteName | string[] | |
| CollectionId | Guid[] |
or this is optional & resolution
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| CollectionName | string[] |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid[] | |
| SiteName | string[] |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
AuthGroupId, SiteId or CollectionId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “medium”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “medium” or “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Revoke-PvsAuthGroup for PvsAuthGroup to PvsFarm
Revoke-PvsAuthGroup -Name theAuthGroup
EXAMPLE 2: Revoke-PvsAuthGroup for PvsAuthGroup Using Pipe
The Get-PvsAuthGroup output is piped to the Revoke-PvsAuthGroup.
Get-PvsAuthGroup -Name theAuthGroup -Fields Guid | Revoke-PvsAuthGroup
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
EXAMPLE 3: Revoke-PvsAuthGroup for PvsAuthGroup to PvsSite
Revoke-PvsAuthGroup -Name theAuthGroup -SiteName theSite
EXAMPLE 4: Revoke-PvsAuthGroup for PvsAuthGroup Using Pipe
The Get-PvsAuthGroup output is piped to the Revoke-PvsAuthGroup.
Get-PvsAuthGroup -Name theAuthGroup -Fields Guid | Revoke-PvsAuthGroup -SiteName theSite
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
EXAMPLE 5: Revoke-PvsAuthGroup for PvsSite Using Pipe
The Get-PvsSite output is piped to the Revoke-PvsAuthGroup.
Get-PvsSite -Name theSite -Fields Guid | Revoke-PvsAuthGroup -Name theAuthGroup
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
EXAMPLE 6: Revoke-PvsAuthGroup for PvsAuthGroup to PvsCollection
Revoke-PvsAuthGroup -Name theAuthGroup -CollectionName theCollection -SiteName theSite
CollectionId can be used instead of CollectionName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 7: Revoke-PvsAuthGroup for PvsAuthGroup Using Pipe
The Get-PvsAuthGroup output is piped to the Revoke-PvsAuthGroup.
Get-PvsAuthGroup -Name theAuthGroup -Fields Guid | Revoke-PvsAuthGroup -CollectionName theCollection -SiteName theSite
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. CollectionId can be used instead of CollectionName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 8: Revoke-PvsAuthGroup for PvsCollection Using Pipe
The Get-PvsCollection output is piped to the Revoke-PvsAuthGroup.
Get-PvsCollection -Name theCollection -SiteName theSite -Fields Guid | Revoke-PvsAuthGroup -Name theAuthGroup
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
Set-PvsAuthGroup
Set AuthGroup(s) changed values from PvsAuthGroup object(s), or set one or more field values for a PvsAuthGroup.
Required PvsAuthGroup AuthGroup: PvsAuthGroup object(s) with changed property value(s) to be set. The object(s) can come from a pipeline. These values are in the PvsAuthGroup object, and only will be set if the value has changed.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or AuthGroupName | string | Name of the Active Directory or Windows Group. Max Length=450 |
| Description | string | User description. Default=”” Max Length=250 |
| IsReadOnly | bool | Indicates whether the administrative role is read-only(true) or read-write(false). Default=false |
When AuthGroup is not passed, the parameters below are used: One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or AuthGroupId | Guid | GUID of the AuthGroup to Set. |
| Name or AuthGroupName | string | Name of the AuthGroup to Set. |
Optional field values to set:
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| NewName | string | Name of the Active Directory or Windows Group. Max Length=450 |
| Description | string | User description. Default=”” Max Length=250 |
| IsReadOnly | bool | Indicates whether the administrative role is read-only(true) or read-write(false). Default=false |
Optional SwitchParameter PassThru: If -PassThru is specified, the resulting PvsAuthGroup object(s) are returned. SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Set PvsAuthGroup for Individual Fields
Get the PvsAuthGroup into a $o variable. Change the $o field values and then Set the PvsAuthGroup with the result.
$o = Get-PvsAuthGroup -Name oldName -Fields Name
$o.Name = "newName"
Set-PvsAuthGroup $o
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
EXAMPLE 2: Set PvsAuthGroup for a Field Using Pipe
Get the PvsAuthGroup into a $o variable. Change a $o field to the correct value and then Set the PvsAuthGroup with the result.
Get-PvsAuthGroup -Name oldName -Fields Name | foreach { \$o = \$\_; \$o.Name = \"newName\"; \$o } | Set-PvsAuthGroup
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. The “foreach { $o = $_; $o.X = Y; $o }” sets the field X to value Y and returns the object again so it can be piped to the Set command for update.
Set-PvsCeipData
Set Ceip changed values from a PvsCeip object, or set one or more field values for a PvsCeip.
Required PvsCeipData CeipData: PvsCeipData object(s) with changed property value(s) to be set. The object(s) can come from a pipeline. These values are in the PvsCeipData object, and only will be set if the value has changed.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Enabled | uint | 1 if CEIP is enabled, otherwise 0. Min=0, Max=1 |
| NextUpload | DateTime | Date and time next CEIP upload is due if enabled is 1. Default=Empty |
| InProgress | uint | 1 if an upload is currently in progress, otherwise 0. Default=0 |
| ServerId | Guid | ID of server that is currently uploading, null if InProgress is 0. Default=00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 |
| OneTimeUpload | uint | 1 to perform a one time upload. Default=0 |
When CeipData is not passed, the parameters below are used: Optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Uuid | string | CEIP UUID of this Farm. This is optional since there is only one. |
Optional field values to set:
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Enabled | uint | 1 if CEIP is enabled, otherwise 0. Min=0, Max=1 |
| NextUpload | DateTime | Date and time next CEIP upload is due if enabled is 1. Default=Empty |
| InProgress | uint | 1 if an upload is currently in progress, otherwise 0. Default=0 |
| ServerId | Guid | ID of server that is currently uploading, null if InProgress is 0. Default=00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 |
| OneTimeUpload | uint | 1 to perform a one time upload. Default=0 |
Optional SwitchParameter PassThru: If -PassThru is specified, the resulting PvsCeipData object(s) are returned. SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Set PvsCeipData for Individual Fields
Get the PvsCeipData into a $o variable. Change the $o field values and then Set the PvsCeipData with the result.
$o = Get-PvsCeipData -Fields Enabled, NextUpload
$o.Enabled = $true
$o.NextUpload = "2016-01-14 15:52:00"
Set-PvsCeipData $o
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
EXAMPLE 2: Set PvsCeipData for a Field Using Pipe
Get the PvsCeipData into a $o variable for the field that has the wrong value. Change the $o field to the correct value and then Set the PvsCeipData with the result.
Get-PvsCeipData -Fields Enabled | Where-Object {\$\_.Enabled -ne \$false} | foreach { \$o = \$\_; \$o.Enabled = \$false; \$o } | Set-PvsCeipData
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. The “foreach { $o = $_; $o.X = Y; $o }” sets the field X to value Y and returns the object again so it can be piped to the Set command for update.
Set-PvsCisData
Set one or more field values for CIS data.
Required PvsCisData CisData: PvsCisData object(s) with changed property value(s) to be set. The object(s) can come from a pipeline. These values are in the PvsCisData object, and only will be set if the value has changed.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| UserName | string | Username used to obtain the token Default=”” Max Length=255 |
| Path | string | Path where the last problem report bundle was saved Default=”” Max Length=255 |
| Password | string | Password of the user required to obtain the token. This is required only by Set and Add |
When CisData is not passed, the parameters below are used: Optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or CisDataId | Guid | CIS UUID of this Farm. This is optional since there is only a single record. |
Optional field values to set:
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| UserName | string | Username used to obtain the token Default=”” Max Length=255 |
| Path | string | Path where the last problem report bundle was saved Default=”” Max Length=255 |
| Password | string | Password of the user required to obtain the token. This is required only by Set and Add |
Optional SwitchParameter PassThru: If -PassThru is specified, the resulting PvsCisData object(s) are returned. SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Set PvsCisData for Individual Fields
Get the PvsCisData into a $o variable. Change the $o field values and then Set the PvsCisData with the result.
$o = Get-PvsCisData -Fields UserName, UploadToken
$o.UserName = userName
$o.UploadToken = token
Set-PvsCisData $o
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
EXAMPLE 2: Set PvsCisData for a Field Using Pipe
Get the PvsCisData into a $o variable for the field that has the wrong value. Change the $o field to the correct value and then Set the PvsCisData with the result.
Get-PvsCisData -Fields UserName | Where-Object {\$\_.UserName -ne newUserName} | foreach { \$o = \$\_; \$o.UserName = newUserName; \$o } | Set-PvsCisData
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. The “foreach { $o = $_; $o.X = Y; $o }” sets the field X to value Y and returns the object again so it can be piped to the Set command for update.
Set-PvsCollection
Set Collection(s) changed values from PvsCollection object(s), or set one or more field values for a PvsCollection.
Required PvsCollection Collection: PvsCollection object(s) with changed property value(s) to be set. The object(s) can come from a pipeline. These values are in the PvsCollection object, and only will be set if the value has changed.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or CollectionName | string | Name of the Collection. It is unique within the Site. Max Length=50 |
| Description | string | User description. Default=”” Max Length=250 |
| TemplateDeviceId | Guid | GUID of a Device in the Collection whose settings are used for initial values of new Devices. Not used with templateDeviceName. Default=00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 |
| TemplateDeviceName | string | Name of a Device in the Collection whose settings are used for initial values of new Devices. Not used with TemplateDeviceId. Default=”” |
| LastAutoAddDeviceNumber | uint | The Device Number of the last Auto Added Device. Default=0 |
| Enabled | bool | True when Devices in the Collection can be booted, false otherwise. Default=true |
| AutoAddPrefix | string | The string put before the Device Number for Auto Add. Default=”” ASCII computer name characters no end digit Max Length=12 |
| AutoAddSuffix | string | The string put after the Device Number for Auto Add. Default=”” ASCII computer name characters no begin digit Max Length=12 |
| AutoAddZeroFill | bool | True when zeros be placed before the Device Number up to the AutoAddNumberLength for Auto Add, false otherwise. Default=true |
| AutoAddNumberLength | uint | The maximum length of the Device Number for Auto Add. This length plus the AutoAddPrefix length plus the AutoAddSuffix length must be less than 16. Required that ((lenautoAddPrefix+lenautoAddSuffix)+AutoAddNumberLength)<=15. Min=3, Max=9, Default=4 |
| ProvisioningType | uint | The provisioning facility which created the Devices in this Collection. 0 is PVS, 1 is Studio. Only writable when adding a colection. Min=0, Max=1, Default=0 |
When Collection is not passed, the parameters below are used: This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or CollectionId | Guid | GUID of the Collection to Set. |
or this is required & resolution
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or CollectionName | string |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid | |
| SiteName | string |
Optional field values to set:
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| NewName | string | Name of the Collection. It is unique within the Site. Max Length=50 |
| Description | string | User description. Default=”” Max Length=250 |
| TemplateDeviceId | Guid | GUID of a Device in the Collection whose settings are used for initial values of new Devices. Not used with templateDeviceName. Default=00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 |
| TemplateDeviceName | string | Name of a Device in the Collection whose settings are used for initial values of new Devices. Not used with TemplateDeviceId. Default=”” |
| LastAutoAddDeviceNumber | uint | The Device Number of the last Auto Added Device. Default=0 |
| Enabled | bool | True when Devices in the Collection can be booted, false otherwise. Default=true |
| AutoAddPrefix | string | The string put before the Device Number for Auto Add. Default=”” ASCII computer name characters no end digit Max Length=12 |
| AutoAddSuffix | string | The string put after the Device Number for Auto Add. Default=”” ASCII computer name characters no begin digit Max Length=12 |
| AutoAddZeroFill | bool | True when zeros be placed before the Device Number up to the AutoAddNumberLength for Auto Add, false otherwise. Default=true |
| AutoAddNumberLength | uint | The maximum length of the Device Number for Auto Add. This length plus the AutoAddPrefix length plus the AutoAddSuffix length must be less than 16. Required that ((lenautoAddPrefix+lenautoAddSuffix)+AutoAddNumberLength)<=15. Min=3, Max=9, Default=4 |
| ProvisioningType | uint | The provisioning facility which created the Devices in this Collection. 0 is PVS, 1 is Studio. Only writable when adding a colection. Min=0, Max=1, Default=0 |
Optional SwitchParameter PassThru: If -PassThru is specified, the resulting PvsCollection object(s) are returned. SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Set PvsCollection for Individual Fields
Get the PvsCollection into a $o variable. Change the $o field values and then Set the PvsCollection with the result.
$o = Get-PvsCollection -Name theCollection -SiteName theSite -Fields AutoAddSuffix, AutoAddZeroFill
$o.AutoAddSuffix = "Ex"
$o.AutoAddZeroFill = $true
Set-PvsCollection $o
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 2: Set PvsCollection for a Field Using Pipe
Get the PvsCollection into a $o variable. Change a $o field to the correct value and then Set the PvsCollection with the result.
Get-PvsCollection -CollectionName theCollection -SiteName theSite -Fields AutoAddSuffix | foreach { \$o = \$\_; \$o.AutoAddSuffix = \"Ex\"; \$o } | Set-PvsCollection
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. The “foreach { $o = $_; $o.X = Y; $o }” sets the field X to value Y and returns the object again so it can be piped to the Set command for update.
EXAMPLE 3: Get PvsCollection and Enable
Get all PvsCollection that are not Enabled and then Enables them.
Get-PvsCollection -Fields Enabled | Where-Object {\$\_.Enabled -eq \$false} | foreach { \$o = \$\_; \$o.Enabled = \$true; \$o } | Set-PvsCollection
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. The “foreach { $o = $_; $o.X = Y; $o }” sets the field X to value Y and returns the object again so it can be piped to the Set command for update.
Set-PvsConnection
Set the SoapServer connection, and if -Persist is specified the connection settings are saved in the registry. A PvsConnection object can be used as the parameter.
Required PvsConnection Connection: PvsConnection object with changed property value(s) to be set. The object can come from a pipeline. These values are in the PvsConnection object, and only will be set if the value has changed.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or Server | string | Name or IP of the Server to connect to. Default=localhost |
| Port | string | The Port to use to connect. Default=54321 |
| User | string | User name to use for Authentication. If it has a value, it will be *****. Default=”” |
| Domain | string | Domain name to use for Authentication. If it has a value, it will be *****. Default=”” |
| Password | string | Password to use for Authentication. If it has a value, it will be *****. Default=”” |
| Persist | string | True when the connection settings should be, for Set, or have been, for Get, saved to the registry. |
PvsConnection can be created or modified using methods below:
- New-Object Citrix.PVS.SnapIn.PvsConnection: Creates default Server=localhost, Port=54321, and no authentication.
- New-Object Citrix.PVS.SnapIn.PvsConnection(Citrix.PVS.SnapIn copyFrom): Creates with settings of the copyFrom Citrix.PVS.SnapIn.
- SetServerToLocalHostDefaultSettings: Server=localhost, Port=54321, and no authentication.
- Copy(Citrix.PVS.SnapIn copyFrom): Modifies the settings to match the copyFrom Citrix.PVS.SnapIn.
- Equals(Citrix.PVS.SnapIn compareTo): Returns true when the settings match what is in the compareTo.
When Connection is not passed, the parameters below are used: Optional field values to set:
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or Server | string | Name or IP of the Server to connect to. Default=localhost |
| Port | string | The Port to use to connect. Default=54321 |
| User | string | User name to use for Authentication. If it has a value, it will be *****. Default=”” |
| Domain | string | Domain name to use for Authentication. If it has a value, it will be *****. Default=”” |
| Password | string | Password to use for Authentication. If it has a value, it will be *****. Default=”” |
| Persist | string | True when the connection settings should be, for Set, or have been, for Get, saved to the registry. |
Optional SwitchParameter PassThru: If -PassThru is specified, the resulting PvsConnection object is returned. SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Set PvsConnection for Individual Fields
Get the PvsConnection into a $o variable. Change the $o field values and then Set the PvsConnection with the result.
$o = Get-PvsConnection -Fields Port
$o.Port = 54322
Set-PvsConnection $o
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
EXAMPLE 2: Set PvsConnection for a Field Using Pipe
Get the PvsConnection into a $o variable for the field that has the wrong value. Change the $o field to the correct value and then Set the PvsConnection with the result.
Get-PvsConnection -Fields Port | Where-Object {\$\_.Port -ne 54322} | foreach { \$o = \$\_; \$o.Port = 54322; \$o } | Set-PvsConnection
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. The “foreach { $o = $_; $o.X = Y; $o }” sets the field X to value Y and returns the object again so it can be piped to the Set command for update.
EXAMPLE 3: Set PvsConnection Port with Parameter
Set the PvsConnection Port using the Port parameter instead of a PvsConnection object.
Set-PvsConnection -Port 54322
This is the only Set command that has field parameters.
Set-PvsDevice
Set Device(s) changed values from PvsDevice object(s), or set one or more field values for one or more PvsDevices.
Required PvsDevice Device: PvsDevice object(s) with changed property value(s) to be set. The object(s) can come from a pipeline. These values are in the PvsDevice object, and only will be set if the value has changed.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or DeviceName | string | Computer name with no spaces. ASCII computer name characters Max Length=15 |
| Description | string | User description. Default=”” Max Length=250 |
| DeviceMac | PvsPhysicalAddress | Ethernet address can have the form XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX. Uniquely identifies the Device. Default=”” |
| BootFrom | uint | Device to boot from. Choices are 1 for vDisk, 2 for Hard Disk, and 3 for Floppy. This cannot be Set for a Device with Personal vDisk. Min=1, Max=3, Default=1 |
| ClassName | string | Used by Automatic Update feature to match new versions of Disks to a Device. This cannot be Set for a Device with Personal vDisk. Default=”” Max Length=41 |
| Port | uint | UDP port to use with Stream Service. Min=1025, Max=65534, Default=6901 |
| Enabled | bool | True when it can be booted, false otherwise. This cannot be Set for a Device with Personal vDisk. Default=true |
| LocalDiskEnabled | bool | If there is a local disk menu choice for the Device, this is true. This cannot be Set for a Device with Personal vDisk. Default=false |
| Authentication | uint | Device log in authentication. Choices are 0 for none, 1 for User Name/Password, and 2 for Extern. This cannot be Set for a Device with Personal vDisk. Min=0, Max=2, Default=0 |
| User | string | Name of user to authenticate before the boot process continues. This cannot be Set for a Device with Personal vDisk. Default=”” ASCII Max Length=20 |
| Password | string | Password of user to authenticate before the boot process continues. This cannot be Set for a Device with Personal vDisk. Default=”” ASCII Max Length=65535 |
| AdTimestamp | uint | The time the Active Directory machine account password was generated. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=0 |
| AdSignature | uint | The signature of the Active Directory machine account password. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=0 |
| AdPassword | string | The Active Directory machine account password. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=”” ASCII Max Length=65535 |
| LogLevel | uint | Level to perform logging at. Values are: 0 (None), 1 (Fatal), 2 (Error), 3 (Warning), 4 (Info), and 5 (Debug). Min=0, Max=6, Default=4 |
| DomainName | string | Fully qualified name of the domain that the Device belongs to. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=”” Max Length=255 |
| DomainObjectSID | string | The value of the objectSID AD attribute of the same name for the Device’s computer account. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=”” Max Length=186 |
| DomainControllerName | string | The name of the DC used to create the host’s computer account. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=”” Max Length=4000 |
| DomainTimeCreated | DateTime | The time that the computer account was created. Has the date and time including milliseconds. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=Empty |
| Type | uint | 1 when it performs test of Disks, 2 when it performs maintenance on Disks, 3 when it has a Personal vDisk, 4 when it has a Personal vDisk and performs tests, 0 otherwise. A Device with type 0 - 3 can only be Set to 0 - 3, and a Device with type 3 - 4 can only be Set to 3 - 4. Min=0, Max=4, Default=0 |
| LocalWriteCacheDiskSize | uint | The size in GB to format the Device cache file disk. If the value is 0, then the disk is not formatted. Min=0, Max=2048, Default=0 |
| BdmBoot | bool | Use PXE boot when set to false, BDM boot when set to true. Default is PXE Default=false |
| BdmType | uint | Use PXE boot when set to 0, BDM (Bios) boot when set to 1 and BDM (Uefi) boot when set to 2. Default=0 |
| BdmFormat | uint | 1 use VHD for BDMboot, 2 use ISO, 3 use USB. Default=0 |
| BdmUpdated | DateTime | Timestamp of the last BDM boot disk update. Default=Empty |
| BdmCreated | DateTime | Timestamp when BDM device was created Default=Empty |
| XsPvsProxyUuid | Guid | UUID of XenServer PVS_proxy Default=00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 |
| EnableXsProxy | string | Enable XenServerProxy when set to 1 Default=”” |
| WriteCacheDisk | string | Write cache disk number Default=”” Max Length=3 |
| WriteCachePartition | string | Write cache disk partition number Default=”” Max Length=3 |
| UpdatePageFileSettings | bool | Update pagefile settings Default=false |
| EncryptionEpoch | UInt64 | Timestamp of the encryption Key used to encrypt fields Default=0 |
| ProvisioningType | uint | The provisioning facility which created the device. 0 is PVS, 1 is Studio. Only writable when adding a device. Min=0, Max=1, Default=0 |
| EkPub | string | Client TPM EK public key Default=”” |
| SecurityPolicy | uint | Client security policy Expected values are 0, 2 or 10, Default=null. |
When Device is not passed, the parameters below are used: One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DeviceId | Guid | GUID of the Device to Set. |
| Name or DeviceName | string | Name of the Device to Set. |
| DeviceMac | PvsPhysicalAddress | MAC of the Device to Set. |
| CollectionId | Guid | GUID of the Collection to set all Devices. DeviceName and DeviceMac cannot be set. |
| SiteViewId | Guid | GUID of the Site View to set all Devices. DeviceName and DeviceMac cannot be set. |
| FarmViewId | Guid | GUID of the Farm View to set all Devices. DeviceName and DeviceMac cannot be set. |
| FarmViewName | string | Name of the Farm View to set all Devices. DeviceName and DeviceMac cannot be set. |
| EkPub | string | TPM endorsement public key of device to set. |
or one of these is required & resolutions
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| CollectionName | string | |
| SiteViewName | string |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid | |
| SiteName | string |
Optional field values to set:
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| NewName | string | Computer name with no spaces. ASCII computer name characters Max Length=15 |
| Description | string | User description. Default=”” Max Length=250 |
| DeviceMac | PvsPhysicalAddress | Ethernet address can have the form XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX. Uniquely identifies the Device. Default=”” |
| BootFrom | uint | Device to boot from. Choices are 1 for vDisk, 2 for Hard Disk, and 3 for Floppy. This cannot be Set for a Device with Personal vDisk. Min=1, Max=3, Default=1 |
| ClassName | string | Used by Automatic Update feature to match new versions of Disks to a Device. This cannot be Set for a Device with Personal vDisk. Default=”” Max Length=41 |
| Port | uint | UDP port to use with Stream Service. Min=1025, Max=65534, Default=6901 |
| Enabled | bool | True when it can be booted, false otherwise. This cannot be Set for a Device with Personal vDisk. Default=true |
| LocalDiskEnabled | bool | If there is a local disk menu choice for the Device, this is true. This cannot be Set for a Device with Personal vDisk. Default=false |
| Authentication | uint | Device log in authentication. Choices are 0 for none, 1 for User Name/Password, and 2 for Extern. This cannot be Set for a Device with Personal vDisk. Min=0, Max=2, Default=0 |
| User | string | Name of user to authenticate before the boot process continues. This cannot be Set for a Device with Personal vDisk. Default=”” ASCII Max Length=20 |
| Password | string | Password of user to authenticate before the boot process continues. This cannot be Set for a Device with Personal vDisk. Default=”” ASCII Max Length=65535 |
| AdTimestamp | uint | The time the Active Directory machine account password was generated. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=0 |
| AdSignature | uint | The signature of the Active Directory machine account password. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=0 |
| AdPassword | string | The Active Directory machine account password. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=”” ASCII Max Length=65535 |
| LogLevel | uint | Level to perform logging at. Values are: 0 (None), 1 (Fatal), 2 (Error), 3 (Warning), 4 (Info), and 5 (Debug). Min=0, Max=6, Default=4 |
| DomainName | string | Fully qualified name of the domain that the Device belongs to. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=”” Max Length=255 |
| DomainObjectSID | string | The value of the objectSID AD attribute of the same name for the Device’s computer account. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=”” Max Length=186 |
| DomainControllerName | string | The name of the DC used to create the host’s computer account. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=”” Max Length=4000 |
| DomainTimeCreated | DateTime | The time that the computer account was created. Has the date and time including milliseconds. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=Empty |
| Type | uint | 1 when it performs test of Disks, 2 when it performs maintenance on Disks, 3 when it has a Personal vDisk, 4 when it has a Personal vDisk and performs tests, 0 otherwise. A Device with type 0 - 3 can only be Set to 0 - 3, and a Device with type 3 - 4 can only be Set to 3 - 4. Min=0, Max=4, Default=0 |
| LocalWriteCacheDiskSize | uint | The size in GB to format the Device cache file disk. If the value is 0, then the disk is not formatted. Min=0, Max=2048, Default=0 |
| BdmBoot | bool | Use PXE boot when set to false, BDM boot when set to true. Default is PXE Default=false |
| BdmType | uint | Use PXE boot when set to 0, BDM (Bios) boot when set to 1 and BDM (Uefi) boot when set to 2. Default=0 |
| BdmFormat | uint | 1 use VHD for BDMboot, 2 use ISO, 3 use USB. Default=0 |
| BdmUpdated | DateTime | Timestamp of the last BDM boot disk update. Default=Empty |
| BdmCreated | DateTime | Timestamp when BDM device was created Default=Empty |
| XsPvsProxyUuid | Guid | UUID of XenServer PVS_proxy Default=00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 |
| EnableXsProxy | string | Enable XenServerProxy when set to 1 Default=”” |
| WriteCacheDisk | string | Write cache disk number Default=”” Max Length=3 |
| WriteCachePartition | string | Write cache disk partition number Default=”” Max Length=3 |
| UpdatePageFileSettings | bool | Update pagefile settings Default=false |
| EncryptionEpoch | UInt64 | Timestamp of the encryption Key used to encrypt fields Default=0 |
| ProvisioningType | uint | The provisioning facility which created the device. 0 is PVS, 1 is Studio. Only writable when adding a device. Min=0, Max=1, Default=0 |
| EkPub | string | Client TPM EK public key Default=”” |
| SecurityPolicy | uint | Client security policy Expected values are 0, 2 or 10, Default=null. |
Optional SwitchParameter PassThru: If -PassThru is specified, the resulting PvsDevice object(s) are returned. SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Set PvsDevice for Individual Fields
Get the PvsDevice into a $o variable. Change the $o field values and then Set the PvsDevice with the result.
$o = Get-PvsDevice -Name theDevice -Fields LocalWriteCacheDiskSize
$o.LocalWriteCacheDiskSize = 1024
Set-PvsDevice $o
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
EXAMPLE 2: Set PvsDevice for a Field Using Pipe
Get the PvsDevice into a $o variable. Change a $o field to the correct value and then Set the PvsDevice with the result.
Get-PvsDevice -Name theDevice -Fields LocalWriteCacheDiskSize | foreach { \$o = \$\_; \$o.LocalWriteCacheDiskSize = 1024; \$o } | Set-PvsDevice
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. The “foreach { $o = $_; $o.X = Y; $o }” sets the field X to value Y and returns the object again so it can be piped to the Set command for update.
EXAMPLE 3: Get PvsDevice and Enable
Get all PvsDevice that are not Enabled and then Enables them.
Get-PvsDevice -Fields Enabled | Where-Object {\$\_.Enabled -eq \$false} | foreach { \$o = \$\_; \$o.Enabled = \$true; \$o } | Set-PvsDevice
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. The “foreach { $o = $_; $o.X = Y; $o }” sets the field X to value Y and returns the object again so it can be piped to the Set command for update.
Set-PvsDeviceBootstrap
Set Device Bootstrap List(s) changed values from PvsDeviceBootstrap object(s).
Required PvsDeviceBootstrap[] DeviceBootstrap: Array of PvsDeviceBootstrap objects with changed DeviceBootstrap. The object(s) can come from a pileline. Optional SwitchParameter PassThru: If -PassThru is specified, the resulting PvsDeviceBootstrap object(s) are returned. SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter. These exist in the DeviceBootstrap array within each PvsDeviceBootstrap. Each array item is a PvsDeviceBootstrapList object. They are set using the Add, Insert, Remove, Set, and Reorder methods in the PvsDeviceBootstrap.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or Bootstrap | string | Name of the bootstrap file. Max Length=259 |
| MenuText | string | Text that is displayed in the Boot Menu. If this field has no value, the bootstrap value is used. Default=”” ASCII Max Length=64 |
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Set PvsDeviceBootstrap for Individual Fields
The Get-PvsDeviceBootstrap returns a PvsDeviceBootstrap object with a PvsDeviceBootstrapList array in it called DeviceBootstrap. The DeviceBootstrap is manipulated using the Add, Insert, Remove, Set and Reorder Methods. The Set-PvsDeviceBootstrap is called with the final result.
$o = Get-PvsDeviceBootstrap -Name theDevice
$o.Add("addName", "addValue")
$o.Insert(0, "insertName", "insertValue")
$o.Remove(1)
$o.Set(2, "setValue")
$o.Reorder(0, 1)
Set-PvsDeviceBootstrap $o
Set-PvsDevicePersonality
Set Device Personality List(s) changed values from PvsDevicePersonality object(s).
Required PvsDevicePersonality[] DevicePersonality: Array of PvsDevicePersonality objects with changed DevicePersonality. The object(s) can come from a pileline. Optional SwitchParameter PassThru: If -PassThru is specified, the resulting PvsDevicePersonality object(s) are returned. SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter. These exist in the DevicePersonality array within each PvsDevicePersonality. Each array item is a PvsDevicePersonalityList object. They are set using the Add, Insert, Remove, Set, and Reorder methods in the PvsDevicePersonality.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name | string | Name of the Device personality item. Max Length=250 |
| Value | string | Value for the Device personality item. Max Length=1000 |
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Set PvsDevicePersonality for Individual Fields
The Get-PvsDevicePersonality returns a PvsDevicePersonality object with a PvsDevicePersonalityList array in it called DevicePersonality. The DevicePersonality is manipulated using the Add, Insert, Remove, Set and Reorder Methods. The Set-PvsDevicePersonality is called with the final result.
$o = Get-PvsDevicePersonality -Name theDevice
$o.Add("addName", "addValue")
$o.Insert(0, "insertName", "insertValue")
$o.Remove(1)
$o.Set(2, "setValue")
$o.Reorder(0, 1)
Set-PvsDevicePersonality $o
Set-PvsDisk
Set Disk(s) changed values from PvsDisk object(s), or set one or more field values for a PvsDisk.
Required PvsDisk Disk: PvsDisk object(s) with changed property value(s) to be set. The object(s) can come from a pipeline. These values are in the PvsDisk object, and only will be set if the value has changed.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Class | string | Class of the Disk. Max Length=40 |
| ImageType | string | Type of this image (software type). Max Length=40 |
| WriteCacheSize | UInt64 | RAM cache size (MB). Not 0 when used with Cache in Device RAM, and Cache in Device RAM with Overflow on Hard Disk. A value of 0 will disable the RAM use for Cache in Device RAM with Overflow on Hard Disk. Min=0, Max=131072, Default=0 |
| AutoUpdateEnabled | bool | Automatically update this image for matching Devices when set to true. Default false |
| ActivationDateEnabled | bool | Use activation date to activate image when set to true. Default false |
| AdPasswordEnabled | bool | Enable AD password management when set to true. |
| HaEnabled | bool | Enable HA when set to true. |
| PrinterManagementEnabled | bool | Invalid printers will be deleted from the Device when set to true. |
| WriteCacheType | uint | 0 (Private), 1 (Cache on Server), 3 (Cache in Device RAM), 4 (Cache on Device Hard Disk), 7 (Cache on Server, Persistent), 9 (Cache in Device RAM with Overflow on Hard Disk), 10 (Private async), 11(Server persistent async), 12 (Cache in Device RAM with Overflow on Hard Disk async) Min=0, Max=12, Default=0 |
| LicenseMode | uint | 0 (None), 1 (Multiple Activation Key), or 2 (Key Management Service). Min=0, Max=2, Default=0 |
| AccelerateOfficeActivation | bool | Run script to activate office automatically. |
| ActiveDate | DateTime | Date to activate the disk if AutoUpdateEnabled and activationDateEnabled are true. Has the date. Empty when the AutoUpdateEnabled or activationDateEnabled are false. |
| LongDescription | string | Description of the Disk. Max Length=399 |
| OperatingSystem | string | Operating System of Disk. Max Length=250 |
| OsType | string | Operating System Type of Disk. Max Length=40 |
| SerialNumber | string | User defined serial number. Max Length=36 |
| Date | string | User defined date. Max Length=40 |
| Author | string | User defined author. Max Length=40 |
| Title | string | User defined title. Max Length=40 |
| Company | string | User defined company. Max Length=40 |
| InternalName | string | User defined name. Max Length=63 |
| OriginalFile | string | User defined original file. Max Length=127 |
| HardwareTarget | string | User defined hardware target. Max Length=127 |
| MajorRelease | UInt64 | User defined major release number. Min=0, Max=4294967295, Default=0 |
| MinorRelease | UInt64 | User defined minor release number. Min=0, Max=4294967295, Default=0 |
| Build | UInt64 | User defined build number. Min=0, Max=4294967295, Default=0 |
| ClearCacheDisabled | string | Clear cached secrets disabled. |
| VHDX | bool | If VHDX is true, the format of the image is VHDX. Otherwise it is VHD. Default=false |
| EnableSetLocalTime | string | Enable setting the local time bias on the disk version. |
When Disk is not passed, the parameters below are used: This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DiskLocatorId | Guid | GUID of the Disk Locator. |
or this is required & resolution
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or DiskLocatorName | string |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid | |
| SiteName | string |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| StoreId | Guid | |
| StoreName | string |
Optional field values to set:
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Class | string | Class of the Disk. Max Length=40 |
| ImageType | string | Type of this image (software type). Max Length=40 |
| WriteCacheSize | UInt64 | RAM cache size (MB). Not 0 when used with Cache in Device RAM, and Cache in Device RAM with Overflow on Hard Disk. A value of 0 will disable the RAM use for Cache in Device RAM with Overflow on Hard Disk. Min=0, Max=131072, Default=0 |
| AutoUpdateEnabled | bool | Automatically update this image for matching Devices when set to true. Default false |
| ActivationDateEnabled | bool | Use activation date to activate image when set to true. Default false |
| AdPasswordEnabled | bool | Enable AD password management when set to true. |
| HaEnabled | bool | Enable HA when set to true. |
| PrinterManagementEnabled | bool | Invalid printers will be deleted from the Device when set to true. |
| WriteCacheType | uint | 0 (Private), 1 (Cache on Server), 3 (Cache in Device RAM), 4 (Cache on Device Hard Disk), 7 (Cache on Server, Persistent), 9 (Cache in Device RAM with Overflow on Hard Disk), 10 (Private async), 11(Server persistent async), 12 (Cache in Device RAM with Overflow on Hard Disk async) Min=0, Max=12, Default=0 |
| LicenseMode | uint | 0 (None), 1 (Multiple Activation Key), or 2 (Key Management Service). Min=0, Max=2, Default=0 |
| AccelerateOfficeActivation | bool | Run script to activate office automatically. |
| ActiveDate | DateTime | Date to activate the disk if AutoUpdateEnabled and activationDateEnabled are true. Has the date. Empty when the AutoUpdateEnabled or activationDateEnabled are false. |
| LongDescription | string | Description of the Disk. Max Length=399 |
| OperatingSystem | string | Operating System of Disk. Max Length=250 |
| OsType | string | Operating System Type of Disk. Max Length=40 |
| SerialNumber | string | User defined serial number. Max Length=36 |
| Date | string | User defined date. Max Length=40 |
| Author | string | User defined author. Max Length=40 |
| Title | string | User defined title. Max Length=40 |
| Company | string | User defined company. Max Length=40 |
| InternalName | string | User defined name. Max Length=63 |
| OriginalFile | string | User defined original file. Max Length=127 |
| HardwareTarget | string | User defined hardware target. Max Length=127 |
| MajorRelease | UInt64 | User defined major release number. Min=0, Max=4294967295, Default=0 |
| MinorRelease | UInt64 | User defined minor release number. Min=0, Max=4294967295, Default=0 |
| Build | UInt64 | User defined build number. Min=0, Max=4294967295, Default=0 |
| ClearCacheDisabled | string | Clear cached secrets disabled. |
| VHDX | bool | If VHDX is true, the format of the image is VHDX. Otherwise it is VHD. Default=false |
| EnableSetLocalTime | string | Enable setting the local time bias on the disk version. |
Optional SwitchParameter PassThru: If -PassThru is specified, the resulting PvsDisk object(s) are returned. SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Set PvsDisk for Individual Fields
Get the PvsDisk into a $o variable. Change the $o field values and then Set the PvsDisk with the result.
$o = Get-PvsDisk -DiskLocatorId "81ea9077-598d-459f-a443-71fabd1840bf" -Fields PrinterManagementEnabled
$o.PrinterManagementEnabled = $false
Set-PvsDisk $o
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
EXAMPLE 2: Set PvsDisk for a Field Using Pipe
Get the PvsDisk into a $o variable. Change a $o field to the correct value and then Set the PvsDisk with the result.
Get-PvsDisk -DiskLocatorId \"81ea9077-598d-459f-a443-71fabd1840bf\" -Fields PrinterManagementEnabled | foreach { \$o = \$\_; \$o.PrinterManagementEnabled = \$false; \$o } | Set-PvsDisk
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. The “foreach { $o = $_; $o.X = Y; $o }” sets the field X to value Y and returns the object again so it can be piped to the Set command for update.
Set-PvsDiskLocator
Set Disk Locator(s) changed values from PvsDiskLocator object(s), or set one or more field values for a PvsDiskLocator.
Required PvsDiskLocator DiskLocator: PvsDiskLocator object(s) with changed property value(s) to be set. The object(s) can come from a pipeline. These values are in the PvsDiskLocator object, and only will be set if the value has changed.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Description | string | User description. Default=”” Max Length=250 |
| MenuText | string | Text that is displayed in the Boot Menu. If this field has no value, the name value is used. Default=”” ASCII Max Length=64 |
| ServerId | Guid | GUID of the single Server that this Disk Locator is assigned to. It is not used with ServerName. Default=00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 |
| ServerName | string | Name of the single Server that this Disk Locator is assigned to. It is not used with ServerId. Default=”” |
| Enabled | bool | True when this disk can be booted, false otherwise. Default=true |
| RebalanceEnabled | bool | True when this Server can automatically rebalance Devices, false otherwise. Default=false |
| RebalanceTriggerPercent | uint | Percent over fair load that triggers a dynamic Device rebalance. Min=5, Max=5000, Default=25 |
| SubnetAffinity | uint | Qualifier for subnet affinity when assigning a Server. 0=None, 1=Best Effort, 2=Fixed. Min=0, Max=2, Default=0 |
When DiskLocator is not passed, the parameters below are used: This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DiskLocatorId | Guid | GUID of the Disk Locator to Set. |
or this is required & resolution
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or DiskLocatorName | string |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid | |
| SiteName | string |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| StoreId | Guid | |
| StoreName | string |
Optional field values to set:
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Description | string | User description. Default=”” Max Length=250 |
| MenuText | string | Text that is displayed in the Boot Menu. If this field has no value, the name value is used. Default=”” ASCII Max Length=64 |
| ServerId | Guid | GUID of the single Server that this Disk Locator is assigned to. It is not used with ServerName. Default=00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 |
| ServerName | string | Name of the single Server that this Disk Locator is assigned to. It is not used with ServerId. Default=”” |
| Enabled | bool | True when this disk can be booted, false otherwise. Default=true |
| RebalanceEnabled | bool | True when this Server can automatically rebalance Devices, false otherwise. Default=false |
| RebalanceTriggerPercent | uint | Percent over fair load that triggers a dynamic Device rebalance. Min=5, Max=5000, Default=25 |
| SubnetAffinity | uint | Qualifier for subnet affinity when assigning a Server. 0=None, 1=Best Effort, 2=Fixed. Min=0, Max=2, Default=0 |
Optional SwitchParameter PassThru: If -PassThru is specified, the resulting PvsDiskLocator object(s) are returned. SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Set PvsDiskLocator for Individual Fields
Get the PvsDiskLocator into a $o variable. Change the $o field values and then Set the PvsDiskLocator with the result.
$o = Get-PvsDiskLocator -DiskLocatorId "81ea9077-598d-459f-a443-71fabd1840bf" -Fields RebalanceEnabled
$o.RebalanceEnabled = $true
Set-PvsDiskLocator $o
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
EXAMPLE 2: Set PvsDiskLocator for a Field Using Pipe
Get the PvsDiskLocator into a $o variable. Change a $o field to the correct value and then Set the PvsDiskLocator with the result.
Get-PvsDiskLocator -DiskLocatorId \"81ea9077-598d-459f-a443-71fabd1840bf\" -Fields RebalanceEnabled | foreach { \$o = \$\_; \$o.RebalanceEnabled = \$true; \$o } | Set-PvsDiskLocator
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. The “foreach { $o = $_; $o.X = Y; $o }” sets the field X to value Y and returns the object again so it can be piped to the Set command for update.
EXAMPLE 3: Get PvsDiskLocator and Enable
Get all PvsDiskLocator that are not Enabled and then Enables them.
Get-PvsDiskLocator -Fields Enabled | Where-Object {\$\_.Enabled -eq \$false} | foreach { \$o = \$\_; \$o.Enabled = \$true; \$o } | Set-PvsDiskLocator
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. The “foreach { $o = $_; $o.X = Y; $o }” sets the field X to value Y and returns the object again so it can be piped to the Set command for update.
Set-PvsDiskUpdateDevice
Set Disk Update Device(s) changed values from PvsDiskUpdateDevice object(s), or set one or more field values for one or more PvsDiskUpdateDevices.
Required PvsDiskUpdateDevice DiskUpdateDevice: PvsDiskUpdateDevice object(s) with changed property value(s) to be set. The object(s) can come from a pipeline. These values are in the PvsDiskUpdateDevice object, and only will be set if the value has changed.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Description | string | User description. Default=”” Max Length=250 |
| Port | uint | UDP port to use with Stream Service. Min=1025, Max=65534, Default=6901 |
| AdTimestamp | uint | The time the Active Directory machine account password was generated. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=0 |
| AdSignature | uint | The signature of the Active Directory machine account password. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=0 |
| LogLevel | uint | Level to perform logging at. Values are: 0 (None), 1 (Fatal), 2 (Error), 3 (Warning), 4 (Info), and 5 (Debug). Min=0, Max=6, Default=4 |
| DomainName | string | Fully qualified name of the domain that the Device belongs to. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=”” Max Length=255 |
| DomainObjectSID | string | The value of the objectSID AD attribute of the same name for the Device’s computer account. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=”” Max Length=186 |
| DomainControllerName | string | The name of the DC used to create the host’s computer account. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=”” Max Length=4000 |
| DomainTimeCreated | DateTime | The time that the computer account was created. Has the date and time including milliseconds. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=Empty |
| AdPassword | string | The Active Directory machine account password. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=”” Max Length=65535 |
When DiskUpdateDevice is not passed, the parameters below are used: One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DeviceId | Guid | GUID of the Disk Update Device to Set. |
| Name or DeviceName | string | Name of Disk Update Device to Set. |
| DeviceMac | PvsPhysicalAddress | MAC of Disk Update Device to Set. |
| SiteId | Guid | GUID of the Site. Can be used alone to Set all Disk Update Devices in the Site. |
| SiteName | string | Name of the Site. Can be used alone to Set all Disk Update Devices in the Site. |
| DiskLocatorId | Guid | GUID of the DiskLocator to Set the Disk Update Device for. |
or this is required & resolution
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| DiskLocatorName | string |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid | GUID of the Site. Can be used alone to Set all Disk Update Devices in the Site. |
| SiteName | string | Name of the Site. Can be used alone to Set all Disk Update Devices in the Site. |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| StoreId | Guid | |
| StoreName | string |
Optional field values to set:
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Description | string | User description. Default=”” Max Length=250 |
| Port | uint | UDP port to use with Stream Service. Min=1025, Max=65534, Default=6901 |
| AdTimestamp | uint | The time the Active Directory machine account password was generated. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=0 |
| AdSignature | uint | The signature of the Active Directory machine account password. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=0 |
| LogLevel | uint | Level to perform logging at. Values are: 0 (None), 1 (Fatal), 2 (Error), 3 (Warning), 4 (Info), and 5 (Debug). Min=0, Max=6, Default=4 |
| DomainName | string | Fully qualified name of the domain that the Device belongs to. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=”” Max Length=255 |
| DomainObjectSID | string | The value of the objectSID AD attribute of the same name for the Device’s computer account. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=”” Max Length=186 |
| DomainControllerName | string | The name of the DC used to create the host’s computer account. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=”” Max Length=4000 |
| DomainTimeCreated | DateTime | The time that the computer account was created. Has the date and time including milliseconds. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=Empty |
| AdPassword | string | The Active Directory machine account password. Do not set this field, it is only set internally by PVS. Default=”” Max Length=65535 |
Optional SwitchParameter PassThru: If -PassThru is specified, the resulting PvsDiskUpdateDevice object(s) are returned. SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Set PvsDiskUpdateDevice for Individual Fields
Get the PvsDiskUpdateDevice into a $o variable. Change the $o field values and then Set the PvsDiskUpdateDevice with the result.
$o = Get-PvsDiskUpdateDevice -Name theDevice -Fields Port
$o.Port = 5901
Set-PvsDiskUpdateDevice $o
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
EXAMPLE 2: Set PvsDiskUpdateDevice for a Field Using Pipe
Get the PvsDiskUpdateDevice into a $o variable. Change a $o field to the correct value and then Set the PvsDiskUpdateDevice with the result.
Get-PvsDiskUpdateDevice -Name theDevice -Fields Port | foreach { \$o = \$\_; \$o.Port = 5901; \$o } | Set-PvsDiskUpdateDevice
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. The “foreach { $o = $_; $o.X = Y; $o }” sets the field X to value Y and returns the object again so it can be piped to the Set command for update.
Set-PvsDiskVersion
Set Disk Version(s) changed values from PvsDiskVersion object(s), or set one or more field values for a PvsDiskVersion.
Required PvsDiskVersion DiskVersion: PvsDiskVersion object(s) with changed property value(s) to be set. The object(s) can come from a pipeline. These values are in the PvsDiskVersion object, and only will be set if the value has changed.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Description | string | User description. Default=”” Max Length=250 |
| ScheduledDate | DateTime | Date/Time that the Disk Version is scheduled to become available. Has the date, hour and minute. Empty when the disk version is made available immediately. Default=Empty |
When DiskVersion is not passed, the parameters below are used: This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DiskLocatorId | Guid | GUID of the Disk Locator Version to Set. |
or this is required & resolution
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or DiskLocatorName | string |
This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Version | uint |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid | |
| SiteName | string |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| StoreId | Guid | |
| StoreName | string |
Optional field values to set:
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Description | string | User description. Default=”” Max Length=250 |
| ScheduledDate | DateTime | Date/Time that the Disk Version is scheduled to become available. Has the date, hour and minute. Empty when the disk version is made available immediately. Default=Empty |
Optional SwitchParameter PassThru: If -PassThru is specified, the resulting PvsDiskVersion object(s) are returned. SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Set PvsDiskVersion for Individual Fields
Get the PvsDiskVersion into a $o variable. Change the $o field values and then Set the PvsDiskVersion with the result.
$o = Get-PvsDiskVersion -DiskLocatorId "81ea9077-598d-459f-a443-71fabd1840bf" -Version 5 -Fields ScheduledDate
$o.ScheduledDate = "2016/01/01"
Set-PvsDiskVersion $o
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
EXAMPLE 2: Set PvsDiskVersion for a Field Using Pipe
Get the PvsDiskVersion into a $o variable. Change a $o field to the correct value and then Set the PvsDiskVersion with the result.
Get-PvsDiskVersion -DiskLocatorId \"81ea9077-598d-459f-a443-71fabd1840bf\" -Version 5 -Fields ScheduledDate | foreach { \$o = \$\_; \$o.ScheduledDate = \"2016/01/01\"; \$o } | Set-PvsDiskVersion
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. The “foreach { $o = $_; $o.X = Y; $o }” sets the field X to value Y and returns the object again so it can be piped to the Set command for update.
Set-PvsFarm
Set Farm changed values from a PvsFarm object, or set one or more field values for a PvsFarm.
Required PvsFarm Farm: PvsFarm object with changed property value(s) to be set. The object can come from a pipeline. These values are in the PvsFarm object, and only will be set if the value has changed.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or FarmName | string | Name of the Farm. Default=”” Max Length=50 |
| Description | string | User description. Default=”” Max Length=250 |
| AutoAddEnabled | bool | True when Auto Add is enabled, false otherwise. Default=false |
| AuditingEnabled | bool | True when Auditing is enabled, false otherwise. Default=false |
| LastAuditArchiveDate | DateTime | Last date of Audit Trail data that was Archived. Has the date. Default=Empty |
| DefaultSiteId | Guid | GUID of the Site to place new Devices into automatically. Not used with defaultSiteName. Default=00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 |
| DefaultSiteName | string | Name of the Site to place new Devices into automatically. Not used with DefaultSiteId. Default=”” |
| OfflineDatabaseSupportEnabled | bool | True when Offline Database Support is enabled, false otherwise. Default=false |
| LicenseServer | string | License server name. Default=”” Max Length=255 |
| LicenseServerPort | uint | License server port. Min=1025, Max=65534, Default=27000 |
| LicenseTradeUp | bool | License server trade up, when set to true. Default=false |
| LicenseSKU | uint | LicenseSKU. 0 for on-premises, 1 for cloud. Min=0, Max=1, Default=0 |
| LicenseWebServicesPort | uint | The license server web services for licensing port. Min=1025, Max=65534, Default=8083 |
| AutomaticMergeEnabled | bool | True when Automatic Merge is enabled, false otherwise. If the number of versions becomes more than the MaxVersions value, a merge will occur at the end of PromoteDiskVersion. Default=true |
| MaxVersions | uint | Maximum number a versions of a Disk that can exist before a merge will automatically occur. Min=3, Max=50, Default=5 |
| MergeMode | uint | Mode to place the version in after a merge has occurred. Values are: 0 (Production), 1 (Test) and 2 (Maintenance). Min=0, Max=2, Default=2 |
| FarmEpoch | UInt64 | Timestamp when the Data Encryption Key (DEK) was created and stored in the Credential Wallet. Default=0 |
| EncryptionStatus | uint | The current status for database encryption. 0 = Idle, 1 = Distributing Keys, 2= Re-encrypting database Min=0, Max=2, Default=0 |
| DefaultDeviceLogLevel | uint | The default logging level used by newly created target devices. Values are: 0 (None), 1 (Fatal), 2 (Error), 3 (Warning), 4 (Info), and 5 (Debug). Min=0, Max=6, Default=4 |
| IsUsageDataScrambled | bool | Indicates whether the sensitive information needs to be scrambled (true) or not (false) when uploading usage telemetry data. Default = true. Default=true |
| LicenseServerCertThumbprint | string | Stores the license server’s server certificate thumbprint when the server certificate is explicitly accepted by the administrator. NULL if no certificate is explicitly accepted. Default=”” Max Length=65535 |
When Farm is not passed, the parameters below are used: Optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or FarmId | Guid | GUID of the Farm to Set. This is optional since there is only one Farm. |
Optional field values to set:
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| NewName | string | Name of the Farm. Default=”” Max Length=50 |
| Description | string | User description. Default=”” Max Length=250 |
| AutoAddEnabled | bool | True when Auto Add is enabled, false otherwise. Default=false |
| AuditingEnabled | bool | True when Auditing is enabled, false otherwise. Default=false |
| LastAuditArchiveDate | DateTime | Last date of Audit Trail data that was Archived. Has the date. Default=Empty |
| DefaultSiteId | Guid | GUID of the Site to place new Devices into automatically. Not used with defaultSiteName. Default=00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 |
| DefaultSiteName | string | Name of the Site to place new Devices into automatically. Not used with DefaultSiteId. Default=”” |
| OfflineDatabaseSupportEnabled | bool | True when Offline Database Support is enabled, false otherwise. Default=false |
| LicenseServer | string | License server name. Default=”” Max Length=255 |
| LicenseServerPort | uint | License server port. Min=1025, Max=65534, Default=27000 |
| LicenseTradeUp | bool | License server trade up, when set to true. Default=false |
| LicenseSKU | uint | LicenseSKU. 0 for on-premises, 1 for cloud. Min=0, Max=1, Default=0 |
| LicenseWebServicesPort | uint | The license server web services for licensing port. Min=1025, Max=65534, Default=8083 |
| AutomaticMergeEnabled | bool | True when Automatic Merge is enabled, false otherwise. If the number of versions becomes more than the MaxVersions value, a merge will occur at the end of PromoteDiskVersion. Default=true |
| MaxVersions | uint | Maximum number a versions of a Disk that can exist before a merge will automatically occur. Min=3, Max=50, Default=5 |
| MergeMode | uint | Mode to place the version in after a merge has occurred. Values are: 0 (Production), 1 (Test) and 2 (Maintenance). Min=0, Max=2, Default=2 |
| FarmEpoch | UInt64 | Timestamp when the Data Encryption Key (DEK) was created and stored in the Credential Wallet. Default=0 |
| EncryptionStatus | uint | The current status for database encryption. 0 = Idle, 1 = Distributing Keys, 2= Re-encrypting database Min=0, Max=2, Default=0 |
| DefaultDeviceLogLevel | uint | The default logging level used by newly created target devices. Values are: 0 (None), 1 (Fatal), 2 (Error), 3 (Warning), 4 (Info), and 5 (Debug). Min=0, Max=6, Default=4 |
| IsUsageDataScrambled | bool | Indicates whether the sensitive information needs to be scrambled (true) or not (false) when uploading usage telemetry data. Default = true. Default=true |
| LicenseServerCertThumbprint | string | Stores the license server’s server certificate thumbprint when the server certificate is explicitly accepted by the administrator. NULL if no certificate is explicitly accepted. Default=”” Max Length=65535 |
Optional SwitchParameter PassThru: If -PassThru is specified, the resulting PvsFarm object is returned. SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Set PvsFarm for Individual Fields
Get the PvsFarm into a $o variable. Change the $o field values and then Set the PvsFarm with the result.
$o = Get-PvsFarm -Fields AuditingEnabled, OfflineDatabaseSupportEnabled
$o.AuditingEnabled = $true
$o.OfflineDatabaseSupportEnabled = $true
Set-PvsFarm $o
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
EXAMPLE 2: Set PvsFarm for a Field Using Pipe
Get the PvsFarm into a $o variable for the field that has the wrong value. Change the $o field to the correct value and then Set the PvsFarm with the result.
Get-PvsFarm -Fields AuditingEnabled | Where-Object {\$\_.AuditingEnabled -ne \$true} | foreach { \$o = \$\_; \$o.AuditingEnabled = \$true; \$o } | Set-PvsFarm
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. The “foreach { $o = $_; $o.X = Y; $o }” sets the field X to value Y and returns the object again so it can be piped to the Set command for update.
Set-PvsFarmView
Set Farm View(s) changed values from PvsFarmView object(s), or set one or more field values for a PvsFarmView.
Required PvsFarmView FarmView: PvsFarmView object(s) with changed property value(s) to be set. The object(s) can come from a pipeline. These values are in the PvsFarmView object, and only will be set if the value has changed.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or FarmViewName | string | name of the Farm View. Max Length=50 |
| Description | string | User description. Default=”” Max Length=250 |
When FarmView is not passed, the parameters below are used: One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or FarmViewId | Guid | GUID of the Farm View to Set. |
| Name or FarmViewName | string | Name of the Farm View to Set. |
Optional field values to set:
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| NewName | string | name of the Farm View. Max Length=50 |
| Description | string | User description. Default=”” Max Length=250 |
Optional SwitchParameter PassThru: If -PassThru is specified, the resulting PvsFarmView object(s) are returned. SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Set PvsFarmView for Individual Fields
Get the PvsFarmView into a $o variable. Change the $o field values and then Set the PvsFarmView with the result.
$o = Get-PvsFarmView -Name oldFarmView -Fields Name
$o.Name = "newFarmView"
Set-PvsFarmView $o
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
EXAMPLE 2: Set PvsFarmView for a Field Using Pipe
Get the PvsFarmView into a $o variable. Change a $o field to the correct value and then Set the PvsFarmView with the result.
Get-PvsFarmView -Name oldFarmView -Fields Name | foreach { \$o = \$\_; \$o.Name = \"newFarmView\"; \$o } | Set-PvsFarmView
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. The “foreach { $o = $_; $o.X = Y; $o }” sets the field X to value Y and returns the object again so it can be piped to the Set command for update.
Set-PvsOverrideVersion
Specify a Disk Version all Production Devices will boot from.
This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DiskLocatorId | Guid[] | GUID of the Disk Locator File to Override the Production Version for. |
or this is required & resolution
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or DiskLocatorName | string[] |
Optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Version | uint |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid[] | |
| SiteName | string[] |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| StoreId | Guid[] | |
| StoreName | string[] |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
DiskLocatorId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Set-PvsOverrideVersion for Name with Version
Set-PvsOverrideVersion -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore -Version 4
Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
EXAMPLE 2: Set-PvsOverrideVersion for PvsDiskLocator Using Pipe
The Get-PvsDiskLocator output is piped to the Set-PvsOverrideVersion.
Get-PvsDiskLocator -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore -Fields Guid | Set-PvsOverrideVersion -Version 4
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
EXAMPLE 3: Set-PvsOverrideVersion for Name
Set-PvsOverrideVersion -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore
Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
EXAMPLE 4: Set-PvsOverrideVersion for PvsDiskLocator Using Pipe
The Get-PvsDiskLocator output is piped to the Set-PvsOverrideVersion.
Get-PvsDiskLocator -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore -Fields Guid | Set-PvsOverrideVersion
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
Set-PvsServer
Set Server(s) changed values from PvsServer object(s), or set one or more field values for a PvsServer. Restart the Server(s) after setting.
Required PvsServer Server: PvsServer object(s) with changed property value(s) to be set. The object(s) can come from a pipeline. These values are in the PvsServer object, and only will be set if the value has changed.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or ServerName | string | Computer name with no spaces. ASCII computer name characters Max Length=21 |
| Description | string | User description. Default=”” Max Length=250 |
| AdMaxPasswordAge | uint | Number of days before a password expires. Min=1, Max=30, Default=7 |
| LicenseTimeout | uint | Amount of seconds before a license times out. Min=15, Max=300, Default=30 |
| VDiskCreatePacing | uint | VDisk create time pacing in milliseconds. Min=0, Max=5, Default=0 |
| FirstPort | uint | Number of the first UDP port for use by the Stream Service, First and Last must allow at least 5 ports. Min=1025, Max=65534, Default=6910 |
| LastPort | uint | Number of the last UDP port for use by the Stream Service, First and Last must allow at least 5 ports. Min=1025, Max=65534, Default=6930 |
| ThreadsPerPort | uint | Number of worker threads per IO port. Required that (threadPerPort * numberPorts * numberIPs) <= 1000. Min=1, Max=60, Default=8 |
| BuffersPerThread | uint | Number of buffers per worker thread. Min=1, Max=128, Default=24 |
| ServerCacheTimeout | uint | Number of seconds to wait before considering another Server is down. Min=5, Max=60, Default=8 |
| IoBurstSize | uint | Number of bytes read/writes can send in a burst of packets. Required that IoBurstSize/(MaxTransmissionUnits-76)<=32. Min=4096, Max=61440, Default=32768 |
| MaxTransmissionUnits | uint | Ethernet maximum transmission unit size for the protocol for use for Server and Device. Required that IoBurstSize/(MaxTransmissionUnits-76)<=32. Min=502, Max=16426, Default=1506 |
| MaxBootDevicesAllowed | uint | Maximum number of Devices allowed to boot simultaneously. Min=1, Max=1000, Default=500 |
| MaxBootSeconds | uint | Maximum number of seconds for a Device to boot. Min=10, Max=900, Default=60 |
| BootPauseSeconds | uint | Number of seconds that a Device will pause during login if its server busy. Min=1, Max=60, Default=10 |
| AdMaxPasswordAgeEnabled | bool | Age the password, when set to true. Default=false |
| EventLoggingEnabled | bool | Enable event logging, when set to true. Default=true |
| NonBlockingIoEnabled | bool | Use non-Blocking IO, when set to true. Default=true |
| Ip | string[] | One or more streaming IPv4 Addresses. If more than one address is included they are comma delimited. NOTE that an empty string results in no configured IPv4 addresses |
| Ipv6 | string[] | One or more streaming IPv6 Addresses. If more than one address is included they are comma delimited. NOTE that an empty string results in no configured IPv6 addresses |
| InitialQueryConnectionPoolSize | uint | Initial size of database connection pool for non-transactional queries. Min=1, Max=1000, Default=50 |
| InitialTransactionConnectionPoolSize | uint | Initial size of database connection pool for transactional queries. Min=1, Max=1000, Default=50 |
| MaxQueryConnectionPoolSize | uint | Maximum size of database connection pool for non-transactional queries. Min=1, Max=32767, Default=1000 |
| MaxTransactionConnectionPoolSize | uint | Maximum size of database connection pool for transactional queries. Min=1, Max=32767, Default=1000 |
| RefreshInterval | uint | Interval, in number of seconds, the server should wait before refreshing settings. If set to 0, unused database connections are never released. Min=0, Max=32767, Default=300 |
| UnusedDbConnectionTimeout | uint | Interval, in number of seconds, a connection should go unused before it is to be released. Min=0, Max=32767, Default=300 |
| BusyDbConnectionRetryCount | uint | Number of times a failed database connection will be retried. Min=0, Max=32767, Default=2 |
| BusyDbConnectionRetryInterval | uint | Interval, in number of milliseconds, the server should wait before retrying to connect to a database. Min=0, Max=10000, Default=25 |
| LocalConcurrentIoLimit | uint | Maximum concurrent IO transactions it performs for vDisks that are local. A value of 0 disables the feature. Min=0, Max=128, Default=4 |
| RemoteConcurrentIoLimit | uint | Maximum concurrent IO transactions it performs for vDisks that are remote. A value of 0 disables the feature. Min=0, Max=128, Default=4 |
| LogLevel | uint | Level to perform logging at. Values are: 0 (None), 1 (Fatal), 2 (Error), 3 (Warning), 4 (Info), 5 (Debug), and 6 (Trace). Min=0, Max=6, Default=4 |
| LogFileSizeMax | uint | Maximum size log files can reach in Megabytes. Min=1, Max=50, Default=5 |
| LogFileBackupCopiesMax | uint | Maximum number of log file backups. Min=1, Max=50, Default=4 |
| PowerRating | float | A strictly relative rating of this Server’s capabilities when compared to other Servers in the Store(s) it belongs too; can be used to help tune load balancing. Min=0.1, Max=1000, Default=1 |
| LastCeipUploadAttempt | DateTime | Time that this server last attempted a CEIP upload. Default=Empty |
| LastBugReportAttempt | DateTime | Time that this server last attempted to upload or generate a bug report bundle. Default=Empty |
| LastBugReportStatus | string | Status of the last bug report on this server. Default=”” Max Length=250 |
| LastBugReportResult | string | Status of the last bug report on this server. Default=”” Max Length=4000 |
| LastBugReportSummary | string | Summary of the last bug report on this server. Default=”” Max Length=250 |
| ServerEpoch | UInt64 | Timestamp when the registry data for that server has been re-encrypted with updated encryption scheme. Default=0 |
| SecurityPolicy | uint | SecurityPolicy Default=0 |
| QuicSettings | string | QuicSettings Default=”” Max Length=65535 |
| QuicPort | uint | QuicPort Default=0 |
| QuicServerCertThumbPrint | string | QuicServerCertThumbPrint Default=”” Max Length=65535 |
| QuicCipherSuites | uint | QuicCipherSuites Default=”” |
| QuicStreamPayloadLength | uint | QuicStreamPayloadLength Default=0 |
| TpmKeyType | uint | TPM key type, TPM_ALG_RSA(1), TPM_ALG_ECC(0x23) Default=0 |
| TpmHashAlg | uint | TPM hash algorithm, TPM_ALG_SHA256(0xb), TPM_ALG_SHA384(0xc), TPM_ALG_SHA512(0xd) Default=0 |
| TpmCurveId | uint | TPM ECC curve ID TPM_ECC_NIST_P256(3), TPM_ECC_NIST_P384(4), TPM_ECC_NIST_P521(5) Default=0 |
When Server is not passed, the parameters below are used: One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or ServerId | Guid | GUID of the Server to Set. |
| Name or ServerName | string | Name of the Server to Set. |
Optional field values to set:
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| NewName | string | Computer name with no spaces. ASCII computer name characters Max Length=21 |
| Description | string | User description. Default=”” Max Length=250 |
| AdMaxPasswordAge | uint | Number of days before a password expires. Min=1, Max=30, Default=7 |
| LicenseTimeout | uint | Amount of seconds before a license times out. Min=15, Max=300, Default=30 |
| VDiskCreatePacing | uint | VDisk create time pacing in milliseconds. Min=0, Max=5, Default=0 |
| FirstPort | uint | Number of the first UDP port for use by the Stream Service, First and Last must allow at least 5 ports. Min=1025, Max=65534, Default=6910 |
| LastPort | uint | Number of the last UDP port for use by the Stream Service, First and Last must allow at least 5 ports. Min=1025, Max=65534, Default=6930 |
| ThreadsPerPort | uint | Number of worker threads per IO port. Required that (threadPerPort * numberPorts * numberIPs) <= 1000. Min=1, Max=60, Default=8 |
| BuffersPerThread | uint | Number of buffers per worker thread. Min=1, Max=128, Default=24 |
| ServerCacheTimeout | uint | Number of seconds to wait before considering another Server is down. Min=5, Max=60, Default=8 |
| IoBurstSize | uint | Number of bytes read/writes can send in a burst of packets. Required that IoBurstSize/(MaxTransmissionUnits-76)<=32. Min=4096, Max=61440, Default=32768 |
| MaxTransmissionUnits | uint | Ethernet maximum transmission unit size for the protocol for use for Server and Device. Required that IoBurstSize/(MaxTransmissionUnits-76)<=32. Min=502, Max=16426, Default=1506 |
| MaxBootDevicesAllowed | uint | Maximum number of Devices allowed to boot simultaneously. Min=1, Max=1000, Default=500 |
| MaxBootSeconds | uint | Maximum number of seconds for a Device to boot. Min=10, Max=900, Default=60 |
| BootPauseSeconds | uint | Number of seconds that a Device will pause during login if its server busy. Min=1, Max=60, Default=10 |
| AdMaxPasswordAgeEnabled | bool | Age the password, when set to true. Default=false |
| EventLoggingEnabled | bool | Enable event logging, when set to true. Default=true |
| NonBlockingIoEnabled | bool | Use non-Blocking IO, when set to true. Default=true |
| Ip | string[] | One or more streaming IPv4 Addresses. If more than one address is included they are comma delimited. NOTE that an empty string results in no configured IPv4 addresses |
| Ipv6 | string[] | One or more streaming IPv6 Addresses. If more than one address is included they are comma delimited. NOTE that an empty string results in no configured IPv6 addresses |
| InitialQueryConnectionPoolSize | uint | Initial size of database connection pool for non-transactional queries. Min=1, Max=1000, Default=50 |
| InitialTransactionConnectionPoolSize | uint | Initial size of database connection pool for transactional queries. Min=1, Max=1000, Default=50 |
| MaxQueryConnectionPoolSize | uint | Maximum size of database connection pool for non-transactional queries. Min=1, Max=32767, Default=1000 |
| MaxTransactionConnectionPoolSize | uint | Maximum size of database connection pool for transactional queries. Min=1, Max=32767, Default=1000 |
| RefreshInterval | uint | Interval, in number of seconds, the server should wait before refreshing settings. If set to 0, unused database connections are never released. Min=0, Max=32767, Default=300 |
| UnusedDbConnectionTimeout | uint | Interval, in number of seconds, a connection should go unused before it is to be released. Min=0, Max=32767, Default=300 |
| BusyDbConnectionRetryCount | uint | Number of times a failed database connection will be retried. Min=0, Max=32767, Default=2 |
| BusyDbConnectionRetryInterval | uint | Interval, in number of milliseconds, the server should wait before retrying to connect to a database. Min=0, Max=10000, Default=25 |
| LocalConcurrentIoLimit | uint | Maximum concurrent IO transactions it performs for vDisks that are local. A value of 0 disables the feature. Min=0, Max=128, Default=4 |
| RemoteConcurrentIoLimit | uint | Maximum concurrent IO transactions it performs for vDisks that are remote. A value of 0 disables the feature. Min=0, Max=128, Default=4 |
| LogLevel | uint | Level to perform logging at. Values are: 0 (None), 1 (Fatal), 2 (Error), 3 (Warning), 4 (Info), 5 (Debug), and 6 (Trace). Min=0, Max=6, Default=4 |
| LogFileSizeMax | uint | Maximum size log files can reach in Megabytes. Min=1, Max=50, Default=5 |
| LogFileBackupCopiesMax | uint | Maximum number of log file backups. Min=1, Max=50, Default=4 |
| PowerRating | float | A strictly relative rating of this Server’s capabilities when compared to other Servers in the Store(s) it belongs too; can be used to help tune load balancing. Min=0.1, Max=1000, Default=1 |
| LastCeipUploadAttempt | DateTime | Time that this server last attempted a CEIP upload. Default=Empty |
| LastBugReportAttempt | DateTime | Time that this server last attempted to upload or generate a bug report bundle. Default=Empty |
| LastBugReportStatus | string | Status of the last bug report on this server. Default=”” Max Length=250 |
| LastBugReportResult | string | Status of the last bug report on this server. Default=”” Max Length=4000 |
| LastBugReportSummary | string | Summary of the last bug report on this server. Default=”” Max Length=250 |
| ServerEpoch | UInt64 | Timestamp when the registry data for that server has been re-encrypted with updated encryption scheme. Default=0 |
| SecurityPolicy | uint | SecurityPolicy Default=0 |
| QuicSettings | string | QuicSettings Default=”” Max Length=65535 |
| QuicPort | uint | QuicPort Default=0 |
| QuicServerCertThumbPrint | string | QuicServerCertThumbPrint Default=”” Max Length=65535 |
| QuicCipherSuites | uint | QuicCipherSuites Default=”” |
| QuicStreamPayloadLength | uint | QuicStreamPayloadLength Default=0 |
| TpmKeyType | uint | TPM key type, TPM_ALG_RSA(1), TPM_ALG_ECC(0x23) Default=0 |
| TpmHashAlg | uint | TPM hash algorithm, TPM_ALG_SHA256(0xb), TPM_ALG_SHA384(0xc), TPM_ALG_SHA512(0xd) Default=0 |
| TpmCurveId | uint | TPM ECC curve ID TPM_ECC_NIST_P256(3), TPM_ECC_NIST_P384(4), TPM_ECC_NIST_P521(5) Default=0 |
Optional SwitchParameter PassThru: If -PassThru is specified, the resulting PvsServer object(s) are returned. SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Set PvsServer for Individual Fields
Get the PvsServer into a $o variable. Change the $o field values and then Set the PvsServer with the result.
$o = Get-PvsServer -Name theServer -Fields LicenseTimeout, ThreadsPerPort
$o.LicenseTimeout = 60
$o.ThreadsPerPort = 10
Set-PvsServer $o
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
EXAMPLE 2: Set PvsServer for a Field Using Pipe
Get the PvsServer into a $o variable. Change a $o field to the correct value and then Set the PvsServer with the result.
Get-PvsServer -Name theServer -Fields LicenseTimeout | foreach { \$o = \$\_; \$o.LicenseTimeout = 60; \$o } | Set-PvsServer
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. The “foreach { $o = $_; $o.X = Y; $o }” sets the field X to value Y and returns the object again so it can be piped to the Set command for update.
Set-PvsServerBiosBootstrap
Oem Only: Set Server Bios Bootstrap(s) changed values from PvsServerBiosBootstrap object(s), or set one or more field values for a PvsServerBiosBootstrap.
Required PvsServerBiosBootstrap ServerBiosBootstrap: PvsServerBiosBootstrap object(s) with changed property value(s) to be set. The object(s) can come from a pipeline. These values are in the PvsServerBiosBootstrap object, and only will be set if the value has changed.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Enabled | bool | Automatically update the BIOS on the target device with these setting when set to true, otherwise do not use these settings. Default=false |
| DhcpEnabled | bool | Use DHCP to retrieve target device IP when set to true, otherwise use the static domain, dnsIpAddresstrue and dnsIpAddress2 settings. Default=true |
| Lookup | bool | Use DNS to find the Server when set to true with the ServerName host value, otherwise use the bootservertrue_Ip, bootservertrue_Port, bootserver2_Ip, bootserver2_Port, bootserver3_Ip, bootserver3_Port, bootserver4_Ip, and bootserver4_Port settings. Default=true |
| VerboseMode | bool | Display verbose diagnostic information when set to true. Default=false |
| InterruptSafeMode | bool | Interrupt safe mode (use if target device hangs during boot) when set to true. Default=false |
| PaeMode | bool | PAE mode (use if PAE enabled in boot.ini of target device) when set to true. Default=false |
| BootFromHdOnFail | bool | For network recovery reboot to hard drive when set to true, restore network connection when set to false. Default=false |
| RecoveryTime | uint | When bootFromHdOnFail is 1, this is the number of seconds to wait before reboot to hard drive. Min=10, Max=60000, Default=50 |
| PollingTimeout | uint | Login polling timeout in milliseconds. Min=1000, Max=60000, Default=5000 |
| GeneralTimeout | uint | Login general timeout in milliseconds. Min=1000, Max=60000, Default=5000 |
| Name or ServerName | string | Host to use for DNS lookup. Only used when Lookup is true. Default=IMAGESERVER1 |
| Bootserver1_Ip | string | 1st boot server IP. Only used when Lookup is false. |
| Bootserver1_Port | uint | 1st boot server port. Only used when Lookup is false. Min=1025, Max=65536, Default=6910 |
| Bootserver2_Ip | string | 2nd boot server IP. Only used when Lookup is false. Default=0.0.0.0 |
| Bootserver2_Port | uint | 2nd boot server port. Only used when Lookup is false. Min=1025, Max=65536, Default=6910 |
| Bootserver3_Ip | string | 3rd boot server IP. Only used when Lookup is false. Default=0.0.0.0 |
| Bootserver3_Port | uint | 3rd boot server port. Only used when Lookup is false. Min=1025, Max=65536, Default=6910 |
| Bootserver4_Ip | string | 4th boot server IP. Only used when Lookup is false. Default=0.0.0.0 |
| Bootserver4_Port | uint | 4th boot server port. Only used when Lookup is false. Min=1025, Max=65536, Default=6910 |
| Domain | string | Domain of the primary and secondary DNS servers. Only used when DhcpEnabled is false. |
| DnsIpAddress1 | string | Primary DNS server IP. Only used when DhcpEnabled is false. |
| DnsIpAddress2 | string | Secondary DNS server IP. Only used when DhcpEnabled is false. |
When ServerBiosBootstrap is not passed, the parameters below are used: One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or ServerId | Guid | GUID of the Server to Set the dell_bios.bin BIOS bootstrap file. |
| Name or ServerName | string | Name of the Server to Set the dell_bios.bin BIOS bootstrap file. |
Optional field values to set:
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Enabled | bool | Automatically update the BIOS on the target device with these setting when set to true, otherwise do not use these settings. Default=false |
| DhcpEnabled | bool | Use DHCP to retrieve target device IP when set to true, otherwise use the static domain, dnsIpAddresstrue and dnsIpAddress2 settings. Default=true |
| Lookup | bool | Use DNS to find the Server when set to true with the ServerName host value, otherwise use the bootservertrue_Ip, bootservertrue_Port, bootserver2_Ip, bootserver2_Port, bootserver3_Ip, bootserver3_Port, bootserver4_Ip, and bootserver4_Port settings. Default=true |
| VerboseMode | bool | Display verbose diagnostic information when set to true. Default=false |
| InterruptSafeMode | bool | Interrupt safe mode (use if target device hangs during boot) when set to true. Default=false |
| PaeMode | bool | PAE mode (use if PAE enabled in boot.ini of target device) when set to true. Default=false |
| BootFromHdOnFail | bool | For network recovery reboot to hard drive when set to true, restore network connection when set to false. Default=false |
| RecoveryTime | uint | When bootFromHdOnFail is 1, this is the number of seconds to wait before reboot to hard drive. Min=10, Max=60000, Default=50 |
| PollingTimeout | uint | Login polling timeout in milliseconds. Min=1000, Max=60000, Default=5000 |
| GeneralTimeout | uint | Login general timeout in milliseconds. Min=1000, Max=60000, Default=5000 |
| NewName | string | Host to use for DNS lookup. Only used when Lookup is true. Default=IMAGESERVER1 |
| Bootserver1_Ip | string | 1st boot server IP. Only used when Lookup is false. |
| Bootserver1_Port | uint | 1st boot server port. Only used when Lookup is false. Min=1025, Max=65536, Default=6910 |
| Bootserver2_Ip | string | 2nd boot server IP. Only used when Lookup is false. Default=0.0.0.0 |
| Bootserver2_Port | uint | 2nd boot server port. Only used when Lookup is false. Min=1025, Max=65536, Default=6910 |
| Bootserver3_Ip | string | 3rd boot server IP. Only used when Lookup is false. Default=0.0.0.0 |
| Bootserver3_Port | uint | 3rd boot server port. Only used when Lookup is false. Min=1025, Max=65536, Default=6910 |
| Bootserver4_Ip | string | 4th boot server IP. Only used when Lookup is false. Default=0.0.0.0 |
| Bootserver4_Port | uint | 4th boot server port. Only used when Lookup is false. Min=1025, Max=65536, Default=6910 |
| Domain | string | Domain of the primary and secondary DNS servers. Only used when DhcpEnabled is false. |
| DnsIpAddress1 | string | Primary DNS server IP. Only used when DhcpEnabled is false. |
| DnsIpAddress2 | string | Secondary DNS server IP. Only used when DhcpEnabled is false. |
Optional SwitchParameter PassThru: If -PassThru is specified, the resulting PvsServerBiosBootstrap object(s) are returned. SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Set PvsServerBiosBootstrap for Individual Fields
Get the PvsServerBiosBootstrap into a $o variable. Change the $o field values and then Set the PvsServerBiosBootstrap with the result.
$o = Get-PvsServerBiosBootstrap -Name theServer -Fields DhcpEnabled
$o.DhcpEnabled = $true
Set-PvsServerBiosBootstrap $o
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
EXAMPLE 2: Set PvsServerBiosBootstrap for a Field Using Pipe
Get the PvsServerBiosBootstrap into a $o variable. Change a $o field to the correct value and then Set the PvsServerBiosBootstrap with the result.
Get-PvsServerBiosBootstrap -Name theServer -Fields DhcpEnabled | foreach { \$o = \$\_; \$o.DhcpEnabled = \$true; \$o } | Set-PvsServerBiosBootstrap
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. The “foreach { $o = $_; $o.X = Y; $o }” sets the field X to value Y and returns the object again so it can be piped to the Set command for update.
Set-PvsServerBootstrap
Set Server Bootstrap(s) changed values from PvsServerBootstrap object(s), or set one or more field values for a PvsServerBootstarp.
Required PvsServerBootstrap ServerBootstrap: PvsServerBootstrap object(s) with changed property value(s) to be set. The object(s) can come from a pipeline. These values are in the PvsServerBootstrap object, and only will be set if the value has changed.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Bootserver1_Ip | string | 1st boot server IP. |
| Bootserver1_Netmask | string | 1st boot server netmask. Default=0.0.0.0 |
| Bootserver1_Gateway | string | 1st boot server gateway. Default=0.0.0.0 |
| Bootserver1_Port | uint | 1st boot server port. Min=1025, Max=65536, Default=6910 |
| Bootserver2_Ip | string | 2nd boot server IP. Default=0.0.0.0 |
| Bootserver2_Netmask | string | 2nd boot server netmask. Default=0.0.0.0 |
| Bootserver2_Gateway | string | 2nd boot server gateway. Default=0.0.0.0 |
| Bootserver2_Port | uint | 2nd boot server port. Min=1025, Max=65536, Default=6910 |
| Bootserver3_Ip | string | 3rd boot server IP. Default=0.0.0.0 |
| Bootserver3_Netmask | string | 3rd boot server netmask. Default=0.0.0.0 |
| Bootserver3_Gateway | string | 3rd boot server gateway. Default=0.0.0.0 |
| Bootserver3_Port | uint | 3rd boot server port. Min=1025, Max=65536, Default=6910 |
| Bootserver4_Ip | string | 4th boot server IP. Default=0.0.0.0 |
| Bootserver4_Netmask | string | 4th boot server netmask. Default=0.0.0.0 |
| Bootserver4_Gateway | string | 4th boot server gateway. Default=0.0.0.0 |
| Bootserver4_Port | uint | 4th boot server port. Min=1025, Max=65536, Default=6910 |
| VerboseMode | bool | Display verbose diagnostic information when set to true. Default=false |
| InterruptSafeMode | bool | Interrupt safe mode (use if target device hangs during boot) when set to true. Default=false |
| PaeMode | bool | PAE mode (use if PAE enabled in boot.ini of target device) when set to true. Default=false |
| BootFromHdOnFail | bool | For network recovery reboot to hard drive when set to true, restore network connection when set to false. Default=false |
| RecoveryTime | uint | When bootFromHdOnFail is 1, this is the number of seconds to wait before reboot to hard drive. Min=10, Max=60000, Default=50 |
| PollingTimeout | uint | Login polling timeout in milliseconds. Min=1000, Max=60000, Default=5000 |
| GeneralTimeout | uint | Login general timeout in milliseconds. Min=1000, Max=60000, Default=5000 |
When ServerBootstrap is not passed, the parameters below are used: One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or ServerId | Guid | GUID of the Server to Set the named bootstrap file on. |
| ServerName | string | Name of the Server to Set the named bootstrap file on. |
This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name | string |
Optional field values to set:
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Bootserver1_Ip | string | 1st boot server IP. |
| Bootserver1_Netmask | string | 1st boot server netmask. Default=0.0.0.0 |
| Bootserver1_Gateway | string | 1st boot server gateway. Default=0.0.0.0 |
| Bootserver1_Port | uint | 1st boot server port. Min=1025, Max=65536, Default=6910 |
| Bootserver2_Ip | string | 2nd boot server IP. Default=0.0.0.0 |
| Bootserver2_Netmask | string | 2nd boot server netmask. Default=0.0.0.0 |
| Bootserver2_Gateway | string | 2nd boot server gateway. Default=0.0.0.0 |
| Bootserver2_Port | uint | 2nd boot server port. Min=1025, Max=65536, Default=6910 |
| Bootserver3_Ip | string | 3rd boot server IP. Default=0.0.0.0 |
| Bootserver3_Netmask | string | 3rd boot server netmask. Default=0.0.0.0 |
| Bootserver3_Gateway | string | 3rd boot server gateway. Default=0.0.0.0 |
| Bootserver3_Port | uint | 3rd boot server port. Min=1025, Max=65536, Default=6910 |
| Bootserver4_Ip | string | 4th boot server IP. Default=0.0.0.0 |
| Bootserver4_Netmask | string | 4th boot server netmask. Default=0.0.0.0 |
| Bootserver4_Gateway | string | 4th boot server gateway. Default=0.0.0.0 |
| Bootserver4_Port | uint | 4th boot server port. Min=1025, Max=65536, Default=6910 |
| VerboseMode | bool | Display verbose diagnostic information when set to true. Default=false |
| InterruptSafeMode | bool | Interrupt safe mode (use if target device hangs during boot) when set to true. Default=false |
| PaeMode | bool | PAE mode (use if PAE enabled in boot.ini of target device) when set to true. Default=false |
| BootFromHdOnFail | bool | For network recovery reboot to hard drive when set to true, restore network connection when set to false. Default=false |
| RecoveryTime | uint | When bootFromHdOnFail is 1, this is the number of seconds to wait before reboot to hard drive. Min=10, Max=60000, Default=50 |
| PollingTimeout | uint | Login polling timeout in milliseconds. Min=1000, Max=60000, Default=5000 |
| GeneralTimeout | uint | Login general timeout in milliseconds. Min=1000, Max=60000, Default=5000 |
Optional SwitchParameter PassThru: If -PassThru is specified, the resulting PvsServerBootstrap object(s) are returned. SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Set PvsServerBootstrap for Individual Fields
Get the PvsServerBootstrap into a $o variable. Change the $o field values and then Set the PvsServerBootstrap with the result.
$o = Get-PvsServerBootstrap -Name theBootstrapFile -ServerName theServer -Fields VerboseMode
$o.VerboseMode = $true
Set-PvsServerBootstrap $o
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
EXAMPLE 2: Set PvsServerBootstrap for a Field Using Pipe
Get the PvsServerBootstrap into a $o variable. Change a $o field to the correct value and then Set the PvsServerBootstrap with the result.
Get-PvsServerBootstrap -Name theBootstrapFile -ServerName theServer -Fields VerboseMode | foreach { \$o = \$\_; \$o.VerboseMode = \$true; \$o } | Set-PvsServerBootstrap
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. The “foreach { $o = $_; $o.X = Y; $o }” sets the field X to value Y and returns the object again so it can be piped to the Set command for update.
Set-PvsServerStore
Set ServerStore(s) changed values from PvsServerStore object(s), or set one or more field values for a PvsServerStore.
Required PvsServerStore ServerStore: PvsServerStore object(s) with changed property value(s) to be set. The object(s) can come from a pipeline. These values are in the PvsServerStore object, and only will be set if the value has changed.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Path | string | Directory path that the Server uses to access the Store. Default=”” Max Length=255 |
| CachePath | string[] | Cache path(s) that the Server uses with the Store. If none are specified the caches will be placed in the Store cachePath. Default=None |
When ServerStore is not passed, the parameters below are used: One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or ServerId | Guid | GUID of a Server that uses the path to get to the Store. |
| Name or ServerName | string | Name of a Server that uses the path to get to the Store. |
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| StoreId | Guid | |
| StoreName | string |
Optional field values to set:
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Path | string | Directory path that the Server uses to access the Store. Default=”” Max Length=255 |
| CachePath | string[] | Cache path(s) that the Server uses with the Store. If none are specified the caches will be placed in the Store cachePath. Default=None |
Optional SwitchParameter PassThru: If -PassThru is specified, the resulting PvsServerStore object(s) are returned. SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Set PvsServerStore for Individual Fields
Get the PvsServerStore into a $o variable. Change the $o field values and then Set the PvsServerStore with the result.
$o = Get-PvsServerStore -ServerName theServer -StoreName theStore -Fields CachePath
$o.CachePath = "\\Network\CachePath"
Set-PvsServerStore $o
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
EXAMPLE 2: Set PvsServerStore for a Field Using Pipe
Get the PvsServerStore into a $o variable. Change a $o field to the correct value and then Set the PvsServerStore with the result.
Get-PvsServerStore -ServerName theServer -StoreName theStore -Fields CachePath | foreach { \$o = \$\_; \$o.CachePath = \"\Network\CachePath\"; \$o } | Set-PvsServerStore
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. The “foreach { $o = $_; $o.X = Y; $o }” sets the field X to value Y and returns the object again so it can be piped to the Set command for update.
Set-PvsSite
Set Site(s) changed values from PvsSite object(s), or set one or more field values for a PvsSite.
Required PvsSite Site: PvsSite object(s) with changed property value(s) to be set. The object(s) can come from a pipeline. These values are in the PvsSite object, and only will be set if the value has changed.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or SiteName | string | Name of the Site. Max Length=50 |
| Description | string | User description. Default=”” Max Length=250 |
| DefaultCollectionId | Guid | GUID of the Collection to place new Devices into automatically. Not used with defaultCollectionName. Default=00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 |
| DefaultCollectionName | string | Name of the Collection to place new Devices into automatically. Not used with DefaultCollectionId. Default=”” |
| InventoryFilePollingInterval | uint | The number of seconds between polls for Disk changes in the Stores. Min=1, Max=600, Default=60 |
| EnableDiskUpdate | bool | True when Disk Updated is enabled for the Site, false otherwise. Default=false |
| DiskUpdateServerId | Guid | GUID of the Disk Update Server for the Site. Not used with DiskUpdateServerName. Default=00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 |
| DiskUpdateServerName | string | Name of the Disk Update Server for the Site. Not used with DiskUpdateServerId. Default=”” |
| MakUser | string | User name used for MAK activation. Default=”” Max Length=64 |
| MakPassword | string | User password used for MAK activation. Default=”” Max Length=64 |
| EnableXsProxy | string | Enable XenServerProxy when set to 1 Default=”” |
| VirtualHostingPoolId | Guid | GUID of the VirtualHostingPool object. |
| VirtualHostingPoolName | string | Name of the VirtualHostingPool object. |
| XsPvsSiteUuid | string | GUID of the XenServer PVS Site. |
When Site is not passed, the parameters below are used: One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or SiteId | Guid | GUID of the Site to Set. |
| Name or SiteName | string | Name of the Site to Set. |
Optional field values to set:
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| NewName | string | Name of the Site. Max Length=50 |
| Description | string | User description. Default=”” Max Length=250 |
| DefaultCollectionId | Guid | GUID of the Collection to place new Devices into automatically. Not used with defaultCollectionName. Default=00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 |
| DefaultCollectionName | string | Name of the Collection to place new Devices into automatically. Not used with DefaultCollectionId. Default=”” |
| InventoryFilePollingInterval | uint | The number of seconds between polls for Disk changes in the Stores. Min=1, Max=600, Default=60 |
| EnableDiskUpdate | bool | True when Disk Updated is enabled for the Site, false otherwise. Default=false |
| DiskUpdateServerId | Guid | GUID of the Disk Update Server for the Site. Not used with DiskUpdateServerName. Default=00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 |
| DiskUpdateServerName | string | Name of the Disk Update Server for the Site. Not used with DiskUpdateServerId. Default=”” |
| MakUser | string | User name used for MAK activation. Default=”” Max Length=64 |
| MakPassword | string | User password used for MAK activation. Default=”” Max Length=64 |
| EnableXsProxy | string | Enable XenServerProxy when set to 1 Default=”” |
| VirtualHostingPoolId | Guid | GUID of the VirtualHostingPool object. |
| VirtualHostingPoolName | string | Name of the VirtualHostingPool object. |
| XsPvsSiteUuid | string | GUID of the XenServer PVS Site. |
Optional SwitchParameter PassThru: If -PassThru is specified, the resulting PvsSite object(s) are returned. SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Set PvsSite for Individual Fields
Get the PvsSite into a $o variable. Change the $o field values and then Set the PvsSite with the result.
$o = Get-PvsSite -Name theSite -Fields InventoryFilePollingInterval
$o.InventoryFilePollingInterval = 120
Set-PvsSite $o
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
EXAMPLE 2: Set PvsSite for a Field Using Pipe
Get the PvsSite into a $o variable. Change a $o field to the correct value and then Set the PvsSite with the result.
Get-PvsSite -Name theSite -Fields InventoryFilePollingInterval | foreach { \$o = \$\_; \$o.InventoryFilePollingInterval = 120; \$o } | Set-PvsSite
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. The “foreach { $o = $_; $o.X = Y; $o }” sets the field X to value Y and returns the object again so it can be piped to the Set command for update.
Set-PvsSiteView
Set Site View(s) changed values from PvsSiteView object(s), or set one or more field values for a PvsSiteView.
Required PvsSiteView SiteView: PvsSiteView object(s) with changed property value(s) to be set. The object(s) can come from a pipeline. These values are in the PvsSiteView object, and only will be set if the value has changed.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or SiteViewName | string | Name of the Site View. Max Length=50 |
| Description | string | User description. Default=”” Max Length=250 |
When SiteView is not passed, the parameters below are used: This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or SiteViewId | Guid | GUID of the Site View to Set. |
or this is required & resolution
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or SiteViewName | string |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid | |
| SiteName | string |
Optional field values to set:
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| NewName | string | Name of the Site View. Max Length=50 |
| Description | string | User description. Default=”” Max Length=250 |
Optional SwitchParameter PassThru: If -PassThru is specified, the resulting PvsSiteView object(s) are returned. SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Set PvsSiteView for Individual Fields
Get the PvsSiteView into a $o variable. Change the $o field values and then Set the PvsSiteView with the result.
$o = Get-PvsSiteView -Name oldSiteView -SiteName theSite -Fields Name
$o.Name = "newSiteView"
Set-PvsSiteView $o
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 2: Set PvsSiteView for a Field Using Pipe
Get the PvsSiteView into a $o variable. Change a $o field to the correct value and then Set the PvsSiteView with the result.
Get-PvsSiteView -Name oldSiteView -SiteName theSite -Fields Name | foreach { \$o = \$\_; \$o.Name = \"newSiteView\"; \$o } | Set-PvsSiteView
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. The “foreach { $o = $_; $o.X = Y; $o }” sets the field X to value Y and returns the object again so it can be piped to the Set command for update.
Set-PvsStore
Set Store(s) changed values from PvsStore object(s), or set one or more field values for a PvsStore.
Required PvsStore Store: PvsStore object(s) with changed property value(s) to be set. The object(s) can come from a pipeline. These values are in the PvsStore object, and only will be set if the value has changed.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or StoreName | string | Name of the Store. Max Length=50 |
| SiteId | Guid | GUID of the Site where Administrators of that Site can change this Store. Not used for Farm Stores. SiteName can be used instead. Default=00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 |
| SiteName | string | Name of the Site where Administrators of that Site can change this Store. Not used for Farm Stores. SiteId can be used instead. Default=”” |
| Description | string | User description. Default=”” Max Length=250 |
| Path | string | Default directory path that the Servers use to access this Store. Max Length=255 |
| CachePath | string[] | Default Cache path(s) that the Servers use with this Store. If none are specified the caches will be placed in the WriteCache subdirectory of the Store path. Default=None |
When Store is not passed, the parameters below are used: One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or StoreId | Guid | GUID of the Store to Set. |
| Name or StoreName | string | Name of the Store to Set. |
Optional field values to set:
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| NewName | string | Name of the Store. Max Length=50 |
| SiteId | Guid | GUID of the Site where Administrators of that Site can change this Store. Not used for Farm Stores. SiteName can be used instead. Default=00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 |
| SiteName | string | Name of the Site where Administrators of that Site can change this Store. Not used for Farm Stores. SiteId can be used instead. Default=”” |
| Description | string | User description. Default=”” Max Length=250 |
| Path | string | Default directory path that the Servers use to access this Store. Max Length=255 |
| CachePath | string[] | Default Cache path(s) that the Servers use with this Store. If none are specified the caches will be placed in the WriteCache subdirectory of the Store path. Default=None |
Optional SwitchParameter PassThru: If -PassThru is specified, the resulting PvsStore object(s) are returned. SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Set PvsStore for Individual Fields
Get the PvsStore into a $o variable. Change the $o field values and then Set the PvsStore with the result.
$o = Get-PvsStore -Name theStore -Fields CachePath
$o.CachePath = "\\Network\CachePath"
Set-PvsStore $o
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
EXAMPLE 2: Set PvsStore for a Field Using Pipe
Get the PvsStore into a $o variable. Change a $o field to the correct value and then Set the PvsStore with the result.
Get-PvsStore -Name theStore -Fields CachePath | foreach { \$o = \$\_; \$o.CachePath = \"\Network\CachePath\"; \$o } | Set-PvsStore
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. The “foreach { $o = $_; $o.X = Y; $o }” sets the field X to value Y and returns the object again so it can be piped to the Set command for update.
Set-PvsUpdateTask
Set Update Task(s) changed values from PvsUpdateTask object(s), or set one or more field values for a PvsUpdateTask.
Required PvsUpdateTask UpdateTask: PvsUpdateTask object(s) with changed property value(s) to be set. The object(s) can come from a pipeline. These values are in the PvsUpdateTask object, and only will be set if the value has changed.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or UpdateTaskName | string | Name of the Update Task. It is unique within the Site. Max Length=50 |
| Description | string | User description. Default=”” Max Length=250 |
| Enabled | bool | True when it will be processed, false otherwise. Default=true |
| Hour | uint | The hour of the day to perform the task. Min=0, Max=23, Default=0 |
| Minute | uint | The minute of the hour to perform the task. Min=0, Max=59, Default=0 |
| Recurrence | uint | The update will reoccur on this schedule. 0 = None, 1 = Daily, 2 = Every Weekday, 3 = Weekly, 4 = Monthly Date, 5 = Monthly Type. Min=0, Max=5, Default=0 |
| DayMask | uint | Days selected values. 1 = Monday, 2 = Tuesday, 4 = Wednesday, 8 = Thursday, 16 = Friday, 32 = Saturday, 64 = Sunday, 128 = Day. Default=0. This is used with Weekly and Monthly Type recurrence. Min=1, Max=255, Default=4 |
| Date | uint[] | Days of the month. Numbers from 1-31 are the only valid values. This is used with Monthly Date recurrence. Default=”” Max Length=83 |
| MonthlyOffset | uint | When to happen monthly. 0 = None, 1 = First, 2 = Second, 3 = Third, 4 = Forth, 5 = Last. This is used with Monthly Type recurrence. Min=0, Max=5, Default=3 |
| EsdType | string | Esd to use. Valid values are SCCM or WSUS. If no value, a custom script is run on the client. Default=”” Max Length=50 |
| PreUpdateScript | string | Script file to run before the update starts. Default=”” Max Length=255 |
| PreVmScript | string | Script file to run before the VM is loaded. Default=”” Max Length=255 |
| PostUpdateScript | string | Script file to run after the update finishes. Default=”” Max Length=255 |
| PostVmScript | string | Script file to run after the VM is unloaded. Default=”” Max Length=255 |
| Domain | string | Domain to add the Disk Update Device(s) to. If not included, the first Domain Controller found on the Server is used. Default=”” Max Length=255 |
| OrganizationUnit | string | Organizational Unit to add the Disk Update Device(s) to. This parameter is optional. If it is not specified, the device is added to the built in Computers container. Child OU’s should be delimited with forward slashes, e.g. “ParentOU/ChildOU”. Special characters in an OU name, such as ‘”’, ‘#’, ‘+’, ‘,’, ‘;’, ‘>’, ‘=’, must be escaped with a backslash. For example, an OU called “commaIn,TheMiddle” must be specified as “commaIn\,TheMiddle”. The old syntax of delimiting child OU’s with a comma is still supported, but deprecated. Note that in this case, the child OU comes first, e.g. “ChildOU,ParentOU”. Default=”” Max Length=255 |
| PostUpdateApprove | uint | Access to place the version in after the update has occurred. 0 = Production, 1 = Test, 2 = Maintenance. Min=0, Max=2, Default=0 |
When UpdateTask is not passed, the parameters below are used: This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or UpdateTaskId | Guid | GUID of the Update Task to Set. |
or this is required & resolution
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or UpdateTaskName | string |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid | |
| SiteName | string |
Optional field values to set:
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| NewName | string | Name of the Update Task. It is unique within the Site. Max Length=50 |
| Description | string | User description. Default=”” Max Length=250 |
| Enabled | bool | True when it will be processed, false otherwise. Default=true |
| Hour | uint | The hour of the day to perform the task. Min=0, Max=23, Default=0 |
| Minute | uint | The minute of the hour to perform the task. Min=0, Max=59, Default=0 |
| Recurrence | uint | The update will reoccur on this schedule. 0 = None, 1 = Daily, 2 = Every Weekday, 3 = Weekly, 4 = Monthly Date, 5 = Monthly Type. Min=0, Max=5, Default=0 |
| DayMask | uint | Days selected values. 1 = Monday, 2 = Tuesday, 4 = Wednesday, 8 = Thursday, 16 = Friday, 32 = Saturday, 64 = Sunday, 128 = Day. Default=0. This is used with Weekly and Monthly Type recurrence. Min=1, Max=255, Default=4 |
| Date | uint[] | Days of the month. Numbers from 1-31 are the only valid values. This is used with Monthly Date recurrence. Default=”” Max Length=83 |
| MonthlyOffset | uint | When to happen monthly. 0 = None, 1 = First, 2 = Second, 3 = Third, 4 = Forth, 5 = Last. This is used with Monthly Type recurrence. Min=0, Max=5, Default=3 |
| EsdType | string | Esd to use. Valid values are SCCM or WSUS. If no value, a custom script is run on the client. Default=”” Max Length=50 |
| PreUpdateScript | string | Script file to run before the update starts. Default=”” Max Length=255 |
| PreVmScript | string | Script file to run before the VM is loaded. Default=”” Max Length=255 |
| PostUpdateScript | string | Script file to run after the update finishes. Default=”” Max Length=255 |
| PostVmScript | string | Script file to run after the VM is unloaded. Default=”” Max Length=255 |
| Domain | string | Domain to add the Disk Update Device(s) to. If not included, the first Domain Controller found on the Server is used. Default=”” Max Length=255 |
| OrganizationUnit | string | Organizational Unit to add the Disk Update Device(s) to. This parameter is optional. If it is not specified, the device is added to the built in Computers container. Child OU’s should be delimited with forward slashes, e.g. “ParentOU/ChildOU”. Special characters in an OU name, such as ‘”’, ‘#’, ‘+’, ‘,’, ‘;’, ‘>’, ‘=’, must be escaped with a backslash. For example, an OU called “commaIn,TheMiddle” must be specified as “commaIn\,TheMiddle”. The old syntax of delimiting child OU’s with a comma is still supported, but deprecated. Note that in this case, the child OU comes first, e.g. “ChildOU,ParentOU”. Default=”” Max Length=255 |
| PostUpdateApprove | uint | Access to place the version in after the update has occurred. 0 = Production, 1 = Test, 2 = Maintenance. Min=0, Max=2, Default=0 |
Optional SwitchParameter PassThru: If -PassThru is specified, the resulting PvsUpdateTask object(s) are returned. SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Set PvsUpdateTask for Individual Fields
Get the PvsUpdateTask into a $o variable. Change the $o field values and then Set the PvsUpdateTask with the result.
$o = Get-PvsUpdateTask -Name theUpdateTask -SiteName theSite -Fields Date, Recurrence
$o.Date = 1, 15
$o.Recurrence = 4
Set-PvsUpdateTask $o
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 2: Set PvsUpdateTask for a Field Using Pipe
Get the PvsUpdateTask into a $o variable. Change a $o field to the correct value and then Set the PvsUpdateTask with the result.
Get-PvsUpdateTask -Name theUpdateTask -SiteName theSite -Fields Recurrence | foreach { \$o = \$\_; \$o.Recurrence = 1; \$o } | Set-PvsUpdateTask
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. The “foreach { $o = $_; $o.X = Y; $o }” sets the field X to value Y and returns the object again so it can be piped to the Set command for update.
Set-PvsVirtualHostingPool
Set Virtual Hosting Pool(s) changed values from PvsVirtualHostingPool object(s), or set one or more field values for a PvsVirtualHostingPool.
Required PvsVirtualHostingPool VirtualHostingPool: PvsVirtualHostingPool object(s) with changed property value(s) to be set. The object(s) can come from a pipeline. These values are in the PvsVirtualHostingPool object, and only will be set if the value has changed.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or VirtualHostingPoolName | string | Name of the Virtual Hosting Pool. It is unique within the Site. Max Length=50 |
| Type | uint | Type of the Virtual Hosting Pool. 0 = Citrix XenServer, 1 = Microsoft SCVMM/Hyper-V, 2 = VMWare vSphere/ESX, 3 = Nutanix, 4 = Azure, 5 = GCP. Min=0, Max=255, Default=0 |
| Description | string | User description. Default=”” Max Length=250 |
| Server | string | Name or IP of the Host Server. Max Length=255 |
| Port | uint | Port of the Host Server. Min=80, Max=65534, Default=80 |
| Datacenter | string | Datacenter of the Virtual Hosting Pool. Default=”” Max Length=250 |
| UpdateLimit | uint | Number of updates at the same time. Min=2, Max=1000, Default=1000 |
| UpdateTimeout | uint | Timeout for updates. Min=2, Max=240, Default=60 |
| ShutdownTimeout | uint | Timeout for shutdown. Min=2, Max=30, Default=10 |
| UserName | string | Name to use when logging into the Server. |
| Password | string | Password to use when logging into the Server. |
| XdHostingUnitUuid | Guid | UUID of XenDesktop Hosting Unit Default=00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 |
| PrepopulateEnabled | bool | Enable prepopulate when set to true Default=false |
| XsPvsSiteUuid | Guid | UUID of XenServer PVS_site Default=00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 |
| PlatformVersion | string | Hypervisor Host Version Default=”” Max Length=250 |
| XdHcHypervisorConnectionName | string | Hypervisor Connection Name for HCL Connection Details object Default=”” Max Length=250 |
| XdHcHypervisorConnectionUid | string | Hypervisor Connection Uid for HCL Connection Details object Default=”” Max Length=250 |
| XdHcRevision | string | Revision for HCL Connection Details object Default=”” Max Length=250 |
| XdHcCustomProperties | string | Custom Properties for HCL Connection Details object Default=”” Max Length=65535 |
| XdHcSslThumbprints | string | Ssl Thumbprints for HCL Connection Details object Default=”” Max Length=65535 |
| CredentialsUid | string | UUID of any record associated with the credentials Default=”” Max Length=65535 |
| DdcType | uint | Type of the DDC. 0 = Unset, 1 = Citrix Cloud, 2 = customer-managed. Min=0, Max=2, Default=0 |
| EncryptionEpoch | UInt64 | Timestamp of the encryption Key used to encrypt fields Default=0 |
| DisableHostXsProxy | string | True to disable PVS-Accelerator Default=”” |
When VirtualHostingPool is not passed, the parameters below are used: This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or VirtualHostingPoolId | Guid | GUID of the Virtual Hosting Pool to Set. |
or this is required & resolution
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or VirtualHostingPoolName | string |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid | |
| SiteName | string |
Optional field values to set:
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| NewName | string | Name of the Virtual Hosting Pool. It is unique within the Site. Max Length=50 |
| Type | uint | Type of the Virtual Hosting Pool. 0 = Citrix XenServer, 1 = Microsoft SCVMM/Hyper-V, 2 = VMWare vSphere/ESX, 3 = Nutanix, 4 = Azure, 5 = GCP. Min=0, Max=255, Default=0 |
| Description | string | User description. Default=”” Max Length=250 |
| Server | string | Name or IP of the Host Server. Max Length=255 |
| Port | uint | Port of the Host Server. Min=80, Max=65534, Default=80 |
| Datacenter | string | Datacenter of the Virtual Hosting Pool. Default=”” Max Length=250 |
| UpdateLimit | uint | Number of updates at the same time. Min=2, Max=1000, Default=1000 |
| UpdateTimeout | uint | Timeout for updates. Min=2, Max=240, Default=60 |
| ShutdownTimeout | uint | Timeout for shutdown. Min=2, Max=30, Default=10 |
| UserName | string | Name to use when logging into the Server. |
| Password | string | Password to use when logging into the Server. |
| XdHostingUnitUuid | Guid | UUID of XenDesktop Hosting Unit Default=00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 |
| PrepopulateEnabled | bool | Enable prepopulate when set to true Default=false |
| XsPvsSiteUuid | Guid | UUID of XenServer PVS_site Default=00000000-0000-0000-0000-000000000000 |
| PlatformVersion | string | Hypervisor Host Version Default=”” Max Length=250 |
| XdHcHypervisorConnectionName | string | Hypervisor Connection Name for HCL Connection Details object Default=”” Max Length=250 |
| XdHcHypervisorConnectionUid | string | Hypervisor Connection Uid for HCL Connection Details object Default=”” Max Length=250 |
| XdHcRevision | string | Revision for HCL Connection Details object Default=”” Max Length=250 |
| XdHcCustomProperties | string | Custom Properties for HCL Connection Details object Default=”” Max Length=65535 |
| XdHcSslThumbprints | string | Ssl Thumbprints for HCL Connection Details object Default=”” Max Length=65535 |
| CredentialsUid | string | UUID of any record associated with the credentials Default=”” Max Length=65535 |
| DdcType | uint | Type of the DDC. 0 = Unset, 1 = Citrix Cloud, 2 = customer-managed. Min=0, Max=2, Default=0 |
| EncryptionEpoch | UInt64 | Timestamp of the encryption Key used to encrypt fields Default=0 |
| DisableHostXsProxy | string | True to disable PVS-Accelerator Default=”” |
Optional SwitchParameter PassThru: If -PassThru is specified, the resulting PvsVirtualHostingPool object(s) are returned. SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Set PvsVirtualHostingPool for Individual Fields
Get the PvsVirtualHostingPool into a $o variable. Change the $o field values and then Set the PvsVirtualHostingPool with the result.
$o = Get-PvsVirtualHostingPool -Name theVirtualHostingPool -SiteName theSite -Fields Port
$o.Port = 180
Set-PvsVirtualHostingPool $o
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 2: Set PvsVirtualHostingPool for a Field Using Pipe
Get the PvsVirtualHostingPool into a $o variable. Change a $o field to the correct value and then Set the PvsVirtualHostingPool with the result.
Get-PvsVirtualHostingPool -Name theVirtualHostingPool -SiteName theSite -Fields Port | foreach { \$o = \$\_; \$o.Port = 180; \$o } | Set-PvsVirtualHostingPool
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. The “foreach { $o = $_; $o.X = Y; $o }” sets the field X to value Y and returns the object again so it can be piped to the Set command for update.
Set-PvsXDSite
Set XDSite(s) changed values from PvsXDSite object(s), or set one or more field values for a PvsXDSite.
Required PvsXDSite XDSite: PvsXDSite object(s) with changed property value(s) to be set. The object(s) can come from a pipeline. These values are in the PvsXDSite object, and only will be set if the value has changed.
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| ConfigServices | string[] | XenDesktop Server addresses. Max Length=2000 |
When XDSite is not passed, the parameters below are used: This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or XdSiteId | Guid | GUID of the XenDesktop Site to Set. |
Optional field values to set:
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| ConfigServices | string[] | XenDesktop Server addresses. Max Length=2000 |
Optional SwitchParameter PassThru: If -PassThru is specified, the resulting PvsXDSite object(s) are returned. SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Set PvsXDSite for Individual Fields
Get the PvsXDSite into a $o variable. Change the $o field values and then Set the PvsXDSite with the result.
$o = Get-PvsXDSite -Guid "27965b92-7034-408c-9910-cfff53f1feec" -Fields ConfigServices
$o.ConfigServices = "192.168.0.190", "192.168.0.191"
Set-PvsXDSite $o
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
EXAMPLE 2: Set PvsXDSite for a Field Using Pipe
Get the PvsXDSite into a $o variable. Change a $o field to the correct value and then Set the PvsXDSite with the result.
Get-PvsXDSite -Guid \"27965b92-7034-408c-9910-cfff53f1feec\" -Fields ConfigServices | foreach { \$o = \$\_; \$o.ConfigServices = \"192.168.0.190\", \"192.168.0.191\"; \$o } | Set-PvsXDSite
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. The “foreach { $o = $_; $o.X = Y; $o }” sets the field X to value Y and returns the object again so it can be piped to the Set command for update.
Start-PvsAutoUpdate
Apply Auto Update for a Server or all Servers in a Site.
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or ServerId | Guid[] | GUID of the Server to apply Auto Update. |
| Name or ServerName | string[] | Name of the Server to apply Auto Update. |
| SiteId | Guid[] | GUID of the Site to apply Auto Update on all Servers. |
| SiteName | string[] | Name of the Site to apply Auto Update on all Servers. |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
ServerId or SiteId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Start-PvsAutoUpdate for Name
Start-PvsAutoUpdate -Name theServer
EXAMPLE 2: Start-PvsAutoUpdate for PvsServer Using Pipe
The Get-PvsServer output is piped to the Start-PvsAutoUpdate.
Get-PvsServer -Name theServer -Fields -ServerId | Start-PvsAutoUpdate
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
EXAMPLE 3: Start-PvsAutoUpdate for SiteName
Start-PvsAutoUpdate -SiteName theSite
EXAMPLE 4: Start-PvsAutoUpdate for PvsSite Using Pipe
The Get-PvsSite output is piped to the Start-PvsAutoUpdate.
Get-PvsSite -SiteName theSite -Fields -SiteId | Start-PvsAutoUpdate
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
Start-PvsCreateBDM
Create a BDM disk file.
This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| DiskFileName | string[] | BDM filename |
This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| VhdFileSize | uint |
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| ServerIpList | string[] | |
| ServerFqdn | string[] |
Optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| ServerPort | string[] | |
| BootNicIndex | string[] | |
| UsingIpv6 | string[] | |
| DnsIpAddress1 | string[] | |
| DnsIpAddress2 | string[] |
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Start-PvsCreateDisk
Create a Disk and the Disk Locator for it. Returns the PvsDiskLocator created if finished. If not returned, then call CreateDiskStatus to get the PvsDiskLocator when processing finishes.
This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name | string | Name of the Disk file to be created. |
This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Size | UInt64 |
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| StoreId | Guid | |
| StoreName | string |
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid | |
| SiteName | string |
These are optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| ServerId | Guid | |
| ServerName | string |
Optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Description | string | |
| Enabled | SwitchParameter | |
| Format | SwitchParameter | |
| Type | SwitchParameter | |
| VhdBlockSize | uint | |
| LogicalSectorSize | uint |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
StoreId, SiteId or ServerId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter. PvsDiskLocator: If the create is already finished and successful, the PvsDiskLocator is returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Start-PvsCreateDisk for VHDX to PvsDiskLocator
This example creates a Dynamic VHDX Disk that has a size of 20 GB.
$thePvsDiskLocator = Start-PvsCreateDisk -Name theDiskName -Size 20480 -StoreName theStore -SiteName theSite -VHDX -Dynamic
while ($thePvsDiskLocator -eq $null) # while the create is processing
{
%percentFinished = Get-PvsCreateDiskStatus -Name theDiskName -StoreName theStore # get percent finished or DiskLocator when done
if (%percentFinished.GetType().Name == "PvsDiskLocator")
{
$thePvsDiskLocator = %percentFinished
}
else
{
%percentFinished.ToString() + "% finished" # display percent finished
Start-Sleep -seconds 10 # wait 10 seconds more
}
}
"Successful"
EXAMPLE 2: Start-PvsCreateDisk for VHD to PvsDiskLocator
TThis example creates a Fixed VHD Disk that has a size of 20 GB.
$thePvsDiskLocator = Start-PvsCreateDisk -Name theDiskName -Size 20480 -StoreName theStore -SiteName theSite
while ($thePvsDiskLocator -eq $null) # while the create is processing
{
%percentFinished = Get-PvsCreateDiskStatus -Name theDiskName -StoreName theStore # get percent finished or DiskLocator when done
if (%percentFinished.GetType().Name == "PvsDiskLocator")
{
$thePvsDiskLocator = %percentFinished
}
else
{
%percentFinished.ToString() + "% finished" # display percent finished
Start-Sleep -seconds 10 # wait 10 seconds more
}
}
"Successful"
Start-PvsDeviceBoot
Boot a Device, Collection or View. Returns a PvsTask of the Task being run. With the PvsTask, call Get-PvsTaskStatus to get the percent complete, Get-PvsTask to get the results, and Stop-PvsTask to stop it early. The PvsTask Results has the DeviceName/value of the devices that succeeded in the first name/value pair of each record of the XML.
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DeviceId | Guid[] | GUID of the Device to Boot. |
| Name or DeviceName | string[] | Name of the Device to Boot. |
| DeviceMac | PvsPhysicalAddress[] | MAC of the Device to Boot. |
| CollectionId | Guid | GUID of the Collection to Boot all Devices. |
| SiteViewId | Guid | GUID of the Site View to Boot all Devices. |
| FarmViewId | Guid | GUID of the Farm View to Boot all Devices. |
| FarmViewName | string | Name of the Farm View to Boot all Devices. |
or one of these is required & resolutions
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| CollectionName | string | |
| SiteViewName | string |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid | |
| SiteName | string |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
DeviceName, CollectionId, SiteViewId or FarmViewId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter. PvsTask: If successful, the PvsTask object for the process started is returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Start-PvsDeviceBoot for DeviceName to PvsTask
$thePvsTask = Start-PvsDeviceBoot -DeviceName theDevice # start the task
while ($thePvsTask.State -eq 0) # while the task is processing
{
%percentFinished = Get-PvsTaskStatus -Object $thePvsTask # get percent finished
%percentFinished.ToString() + "% finished" # display percent finished
Start-Sleep -seconds 10 # wait 10 seconds more
$thePvsTask = Get-PvsTask -Object $thePvsTask # get the current PvsTask object
}
if ($thePvsTask.State -eq 2) # check to see if completed
{
"Successful"
}
else
{
"Cancelled"
}
EXAMPLE 2: Start-PvsDeviceBoot for DeviceMac
Start-PvsDeviceBoot -DeviceMac "00-11-22-33-44-55"
EXAMPLE 3: Start-PvsDeviceBoot for FarmViewName
Start-PvsDeviceBoot -FarmViewName theFarmView
EXAMPLE 4: Start-PvsDeviceBoot for CollectionName
Start-PvsDeviceBoot -CollectionName theCollection -SiteName theSite
CollectionId can be used instead of CollectionName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 5: Start-PvsDeviceBoot for SiteViewName
Start-PvsDeviceBoot -SiteViewName theSiteView -SiteName theSite
SiteViewId can be used instead of SiteViewName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
Start-PvsDeviceDiskTempVersionMode
Set a Temporary Disk Version for the specified Device and optional DiskLocator. The Temporary Disk Version uses the production version that all production Devices boot from. Once set, the Device boots this Temporary Disk Version instead of any currently assigned vDisk. Not supported for non-production and Personal vDisk Devices. Cannot be done when the the Device already has a Temporary Disk Version, when the DiskLocator is using server side persistent cache mode or the active production version is in private mode.
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DeviceId | Guid[] | GUID of the Device to start to use a temporary disk version. |
| Name or DeviceName | string[] | Name of the Device to start to use a temporary disk version. |
| DeviceMac | PvsPhysicalAddress[] | MAC of the Device to start to use a temporary disk version. |
This is optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| DiskLocatorId | Guid[] |
or this is optional & resolution
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| DiskLocatorName | string[] |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| StoreId | Guid[] | |
| StoreName | string[] |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
DeviceId or DiskLocatorId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Start-PvsDeviceDiskTempVersionMode for DeviceName with DiskLocatorName
Start-PvsDeviceDiskTempVersionMode -Name theDevice -DiskLocatorName theDiskLocator -StoreName theStore
Start-PvsDeviceReboot
Reboot a Device, Collection or View. Returns a PvsTask of the Task being run. With the PvsTask, call Get-PvsTaskStatus to get the percent complete, Get-PvsTask to get the results, and Stop-PvsTask to stop it early. The PvsTask Results has the DeviceName/value of the devices that succeeded in the first name/value pair of each record of the XML.
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DeviceId | Guid[] | GUID of the Device to Reboot. |
| Name or DeviceName | string[] | Name of the Device to Reboot. |
| DeviceMac | PvsPhysicalAddress[] | MAC of the Device to Reboot. |
| CollectionId | Guid | GUID of the Collection to Reboot all Devices. |
| SiteViewId | Guid | GUID of the Site View to Reboot all Devices. |
| FarmViewId | Guid | GUID of the Farm View to Reboot all Devices. |
| FarmViewName | string | Name of the Farm View to Reboot all Devices. |
| DiskLocatorId | Guid | GUID of the DiskLocator to Reboot all Devices. |
or one of these is required & resolutions
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| CollectionName | string | |
| SiteViewName | string | |
| DiskLocatorName | string |
Optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Message | string | |
| Delay | uint | |
| Version | uint |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid | |
| SiteName | string |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| StoreId | Guid | |
| StoreName | string |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
DeviceName, CollectionId, SiteViewId, FarmViewId or DiskLocatorId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “medium”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “medium” or “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter. PvsTask: If successful, the PvsTask object for the process started is returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Start-PvsDeviceReboot for DeviceName to PvsTask
$thePvsTask = Start-PvsDeviceReboot -DeviceName theDevice # start the task
while ($thePvsTask.State -eq 0) # while the task is processing
{
%percentFinished = Get-PvsTaskStatus -Object $thePvsTask # get percent finished
%percentFinished.ToString() + "% finished" # display percent finished
Start-Sleep -seconds 10 # wait 10 seconds more
$thePvsTask = Get-PvsTask -Object $thePvsTask # get the current PvsTask object
}
if ($thePvsTask.State -eq 2) # check to see if completed
{
"Successful"
}
else
{
"Cancelled"
}
EXAMPLE 2: Start-PvsDeviceReboot for DeviceMac
Start-PvsDeviceReboot -DeviceMac "00-11-22-33-44-55"
EXAMPLE 3: Start-PvsDeviceReboot for FarmViewName
Start-PvsDeviceReboot -FarmViewName theFarmView
EXAMPLE 4: Start-PvsDeviceReboot for CollectionName
Start-PvsDeviceReboot -CollectionName theCollection -SiteName theSite
CollectionId can be used instead of CollectionName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 5: Start-PvsDeviceReboot for SiteViewName
Start-PvsDeviceReboot -SiteViewName theSiteView -SiteName theSite
SiteViewId can be used instead of SiteViewName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
Start-PvsDeviceReconnect
Reconnect a Device, Collection or View. Returns a PvsTask of the Task being run. With the PvsTask, call Get-PvsTaskStatus to get the percent complete, Get-PvsTask to get the results, and Stop-PvsTask to stop it early. The PvsTask Results has the DeviceName/value of the devices that succeeded in the first name/value pair of each record of the XML.
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DeviceId | Guid[] | GUID of the Device to Reconnect. |
| Name or DeviceName | string[] | Name of the Device to Reconnect. |
| DeviceMac | PvsPhysicalAddress[] | MAC of the Device to Reconnect. |
| CollectionId | Guid | GUID of the Collection to Reconnect all Devices. |
| SiteViewId | Guid | GUID of the Site View to Reconnect all Devices. |
| FarmViewId | Guid | GUID of the Farm View to Reconnect all Devices. |
| FarmViewName | string | Name of the Farm View to Reconnect all Devices. |
| DiskLocatorId | Guid | GUID of the DiskLocator to Reconnect all Devices. |
or one of these is required & resolutions
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| CollectionName | string | |
| SiteViewName | string | |
| DiskLocatorName | string |
Optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Version | uint |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid | |
| SiteName | string |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| StoreId | Guid | |
| StoreName | string |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
DeviceName, CollectionId, SiteViewId, FarmViewId or DiskLocatorId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “medium”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “medium” or “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter. PvsTask: If successful, the PvsTask object for the process started is returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Start-PvsDeviceReconnect for DeviceName to PvsTask
$thePvsTask = Start-PvsDeviceReconnect -DeviceName theDevice # start the task
while ($thePvsTask.State -eq 0) # while the task is processing
{
%percentFinished = Get-PvsTaskStatus -Object $thePvsTask # get percent finished
%percentFinished.ToString() + "% finished" # display percent finished
Start-Sleep -seconds 10 # wait 10 seconds more
$thePvsTask = Get-PvsTask -Object $thePvsTask # get the current PvsTask object
}
if ($thePvsTask.State -eq 2) # check to see if completed
{
"Successful"
}
else
{
"Cancelled"
}
EXAMPLE 2: Start-PvsDeviceReconnect for DeviceMac
Start-PvsDeviceReconnect -DeviceMac "00-11-22-33-44-55"
EXAMPLE 3: Start-PvsDeviceReconnect for FarmViewName
Start-PvsDeviceReconnect -FarmViewName theFarmView
EXAMPLE 4: Start-PvsDeviceReconnect for CollectionName
Start-PvsDeviceReconnect -CollectionName theCollection -SiteName theSite
CollectionId can be used instead of CollectionName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 5: Start-PvsDeviceReconnect for SiteViewName
Start-PvsDeviceReconnect -SiteViewName theSiteView -SiteName theSite
SiteViewId can be used instead of SiteViewName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
Start-PvsDeviceShutdown
Shutdown a Device, Collection or View. Returns a PvsTask of the Task being run. With the PvsTask, call Get-PvsTaskStatus to get the percent complete, Get-PvsTask to get the results, and Stop-PvsTask to stop it early. The PvsTask Results has the DeviceName/value of the devices that succeeded in the first name/value pair of each record of the XML.
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DeviceId | Guid[] | GUID of the Device to Shutdown. |
| Name or DeviceName | string[] | Name of the Device to Shutdown. |
| DeviceMac | PvsPhysicalAddress[] | MAC of the Device to Shutdown. |
| CollectionId | Guid | GUID of the Collection to Shutdown all Devices. |
| SiteViewId | Guid | GUID of the Site View to Shutdown all Devices. |
| FarmViewId | Guid | GUID of the Farm View to Shutdown all Devices. |
| FarmViewName | string | Name of the Farm View to Shutdown all Devices. |
| DiskLocatorId | Guid | GUID of the DiskLocator to Shutdown all Devices. |
or one of these is required & resolutions
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| CollectionName | string | |
| SiteViewName | string | |
| DiskLocatorName | string |
Optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Message | string | |
| Delay | uint | |
| Version | uint |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid | |
| SiteName | string |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| StoreId | Guid | |
| StoreName | string |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
DeviceName, CollectionId, SiteViewId, FarmViewId or DiskLocatorId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “medium”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “medium” or “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter. PvsTask: If successful, the PvsTask object for the process started is returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Start-PvsDeviceShutdown for DeviceName to PvsTask
$thePvsTask = Start-PvsDeviceShutdown -DeviceName theDevice # start the task
while ($thePvsTask.State -eq 0) # while the task is processing
{
%percentFinished = Get-PvsTaskStatus -Object $thePvsTask # get percent finished
%percentFinished.ToString() + "% finished" # display percent finished
Start-Sleep -seconds 10 # wait 10 seconds more
$thePvsTask = Get-PvsTask -Object $thePvsTask # get the current PvsTask object
}
if ($thePvsTask.State -eq 2) # check to see if completed
{
"Successful"
}
else
{
"Cancelled"
}
EXAMPLE 2: Start-PvsDeviceShutdown for DeviceMac
Start-PvsDeviceShutdown -DeviceMac "00-11-22-33-44-55"
EXAMPLE 3: Start-PvsDeviceShutdown for FarmViewName
Start-PvsDeviceShutdown -FarmViewName theFarmView
EXAMPLE 4: Start-PvsDeviceShutdown for CollectionName
Start-PvsDeviceShutdown -CollectionName theCollection -SiteName theSite
CollectionId can be used instead of CollectionName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 5: Start-PvsDeviceShutdown for SiteViewName
Start-PvsDeviceShutdown -SiteViewName theSiteView -SiteName theSite
SiteViewId can be used instead of SiteViewName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
Start-PvsDeviceUpdateBdm
Update the BDM partition for a Device, Collection or View. Returns a PvsTask of the Task being run. With the PvsTask, call Get-PvsTaskStatus to get the percent complete, Get-PvsTask to get the results, and Stop-PvsTask to stop it early. The PvsTask Results has the DeviceName/value of the devices that succeeded in the first name/value pair of each record of the XML.
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DeviceId | Guid[] | GUID of the Device to Update. |
| Name or DeviceName | string[] | Name of the Device to Update. |
| CollectionId | Guid | GUID of the Collection to Update all BDM Devices. |
| SiteViewId | Guid | GUID of the Site View to Update all BDM Devices. |
| FarmViewId | Guid | GUID of the Farm View to Update all BDM Devices. |
| FarmViewName | string | Name of the Farm View to Update all BDM Devices. |
or one of these is required & resolutions
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| CollectionName | string | |
| SiteViewName | string |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid | |
| SiteName | string |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
DeviceName, CollectionId, SiteViewId or FarmViewId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter. PvsTask: If successful, the PvsTask object for the process started is returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Start-PvsDeviceUpdateBdm for DeviceName to PvsTask
$thePvsTask = Start-PvsDeviceUpdateBdm -DeviceName theDevice # start the task
while ($thePvsTask.State -eq 0) # while the task is processing
{
%percentFinished = Get-PvsTaskStatus -Object $thePvsTask # get percent finished
%percentFinished.ToString() + "% finished" # display percent finished
Start-Sleep -seconds 10 # wait 10 seconds more
$thePvsTask = Get-PvsTask -Object $thePvsTask # get the current PvsTask object
}
if ($thePvsTask.State -eq 2) # check to see if completed
{
"Successful"
}
else
{
"Cancelled"
}
EXAMPLE 2: Start-PvsDeviceUpdateBdm for FarmViewName
Start-PvsDeviceUpdateBdm -FarmViewName theFarmView
EXAMPLE 3: Start-PvsDeviceUpdateBdm for CollectionName
Start-PvsDeviceUpdateBdm -CollectionName theCollection -SiteName theSite
CollectionId can be used instead of CollectionName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 4: Start-PvsDeviceUpdateBdm for SiteViewName
Start-PvsDeviceUpdateBdm -SiteViewName theSiteView -SiteName theSite
SiteViewId can be used instead of SiteViewName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
Start-PvsDisplayMessage
Display a message on a Device, Collection or View. Returns a PvsTask of the Task being run. With the PvsTask, call Get-PvsTaskStatus to get the percent complete, Get-PvsTask to get the results, and Stop-PvsTask to stop it early. The PvsTask Results has the DeviceName/value of the devices that succeeded in the first name/value pair of each record of the XML.
This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Message | string | Message to display on the Device(s). |
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| DeviceId | Guid[] | |
| DeviceName | string[] | |
| DeviceMac | PvsPhysicalAddress[] | |
| CollectionId | Guid | |
| SiteViewId | Guid | |
| FarmViewId | Guid | |
| FarmViewName | string |
or one of these is required & resolutions
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| CollectionName | string | |
| SiteViewName | string |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid | |
| SiteName | string |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
DeviceName, CollectionId, SiteViewId or FarmViewId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter. PvsTask: If successful, the PvsTask object for the process started is returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Start-PvsDisplayMessage for DeviceName to PvsTask
$thePvsTask = Start-PvsDisplayMessage -DeviceName theDevice -Message "message" # start the task
while ($thePvsTask.State -eq 0) # while the task is processing
{
%percentFinished = Get-PvsTaskStatus -Object $thePvsTask # get percent finished
%percentFinished.ToString() + "% finished" # display percent finished
Start-Sleep -seconds 10 # wait 10 seconds more
$thePvsTask = Get-PvsTask -Object $thePvsTask # get the current PvsTask object
}
if ($thePvsTask.State -eq 2) # check to see if completed
{
"Successful"
}
else
{
"Cancelled"
}
EXAMPLE 2: Start-PvsDisplayMessage for DeviceMac
Start-PvsDisplayMessage -DeviceMac "00-11-22-33-44-55" -Message "message"
EXAMPLE 3: Start-PvsDisplayMessage for FarmViewName
Start-PvsDisplayMessage -FarmViewName theFarmView -Message "message"
EXAMPLE 4: Start-PvsDisplayMessage for CollectionName
Start-PvsDisplayMessage -CollectionName theCollection -SiteName theSite -Message "message"
CollectionId can be used instead of CollectionName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 5: Start-PvsDisplayMessage for SiteViewName
Start-PvsDisplayMessage -SiteViewName theSiteView -SiteName theSite -Message "message"
SiteViewId can be used instead of SiteViewName so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
Start-PvsReportBug
Report a bug at individual server level or at site level. Problem report can be uploaded to Citrix Systems or can be saved locally in a path accessible from all servers in the farm.
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or SiteId | Guid | GUID of the Site. |
| ServerId | Guid | GUID of the Server. |
or one of these is required & resolutions
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or SiteName | string | |
| ServerName | string |
This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Summary | string |
This is optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SrNumber | string |
This is optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Description | string |
This is optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Path | string |
This is optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| DateTime | DateTime |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
SiteId or ServerId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter. PvsTask: If successful, the PvsTask object for the process started is returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Start-PvsReportBug for SiteName to PvsTask
$thePvsTask = Start-PvsReportBug -SiteName theSite -bugReportSummary test bug report # start the task
while ($thePvsTask.State -eq 0) # while the task is processing
{
%percentFinished = Get-PvsTaskStatus -Object $thePvsTask # get percent finished
%percentFinished.ToString() + "% finished" # display percent finished
Start-Sleep -seconds 10 # wait 10 seconds more
$thePvsTask = Get-PvsTask -Object $thePvsTask # get the current PvsTask object
}
if ($thePvsTask.State -eq 2) # check to see if completed
{
"Successful"
}
else
{
"Cancelled"
}
Start-PvsRotateEncryptionKeys
Cycle the keys used to encrypt sensitive data
Examples
Cycle the keys used to encrypt sensitive data
Cycle the keys used to encrypt sensitive data
Start-PvsRotateEncryptionKeys
Start-PvsStreamService
Start the Stream Service on a Server or all Servers in a Site.
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or ServerId | Guid[] | GUID of the Server to start the Stream Service. |
| Name or ServerName | string[] | Name of the Server to start the Stream Service. |
| SiteId | Guid[] | GUID of the Site to start the Stream Service on all Servers. |
| SiteName | string[] | Name of the Site to start the Stream Service on all Servers. |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
ServerId or SiteId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Start-PvsStreamService for Name
Start-PvsStreamService -Name theServer
EXAMPLE 2: Start-PvsStreamService for PvsServer Using Pipe
The Get-PvsServer output is piped to the Start-PvsStreamService.
Get-PvsServer -Name theServer -Fields Guid | Start-PvsStreamService
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
EXAMPLE 3: Start-PvsStreamService for SiteName
Start-PvsStreamService -SiteName theSite
EXAMPLE 4: Start-PvsStreamService for PvsSite Using Pipe
The Get-PvsSite output is piped to the Start-PvsStreamService.
Get-PvsSite -Name theSite -Fields Guid | Start-PvsStreamService
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
Start-PvsUpdateTask
Starts an Update Task.
This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or UpdateTaskId | Guid[] | GUID of the Update Task to Start. |
or this is required & resolution
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or UpdateTaskName | string[] |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid[] | |
| SiteName | string[] |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
UpdateTaskId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Start-PvsUpdateTask for Name
Start-PvsUpdateTask -Name theUpdateTask -SiteName theSite
Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 2: Start-PvsUpdateTask for PvsUpdateTask Using Pipe
The Get-PvsUpdateTask output is piped to the Start-PvsUpdateTask.
Get-PvsUpdateTask -Name theUpdateTask -SiteName theSite -Fields Guid | Start-PvsUpdateTask
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
Stop-PvsCreateDisk
Cancel an active CreateDisk.
This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name | string[] | Name of the Disk file that is being created. |
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| StoreId | Guid[] | |
| StoreName | string[] |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
StoreId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “medium”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “medium” or “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Stop-PvsCreateDisk for Name
Stop-PvsCreateDisk -Name theDiskFile -StoreName theStore
EXAMPLE 2: Stop-PvsCreateDisk for PvsStore Using Pipe
The Get-PvsStore output is piped to the Stop-PvsCreateDisk.
Get-PvsStore -Name theStore -Fields Guid | Stop-PvsCreateDisk -Name theDiskFile
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
Stop-PvsDeviceDiskTempVersionMode
Unset the Temporary Disk Version for the specified Device. The Device must not currently be booted. Once removed, the Device again uses any currently assigned vDisk when booted.
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DeviceId | Guid[] | GUID of the Device to no longer use a temporary disk version for. |
| Name or DeviceName | string[] | Name of the Device to no longer use a temporary disk version for. |
| DeviceMac | PvsPhysicalAddress[] | MAC of the Device to no longer use a temporary disk version for. |
| DiskLocatorId | Guid[] | GUID of the DiskLocator to no longer use temporary disk versions for. |
| SiteId | Guid[] | GUID of the Site for resolution of the DiskLocatorName. |
| SiteName | string[] | Name of the Site for resolution of the DiskLocatorName. |
or this is required & resolution
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| DiskLocatorName | string[] |
This is optional & resolution
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Version | string[] |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid[] | GUID of the Site for resolution of the DiskLocatorName. |
| SiteName | string[] | Name of the Site for resolution of the DiskLocatorName. |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| DiskLocatorId | Guid[] | GUID of the DiskLocator to no longer use temporary disk versions for. |
| DiskLocatorName | string[] |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| StoreId | Guid[] | |
| StoreName | string[] |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
DeviceId, DiskLocatorId or SiteId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Stop-PvsDeviceDiskTempVersionMode for Device
Stop-PvsDeviceDiskTempVersionMode -Name theDevice
EXAMPLE 2: Stop-PvsDeviceDiskTempVersionMode for DiskLocator
Stop-PvsDeviceDiskTempVersionMode -DiskLocatorName theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore
DiskLocatorId can be used instead of DiskLocatorName so that the StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
EXAMPLE 3: Stop-PvsDeviceDiskTempVersionMode with DiskLocator
Stop-PvsDeviceDiskTempVersionMode -DiskLocatorName theDiskLocator -Version 4 -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore
DiskLocatorId can be used instead of DiskLocatorName so that the StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
Stop-PvsStreamService
Stop the Stream Service on a Server or all Servers in a Site.
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or ServerId | Guid[] | GUID of the Server to stop the Stream Service. |
| Name or ServerName | string[] | Name of the Server to stop the Stream Service. |
| SiteId | Guid[] | GUID of the Site to stop the Stream Service on all Servers. |
| SiteName | string[] | Name of the Site to stop the Stream Service on all Servers. |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
ServerId or SiteId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “medium”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “medium” or “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Stop-PvsStreamService for Name
Stop-PvsStreamService -Name theServer
EXAMPLE 2: Stop-PvsStreamService for PvsServer Using Pipe
The Get-PvsServer output is piped to the Stop-PvsStreamService.
Get-PvsServer -Name theServer -Fields Guid | Stop-PvsStreamService
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
EXAMPLE 3: Stop-PvsStreamService for SiteName
Stop-PvsStreamService -SiteName theSite
EXAMPLE 4: Stop-PvsStreamService for PvsSite Using Pipe
The Get-PvsSite output is piped to the Stop-PvsStreamService.
Get-PvsSite -Name theSite -Fields Guid | Stop-PvsStreamService
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
Stop-PvsTask
Cancel a running Task.
This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| TaskId | uint | Id of the Task to Cancel. |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
TaskId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “medium”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “medium” or “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Stop-PvsTask for TaskId
Stop-PvsTask -TaskId 101
Stop-PvsUpdateTask
Cancel an active Update Task for an Update Device.
This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or UpdateTaskId | Guid[] | GUID of the Update Task to Cancel. |
or this is required & resolution
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or UpdateTaskName | string[] |
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| DeviceId | Guid[] | |
| DeviceName | string[] |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid[] | |
| SiteName | string[] |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
UpdateTaskId or DeviceId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “medium”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “medium” or “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Stop-PvsUpdateTask for Name
Stop-PvsUpdateTask -Name theUpdateTask -DeviceName theDevice
EXAMPLE 2: Stop-PvsUpdateTask for PvsUpdateTask Using Pipe
The Get-PvsUpdateTask output is piped to the Stop-PvsUpdateTask.
Get-PvsUpdateTask -Name theUpdateTask -SiteName theSite -Fields Guid | Stop-PvsUpdateTask -DeviceName theDevice
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId is not also needed.
EXAMPLE 3: Stop-PvsUpdateTask for PvsDiskUpdateDevice Using Pipe
The Get-PvsDiskUpdateDevice output is piped to the Stop-PvsUpdateTask.
Get-PvsDiskUpdateDevice -Name theDevice -Fields Guid | Stop-PvsUpdateTask -Name theUpdateTask
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
Test-PvsDirectory
Validate a Directory on the Server specified.
One of these is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or ServerId | Guid[] | GUID of the Server to validate a Directory on. |
| Name or ServerName | string[] | Name of the Server to validate a Directory on. |
This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Path | string[] |
This is optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| ReadOnly | SwitchParameter |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
ServerId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Test-PvsDirectory for Name
Test-PvsDirectory -Name theServer -Path "C:\directory\subdirectory"
EXAMPLE 2: Test-PvsDirectory for PvsServer Using Pipe
The Get-PvsServer output is piped to the Test-PvsDirectory.
Get-PvsServer -Name theServer -Fields Guid | Test-PvsDirectory -Path \"C:\directory\subdirectory\"
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
EXAMPLE 3: Test-PvsDirectory for Name with ReadOnly
Test-PvsDirectory -Name theServer -Path "C:\directory\subdirectory" -ReadOnly
EXAMPLE 4: Test-PvsDirectory for PvsServer Using Pipe
The Get-PvsServer output is piped to the Test-PvsDirectory.
Get-PvsServer -Name theServer -Fields Guid | Test-PvsDirectory -Path \"C:\directory\subdirectory\" -ReadOnly
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved.
Test-PvsVirtualHostConnection
Verify the virtual host connection
This is optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Password | string | Password to use when logging into the Virtual Host Server |
or this is optional & resolution
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| UserName | string |
Optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or VirtualHostingPoolId | Guid | |
| Type | uint | |
| Server | string | |
| Port | uint | |
| Datacenter | string |
This resolution when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Password | string | Password to use when logging into the Virtual Host Server |
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “low”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter. Boolean: If successful, $true or $false is returned.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Test-PvsVirtualHostConnection for existing credentials
Test-PvsVirtualHostConnection -virtualHostingPoolId thevirtualHostingPoolId
EXAMPLE 2: Test-PvsVirtualHostConnection for specified credentials
Test-PvsVirtualHostConnection -virtualHostingPoolId thevirtualHostingPoolId -UserName theUser -Password thePassword
Unlock-PvsAllDisk
Remove all locks for a Disk.
This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DiskLocatorId | Guid[] | GUID of the Disk Locator to remove all locks for the Disk. |
or this is required & resolution
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or DiskLocatorName | string[] |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid[] | |
| SiteName | string[] |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| StoreId | Guid[] | |
| StoreName | string[] |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
DiskLocatorId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “medium”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “medium” or “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Unlock-PvsAllDisk for Name
Unlock-PvsAllDisk -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore
Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
EXAMPLE 2: Unlock-PvsAllDisk for PvsDiskLocator Using Pipe
The Get-PvsDiskLocator output is piped to the Unlock-PvsAllDisk.
Get-PvsDiskLocator -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore -Fields Guid | Unlock-PvsAllDisk
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
Unlock-PvsDisk
Remove lock for the Disk.
This is required
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Guid or DiskLocatorId | Guid[] | GUID of the Disk Locator to remove a lock for the Disk. |
or this is required & resolution
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| Name or DiskLocatorName | string[] |
Optional
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| OwnerId | Guid[] |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| SiteId | Guid[] | |
| SiteName | string[] |
One of these resolutions when needed
| Name | Type | Description |
|---|---|---|
| StoreId | Guid[] | |
| StoreName | string[] |
Instead of a parameter that matches one of the members listed
PvsObject[] Object: PvsObjects with the members below can be used as the Object parameter or from a pipeline:
DiskLocatorId
Optional SwitchParameter Confirm: The impact of this operation is “medium”. If -Confirm is specified, the operation will be confirmed. $ConfirmPreference can be set to “medium” or “low” to have confirmation without the Confirm parameter.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Unlock-PvsDisk for Name
Unlock-PvsDisk -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore
Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
EXAMPLE 2: Unlock-PvsDisk for PvsDiskLocator Using Pipe
The Get-PvsDiskLocator output is piped to the Unlock-PvsDisk.
Get-PvsDiskLocator -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore -Fields Guid | Unlock-PvsDisk
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
EXAMPLE 3: Unlock-PvsDisk for Name with OwnerId
Unlock-PvsDisk -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore -OwnerId = "e6c9884e-067c-4924-a581-312c699b4bb6"
Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
EXAMPLE 4: Unlock-PvsDisk for PvsDiskLocator Using Pipe
The Get-PvsDiskLocator output is piped to the Unlock-PvsDisk.
Get-PvsDiskLocator -Name theDiskLocator -SiteName theSite -StoreName theStore -Fields Guid | Unlock-PvsDisk -OwnerId = \"e6c9884e-067c-4924-a581-312c699b4bb6\"
The -Fields parameter with only the needed fields specified makes the Get work faster because only those fields are retrieved. Guid can be used instead of Name so that the SiteName or SiteId and StoreName or StoreId are not also needed.
Update-PvsInventory
Force the Inventory service to refresh its Inventory Table.
Examples
EXAMPLE 1: Update-PvsInventory
Update-PvsInventory
In this article
- Add-PvsDeviceToDomain
- Add-PvsDeviceToView
- Add-PvsDiskLocatorToDevice
- Add-PvsDiskToUpdateTask
- Add-PvsDiskVersion
- Clear-PvsConnection
- Clear-PvsTask
- Copy-PvsDeviceProperties
- Copy-PvsDiskProperties
- Copy-PvsServerProperties
- Disable-PvsDeviceDiskLocator
- Dismount-PvsDisk
- Enable-PvsDeviceDiskLocator
- Export-PvsAuditTrail
- Export-PvsDisk
- Export-PvsOemLicenses
- Get-PvsADAccount
- Get-PvsAuditActionParameter
- Get-PvsAuditActionProperty
- Get-PvsAuditActionSibling
- Get-PvsAuditTrail
- Get-PvsAuthGroup
- Get-PvsAuthGroupUsage
- Get-PvsCeipData
- Get-PvsCisData
- Get-PvsCollection
- Get-PvsConnection
- Get-PvsCreateDiskStatus
- Get-PvsDevice
- Get-PvsDeviceBootstrap
- Get-PvsDeviceCount
- Get-PvsDeviceDiskLocatorEnabled
- Get-PvsDeviceDiskTempVersion
- Get-PvsDeviceInfo
- Get-PvsDevicePersonality
- Get-PvsDeviceStatus
- Get-PvsDirectory
- Get-PvsDisk
- Get-PvsDiskInfo
- Get-PvsDiskInventory
- Get-PvsDiskLocator
- Get-PvsDiskLocatorCount
- Get-PvsDiskLocatorLock
- Get-PvsDiskUpdateDevice
- Get-PvsDiskUpdateStatus
- Get-PvsDiskVersion
- Get-PvsExists
- Get-PvsFarm
- Get-PvsFarmView
- Get-PvsGroup
- Get-PvsKeyRotationPendingServers
- Get-PvsLocalServer
- Get-PvsMaintenanceVersionExists
- Get-PvsMinimumLastAutoAddDeviceNumber
- Get-PvsMountedDisk
- Get-PvsMountedDriveLetter
- Get-PvsNewDiskVersion
- Get-PvsScrambledDataReport
- Get-PvsServer
- Get-PvsServerBiosBootstrap
- Get-PvsServerBootstrap
- Get-PvsServerBootstrapName
- Get-PvsServerCount
- Get-PvsServerInfo
- Get-PvsServerName
- Get-PvsServerStatus
- Get-PvsServerStore
- Get-PvsServerStoreActiveDeviceCount
- Get-PvsSite
- Get-PvsSiteView
- Get-PvsStore
- Get-PvsStoreFreeSpace
- Get-PvsStoreSharedOrServerPath
- Get-PvsTask
- Get-PvsTaskStatus
- Get-PvsUndefinedDisk
- Get-PvsUpdateTask
- Get-PvsUploadCeip
- Get-PvsVersion
- Get-PvsVirtualHostingPool
- Get-PvsXDSite
- Grant-PvsAuthGroup
- Import-PvsDevices
- Import-PvsDisk
- Import-PvsOemLicenses
- Invoke-PvsActivateDeviceMAK
- Invoke-PvsMarkDown
- Invoke-PvsPromoteDiskVersion
- Invoke-PvsRebalanceDevices
- Invoke-PvsRevertDiskVersion
- Merge-PvsDisk
- Mount-PvsDisk
- Move-PvsDeviceToCollection
- Move-PvsServerToSite
- New-PvsAuthGroup
- New-PvsCeipData
- New-PvsCisData
- New-PvsCollection
- New-PvsDevice
- New-PvsDeviceWithPersonalvDisk
- New-PvsDirectory
- New-PvsDiskLocator
- New-PvsDiskMaintenanceVersion
- New-PvsDiskUpdateDevice
- New-PvsFarmView
- New-PvsServer
- New-PvsSite
- New-PvsSiteView
- New-PvsStore
- New-PvsUpdateTask
- New-PvsVirtualHostingPool
- Remove-PvsAuthGroup
- Remove-PvsCollection
- Remove-PvsDevice
- Remove-PvsDeviceDiskCacheFile
- Remove-PvsDeviceFromDomain
- Remove-PvsDeviceFromView
- Remove-PvsDirectory
- Remove-PvsDiskFromUpdateTask
- Remove-PvsDiskLocator
- Remove-PvsDiskLocatorFromDevice
- Remove-PvsDiskUpdateDevice
- Remove-PvsDiskVersion
- Remove-PvsFarmView
- Remove-PvsServer
- Remove-PvsServerStore
- Remove-PvsSite
- Remove-PvsSiteView
- Remove-PvsStore
- Remove-PvsUpdateTask
- Remove-PvsVirtualHostingPool
- Reset-PvsDatabase
- Reset-PvsDeviceForDomain
- Restart-PvsStreamService
- Revoke-PvsAuthGroup
- Set-PvsAuthGroup
- Set-PvsCeipData
- Set-PvsCisData
- Set-PvsCollection
- Set-PvsConnection
- Set-PvsDevice
- Set-PvsDeviceBootstrap
- Set-PvsDevicePersonality
- Set-PvsDisk
- Set-PvsDiskLocator
- Set-PvsDiskUpdateDevice
- Set-PvsDiskVersion
- Set-PvsFarm
- Set-PvsFarmView
- Set-PvsOverrideVersion
- Set-PvsServer
- Set-PvsServerBiosBootstrap
- Set-PvsServerBootstrap
- Set-PvsServerStore
- Set-PvsSite
- Set-PvsSiteView
- Set-PvsStore
- Set-PvsUpdateTask
- Set-PvsVirtualHostingPool
- Set-PvsXDSite
- Start-PvsAutoUpdate
- Start-PvsCreateBDM
- Start-PvsCreateDisk
- Start-PvsDeviceBoot
- Start-PvsDeviceDiskTempVersionMode
- Start-PvsDeviceReboot
- Start-PvsDeviceReconnect
- Start-PvsDeviceShutdown
- Start-PvsDeviceUpdateBdm
- Start-PvsDisplayMessage
- Start-PvsReportBug
- Start-PvsRotateEncryptionKeys
- Start-PvsStreamService
- Start-PvsUpdateTask
- Stop-PvsCreateDisk
- Stop-PvsDeviceDiskTempVersionMode
- Stop-PvsStreamService
- Stop-PvsTask
- Stop-PvsUpdateTask
- Test-PvsDirectory
- Test-PvsVirtualHostConnection
- Unlock-PvsAllDisk
- Unlock-PvsDisk
- Update-PvsInventory